HONDA HONDA 2022 CIVIC Sedan Owner's Manual

Owner's Manual for HONDA models including: HONDA, 2022 CIVIC, Sedan

2022 Honda Civic owners manual - OwnersMan

2022 Honda Civic Owner Manual

2022 Honda Civic Owner’s Manual - Car Mechanic Workshop

File Info : application/pdf, 700 Pages, 13.98MB

JavaScript is disabled. Open the PDF or Download.

2022 Honda Civic-sedan

Owner's Manual
2022 CIVIC
Sedan

Event Data Recorders This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in understanding how a vehicle's systems performed. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record such data as: · How various systems in your vehicle were operating; · Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts were
buckled/fastened; · How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the accelerator
and/or brake pedal; and, · How fast the vehicle was traveling. These data can help provide a better understanding of the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur. NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR under normal driving conditions and no personal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location) are recorded. However, other parties, such as law enforcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of personally identifying data routinely acquired during a crash investigation.
To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such as law enforcement, that have the special equipment, can read the information if they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

The data belongs to the vehicle owner and may not be accessed by anyone else except as legally required or with the permission of the vehicle owner.
Service Diagnostic Recorders This vehicle is equipped with service-related devices that record information about powertrain performance. The data can be used to verify emissions law requirements and/or help technicians diagnose and solve service problems. It may also be combined with data from other sources for research purposes, but it remains confidential. Some diagnostic and maintenance information is uploaded to Honda upon vehicle start up.
Vehicle Data Recordings This vehicle records the following information as data when the Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) is operated. Operational status of each function of the CMBSTM Accelerator / brake pedal operation Vehicle speed Information such as distance and relative speed of the target
identified by the CMBSTM activated Honda may obtain and use the recorded data for the purpose of technical diagnosis and research and development of Honda vehicles. The CMBSTM does not record images or audio inside the vehicle. Special tools are required to review or remove data recorded by CMBSTM.

Disclosure of data Honda will not disclose or provide the acquired data to third parties with data recorded by CMBSTM except in the following cases: When the owner of the vehicle consents When required by law, court order, or similar legally
enforceable request When the data has been processed to de-identify/anonymize
the vehicles/users, such as when aggregate data is provided to research institutions
California Perchlorate Contamination Prevention Act The airbags, seat belt tensioners, and CR type batteries in this vehicle may contain perchlorate materials - special handling may apply. See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate/
As you read this manual, you will find information that is preceded by a NOTICE symbol. This information is intended to help you avoid damage to your vehicle, other property, or the environment.

System Updates Terms and Conditions*
General Your vehicle has an application that allows your Display Audio to automatically search for Honda software updates that are specific to your Display Audio and its connected devices (initially every one (1) week via Wi-Fi or every four (4) weeks via Telematics Control Unit (TCU)*, queries may occur more or less frequently due to internet outages, retries, direct user action, WAP push from the server or a change in query policy on the Honda servers). This application periodically transmits to our servers a limited amount of vehicle and device information (Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), the Model Type (MT) Identification Number, Hardware and Software Part Number, Serial Number, Software Version, preferred language, Internet Protocol (IP) address, Transaction Log (alert or update viewing, update download and installation, software status), etc.). When the application finds an update from the server, the application initially asks permission to download and install the update. You may elect to automatically download and install these updates in your settings, or, you may elect to manually update the system.
When your Display Audio searches our servers for updates or alerts, we will automatically provide you with the opportunity to update your devices or transmit the update or alert directly to your Display Audio. We will also maintain a log of the updates or alerts that are installed on our servers.
Your Personal Data Should the aforementioned information transmitted to Honda constitute personal information in your region, please note that this information will be treated in strict accordance with the rules and regulations outlined in this notice as well as applicable data protection law.
* Not available on all models

The terms of our privacy policy are incorporated into these terms by reference and your use of system updates will be subject to the privacy policy. Our privacy policy sets out information about how we and any named third parties will process any personal data we collect from you or that you provide to us, via the application. See the Honda website for further details. U.S.: www.honda.com Canada: www.honda.ca
Honda collects, uses and stores your personal data for the reasons set out below: Where necessary for Honda's legitimate interests, as listed below, and where our interests are not overridden by your data protection rights. to deliver the system updates and related services to you; to allow us to improve and optimize the system updates
products and services; to respond to user questions and complaints; and for internal
record keeping.
Protecting our legitimate business interests and legal rights includes, but is not limited to, use in connection with compliance, regulatory, auditing, legal claims (including disclosure of such information in connection with legal process or litigation) and other ethics and compliance reporting requirements.
Honda will also convert personal data into anonymous data and use it (normally on an aggregated statistical basis) for uses such as market research and analysis, to improve the system updates, to analyze trends, and to assess the success of software update releases. Aggregated personal information does not personally identify you or any other use of the system updates.
Honda may share this data with Honda's worldwide support organization or affiliated Honda companies or other third parties engaged by Honda for the purposes of rendering support services in connection with system support.

Software End User License Agreement Your vehicle comes equipped with software, which is governed by the End User License Agreement in Owner's Manual, and which contains a binding arbitration clause. Please refer to the End User License Agreement for the terms and conditions governing your use of the installed software, as well as the applications, services, functions, and content provided through the software. Your use of the installed software will serve as your consent to the terms and conditions of the End User License Agreement. You may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at American Honda Motor Co., Inc., Honda Automobile Customer Service, Mail Stop CHI-5, 1919 Torrance Blvd., Torrance, CA 90501-2746.
Privacy Notice This vehicle may share location and usage information. To manage this setting, visit www.hondalink.com/vehicle-data-choices.
To learn more about how we collect and use Personal Information, please read our Privacy Policy, accessible at www.honda.com.

A Few Words About Safety
Your safety, and the safety of others, is very important. And operating this vehicle safely is an important responsibility.
To help you make informed decisions about safety, we have provided operating procedures and other information on labels and in this manual. This information alerts you to potential hazards that could hurt you or others.
Of course, it is not practical or possible to warn you about all the hazards associated with operating or maintaining your vehicle. You must use your own good judgment.
You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms, including:

3 DANGER 3 WARNING 3 CAUTION

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLY HURT if you don't follow instructions.
You CAN be HURT if you don't follow instructions.

Safety Headings - such as Important Safety Precautions. Safety Section - such as Safe Driving. Instructions - how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information - please read it carefully.

Safety Labels - on the vehicle.
Safety Messages - preceded by a safety alert symbol 3 and
one of three signal words: DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION.
These signal words mean:

Contents

This owner's manual should be considered a permanent part of the 2 Safe Driving P. 37

vehicle and should remain with the vehicle when it is sold.

For Safe Driving P. 38

Seat Belts P. 42

Airbags P. 51

The Navigation Manual is available online at owners.honda.com (U.S.) or honda.ca (Canada). If you are the first registered owner of your vehicle, you may request a complimentary printed copy of the Navigation Manual within the first six months of vehicle purchase. To request a copy, visit owners.honda.com. In Canada, please request a copy from your Honda dealer.
This owner's manual covers all models of your vehicle. You may find descriptions of equipment and features that are not on your particular model.
Images throughout this owner's manual (including the front cover) represent features and equipment that are available on some, but not all, models. Your particular model may not have some of these features.

2 Instrument Panel P. 87

Indicators P. 88

Gauges and Driver Information Interface P. 109

2 Controls P. 153

Clock P. 154

Locking and Unlocking the Doors P. 156

Moonroof* P. 179

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel P. 180

Interior Convenience Items P. 207

2 Features P. 229

Audio System P. 230

Audio System Basic Operation P. 237, 262

Customized Features P. 355, 363

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver* P. 386

2 Driving P. 429

Before Driving P. 430

Towing a Trailer P. 435

Multi-View Rear Camera P. 573

Refueling P. 575

2 Maintenance P. 581
Before Performing Maintenance P. 582 Maintenance MinderTM P. 585 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 615 Climate Control System Maintenance P. 630

This owner's manual is for vehicles sold in the United States and Canada.
The information and specifications included in this publication were in effect at the time of approval for printing. Honda Motor Co., Ltd. reserves the right, however, to discontinue or change specifications or design at any time without notice and without incurring any obligation.

2 Handling the Unexpected P. 639

Tools P. 640

If a Tire Goes Flat P. 641

Shift Lever Does Not Move P. 655

Overheating P. 656

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door P. 671

2 Information P. 675
Specifications P. 676 Emissions Testing P. 683

Identification Numbers P. 680 Warranty Coverages P. 685

Child Safety P. 71

Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 84

Safety Labels P. 85

Opening and Closing the Trunk P. 170 Mirrors P. 196 Climate Control System P. 222

Security System P. 173 Seats P. 198

Windows P. 176

Audio Error Messages P. 332

General Information on the Audio System P. 334

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 389, 409

Refuel Recommend P. 428

When Driving P. 436

Honda Sensing® P. 473

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions P. 578

Braking P. 554

Parking Your Vehicle P. 562

Turbo Engine Vehicle* P. 579

Maintenance Under the Hood P. 595 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 617 Cleaning P. 631

Replacing Light Bulbs P. 610 Battery P. 627
Accessories and Modifications P. 636

Remote Transmitter Care P. 629

Engine Does Not Start P. 648 Indicator, Coming On/Blinking P. 658 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 672

If the Battery Is Dead P. 652 Fuses P. 664 Refueling P. 673

Emergency Towing P. 670

Devices that Emit Radio Waves P. 681 Authorized Manuals P. 688

Reporting Safety Defects P. 682 Customer Service Information P. 689

Contents
Quick Reference Guide P. 8 Safe Driving P. 37
Instrument Panel P. 87 Controls P. 153 Features P. 229 Driving P. 429
Maintenance P. 581 Handling the Unexpected P. 639
Information P. 675 Index P. 690

Quick Reference Guide

Quick Reference Guide
Visual Index
Brightness Control (P 193, 194)

System Indicators (P 88) Gauges (P 109) Driver Information Interface (P 113, 135, 138)
ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 180) Audio System (P 230) Navigation System*
() See Navigation System Manual
Hazard Warning Button
Front Seat Heater Buttons* (P 220)

Climate Control System (P 222) Rear Defogger (P 192) Heated Door Mirror Button* (P 192) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
(P 68)
(Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System OFF) Button (P 460) Safety Support Switch (P471, 480, 540) Parking Sensor System Button* (P565 )
8

Quick Reference Guide

Headlights/Turn Signals (P 182, 183) Fog Lights* (P 186) Paddle Shifter (Shift down)* (P 447) Left Selector Wheel (P114 ) Horn (Press an area around .) Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow Buttons (P 494)
Wipers/Washers (P 190)
Paddle Shifter (Shift up)* (P 447)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Button
(P 519)
Right Selector Wheel* (P139 ) Interval Button (P 509)
Canadian models
Heated Steering Wheel* (P 219)
Steering Wheel Adjustments (P 195) Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® System Voice Control Button* (P 409) Audio Remote Controls (P 234) (home) Button* (P 113)
* Not available on all models 9

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
Power Window Switches (P 176) Master Door Lock Switch (P 168) Door Mirror Controls (P 197)
Interior Fuse Box (P 666) Hood Release Handle (P 597) Trunk Opener (P 170)
10

Driver's Front Airbag (P 54) Rearview Mirror (P 196) HomeLink® Buttons* (P 387) Passenger's Front Airbag (P 54)
Wireless Charger* (P 215) USB Port(s) (P 231) Accessory Power Socket (P 214)
Glove Box (P 209) Shift Lever
Continuously Variable Transmission (P 443, 445)
ECON Button* (P 449) Drive Mode Switch* (P450 ) Auto Idle Stop OFF Button (P 454) Electric Parking Brake Switch (P 554) Automatic Brake Hold Button (P 558)

Quick Reference Guide

Side Curtain Airbags (P 65) Ceiling Light (P 207) Grab Handle Coat Hook (P 213)
Seat Belts (P 42)
USB Ports* (P 231)

Map Lights (P 208) Moonroof Switch* (P 179) Sunglasses Holder* (P 213)
Sun Visors Vanity Mirrors

Knee Airbags (P 59) Front Seat (P 198)

Front Side Airbags (P 62) Seat Belt (Installing a Child Seat) (P 78) Seat Belt to Secure a Child Seat (P 80) Rear Seats (P 201) LATCH to Secure a Child Seat (P 76) Rear Side Airbags (P 62)

* Not available on all models 11

Quick Reference Guide

Visual Index
12

Maintenance Under the Hood (P595) Windshield Wipers (P190, 615) Power Door Mirrors (P197) Side Turn Signal Lights* (P182, 610)
Door Lock/Unlock Control (P159) Headlights (P183, 610) Front Turn Signal Lights (P182, 610) Parking/Daytime Running Lights (P186, 610) Front Side Marker Lights (P183, 610)
Tires (P617, 641) Fog Lights* (P186, 610)
How to Refuel (P576) High-Mount Brake Light (P614) Opening/Closing the Trunk (P170) Emergency Trunk Release Lever (P172)
Multi-View Rear Camera (P573) Trunk Release Button* (P171) Rear License Plate Light (P613) Taillights (P613) Back-Up Lights (P613) Rear Side Marker Lights (P611) Taillights (P611) Brake Lights (P611) Rear Turn Signal Lights (P611)

Quick Reference Guide

Auto Idle Stop Function
To improve fuel economy, the engine stops and then restarts as detailed below. When Auto Idle Stop is on, the Auto Idle Stop indicator (green) comes on. (P453)

Continuously variable transmission

Engine status

Deceleration

Automatic Brake Hold Off

Automatic Brake Hold On

Stop Start-up

Stop the vehicle and depress the brake pedal.

Keep the brake pedal depressed.

*1
*2
With the automatic brake hold system activated, you can release the brake pedal when the indicator comes on.

*1:U.S. models *2:Canada models

Release the brake pedal.

With the automatic brake hold system activated, depress the accelerator pedal.

On
Off Restarting * Not available on all models 13

Quick Reference Guide

Eco Assist® System (P 449, 450)

Ambient Meter
With SPORT mode* off, the color of the ambient meter changes to green to indicate that the vehicle is being
driven in a fuel efficient manner.

Ambient Meter

*3
*4
ECON Mode Indicator (P 100)
Comes on when the ECON mode is on or selected.
*1:Models with A-type meter *2:Models with B-type meter *3:Models without drive mode switch *4:Models with drive mode switch 14

*1 *2

*3
*4
ECON Button*3/DRIVE MODE Switch*4
(P 449, 450) Helps maximize fuel economy.

Quick Reference Guide

Safe Driving (P 37)
Airbags (P 51)
Your vehicle is fitted with airbags to help protect you and your passengers during a moderate-to-severe collision.
Child Safety (P 71)
All children 12 and younger should be seated in the rear seat. Smaller children should be properly restrained in a forward-facing child seat. Infants must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat.
Exhaust Gas Hazard (P 84)
Your vehicle emits dangerous exhaust gases that contain carbon monoxide. Do not run the engine in confined spaces where carbon monoxide gas can accumulate.

Seat Belts (P 42)
Fasten your seat belt and sit upright well back in the seat.
Check that your passengers are wearing their seat belts correctly.
Before Driving Checklist (P 41)
Before driving, check that the front seats, head restraints, steering wheel, and mirrors have been properly adjusted.

Fasten your lap belt as low as possible.
* Not available on all models 15

Quick Reference Guide

Instrument Panel (P 87)

Gauges (P 109)/Driver Information Interface (P 113, 135, 138)/System Indicators (P 88)

Models with A-type meter

Odometer (P110)

Speedometer (P109)

Outside Temperature (P111) Tachometer (P109)

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P111)

Driver Information Interface (P113)
Shift Position Indicator/ Transmission System Indicator (P94)

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift Indicator* (P93)

Fuel Gauge (P110)

Quick Reference Guide

Models with B-type meter
You can change the gauge design. Change gauge design (P152) Traffic Sign Recognition System (P111)
Tachometer (P109)

Speedometer (P109)

Temperature Gauge (P110) Outside Temperature (P111)

M (7-speed manual shift mode)
Indicator/Shift Indicator (P93)

Odometer (P110)

Fuel Gauge (P110)

Shift Position Indicator/
Transmission System Indicator (P94)

Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) (P138)

Driver Information Interface (Left Side Area) (P135)

* Not available on all models 17

Quick Reference Guide

Controls (P 153)
Clock (P 154)
Models with color audio system

Models with Display Audio
To adjust date

g Select Set Date or Set Time. h Select 3 or 4 . i Select Save to set the date or time.
The audio system receives signals from GPS satellites, updating the clock automatically.

To adjust time

MENU Button
a Press the MENU button. b Select Clock Settings. c Select Automatic Time, then select OFF. d Select Set Time. e Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour
clock.
f Select 3 or 4 . g Select Set to set the time.

a Press the

button.

b Select General Settings.

c Select System.

d Select Date & Time.

e Select Set Date & Time.

f Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.

ENGINE START/STOP Button (P 180)
Press the button to change the vehicle's power mode.

Turn Signals (P 182)
Turn Signal Control Lever Right

Left
Lights (P 183)
Light Control Switches High Beam Low Beam
Flashing

Wipers and Washers
(P 190)
Wiper/Washer Control Lever Adjustment Ring* (-: Low sensitivity*1
: Lower speed, fewer sweeps*2 (+: High sensitivity*1
: Higher speed, more sweeps*2
Pull toward you to spray washer fluid.
MIST OFF AUTO*1: Wiper speed varies automatically INT*2: Low speed with intermittent LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe
*1:Models with automatic intermittent wipers
*2:Models with manual intermittent operation
Models with automatic intermittent wipers
AUTO should always be turned OFF before the following situations in order to prevent severe damage to the wiper system: Cleaning the windshield Driving through a car wash No rain present
* Not available on all models 19

Quick Reference Guide

Steering Wheel (P 195)
To adjust, push the adjustment lever down, adjust to the desired position, then lock the lever back in place.
To lock

Trunk (P 170)
Press and hold the trunk opener on the driver's door to unlock and open the trunk.
Press the trunk release button on the remote to unlock and open the trunk.
Press the trunk release button* on the trunk lid to unlock and open the trunk.

Power Windows (P 176)
With the power mode in ON, open and close the power windows.
If the power window lock button is in the off position, each passenger's window can be opened and closed with its own switch.
If the power window lock button is in the on position (indicator is on), each passenger's window switch is disabled.

Indicator

To adjust
Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside
(P 167) Pull either front door inner handle to
unlock and open it at the same time.

Trunk Opener
Power Door Mirrors
(P 197) With the power mode in ON, move the
selector switch to L or R. Push the appropriate edge of the
adjustment switch to adjust the mirror. Selector Switch

Window Switch
Power Window Lock Button

Adjustment Switch
20

Quick Reference Guide

Climate Control System (P222)

Press the AUTO button to activate the climate control system.

Press the

button to turn the system on or off.

Press the button to defrost the windshield.

Models with SYNC button

Dashboard vents
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents

Fan Control Dial

Floor and defroster vents
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial

(Recirculation) Button AUTO Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button

SYNC Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button (ON/OFF) Button

* Not available on all models 21

Quick Reference Guide

Models without SYNC button

Dashboard vents
Temperature Control Dial

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents

Fan Control Dial

Floor and defroster vents

AUTO Button (Recirculation) Button
(Windshield Defroster) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button (ON/OFF) Button

Quick Reference Guide

Features (P 229)

Audio Remote Controls

(P 234) Models with color audio system

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio:

Press and hold

to change a

folder/group.

Models with Display Audio

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Left Selector Wheel Roll up or down: To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:
FM

SOURCE Button

VOL (+ /VOL ((Volume) Switch

SOURCE Button

Press to cycle through the audio modes as

follows:

FM AM USB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/

Android Auto Bluetooth® Audio

VOL(+ / VOL(- (Volume) Switch

Press to adjust the volume up/down.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Radio:

Press

to change the preset

radio station. Press and hold

to change the strong station.

iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio,

or Smartphone Connection:

Press

to skip to the

beginning of the next song or return to

the beginning of the current song.

VOL (+ /VOL ((Volume) Switch

Left Selector Wheel

VOL(+ / VOL(- (Volume) Switch

Press to adjust the volume up/down.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

Radio:

Press

to change the preset

radio station. Press and hold

to change the strong station.

iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio,

or Smartphone Connection:

Press

to skip to the

beginning of the next song or return to

the beginning of the current song.

USB flash drive:

Press and hold

to change a

folder.

SiriusXM® USB
Bluetooth® Audio Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
23

Quick Reference Guide

Audio system (P 230)
Models with color audio system (P 237)
Audio/Information Screen

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
(Seek/Track) Button (Seek/Track) Button
PHONE Button RADIO Button
24

Selector Knob
MENU Button (Back) Button
CONNECT Button MEDIA Button

Quick Reference Guide

Models with Display Audio (P 262)
For navigation system operation () See the Navigation System Manual

(Home) Button (Back) Button
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
(Seek/Track) Button (Seek/Track) Button

Audio/Information Screen

Quick Reference Guide

Driving (P 429)

Continuously Variable Transmission
(P 442, 443, 445) Shift to (P and depress the brake pedal when starting the engine. Shifting
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode* (P447)
Allows you to manually shift the transmission up or
down without removing
your hands from the
steering wheel.

When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode
Pulling a paddle shifter changes the mode from
continuously variable
transmission to 7-speed
manual shift mode.
The M indicator and the

Press the shift lever release button and shift.

M Indicator

Shift Indicator

selected speed number are displayed in the shift indicator.

Models without paddle shifter

Models with paddle shifter

Park
Used when parking or starting
the engine.
Reverse
Used when reversing.
Neutral
Transmission is not locked.
Drive
Used:
For normal driving.
Models with paddle shifters
When temporarily driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode.
When driving in the 7-speed manual shift mode (when

Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Shift Position Indicator

When the transmission is in (D
Pulling a paddle shifter

Release Button

Shift Lever

Shift Down (- Shift Up (+ Paddle Shifter Paddle Shifter

temporarily changes the mode from continuously variable transmission to 7-speed manual shift mode. The selected speed number is

displayed in the shift

Drive (S)*
Used:

indicator.

For better acceleration.

To increase engine

braking.

When going up or down

hills.

Low*
Used to further increase engine braking.
Used when going up or

driving in SPORT mode).

down hills.

Quick Reference Guide

VSA® On and Off (P 460)
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering, and helps maintain traction while accelerating on loose or slippery road surfaces.
VSA® comes on automatically every time you start the engine.
To partially disable or fully restore VSA® function, press and hold the button until you hear a beep.
CMBSTM On and Off (P 480)
When a possible frontal collision is likely unavoidable, the CMBSTM can help you to reduce the vehicle speed and the severity of the collision.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine.
To turn the CMBSTM on or off, use the safety support switch.

U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 462)
Detects a change in tire conditions and overall dimensions due to decrease in tire pressures.
The TPMS is turned on automatically every time you start the engine.
A calibration procedure must be performed when certain conditions arise.

* Not available on all models 27

Quick Reference Guide

Refueling (P 575)

Fuel recommendation: Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher

Fuel tank capacity:

12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

a Unlock the driver's
door.
b Press the area
indicated by the arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will hear a click.

c After filling, wait
about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.

Wait for five seconds

Quick Reference Guide

Honda Sensing® (P 473)

Models with Low Speed Braking Control Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumper and a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror. Models without Low Speed Braking Control Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
The camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
Front Wide View Camera

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) (P 476)
The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle ahead from behind, an oncoming vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle). The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.
Low Speed Braking Control * (P488)
Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, this system detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too much force. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking and/ or assistive driving power suppression.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow (P494)
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator.
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) (P 516)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.

Sonar Sensors*

* Not available on all models 29

Quick Reference Guide

Traffic Jam Assist (P528)
The traffic jam assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines. Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your vehicle in the center of the detected lane.
Road Departure Mitigation System (P 537)
Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a detected oncoming vehicle.

Traffic Sign Recognition System (P545 )
Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the gauge.

Quick Reference Guide

Maintenance (P 581)

Under the Hood (P 595)
Check engine oil, engine coolant, and windshield washer fluid. Add when necessary.
Check brake fluid. Check the battery condition monthly.
a Pull the hood release handle under the driver's side lower corner
of the dashboard.

Wiper Blades (P 615)
Replace blades if they leave streaks across the windshield or become noisy.

b Locate the hood latch lever, push it to the side, and then raise the
hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the
lever.

Tires (P 617)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly.
Check tire pressures regularly. Install snow tires for winter
driving.

Lights (P 610)
Inspect all lights regularly.

c When finished, close the hood and make sure it is firmly locked in
place.
31

Quick Reference Guide

Handling the Unexpected (P 639)

Flat Tire (P 641)
Park in a safe location and replace the flat tire with the compact spare tire in the trunk.

Engine Won't Start
(P 648) If the battery is dead, jump start using a
booster battery.

Overheating (P 656)
Park in a safe location. If you do not see steam under the hood, open the hood, and let the engine cool down.

Indicators Come On
(P 658) Identify the indicator and consult the
owner's manual.

Blown Fuse (P 664)
Check for a blown fuse if an electrical device does not operate.

Emergency Towing
(P 670) Call a professional towing service if you
need to tow your vehicle.

Quick Reference Guide

What to Do If
The power mode does not change from ACCESSORY to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). Why?

The shift lever should be moved to (P.

Why does the brake pedal pulsate slightly when applying the brakes?
The rear door cannot be opened from inside the vehicle. Why?
Why do the doors lock after I unlocked the doors?

This can occur when the ABS activates and does not indicate a problem. Apply firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. Never pump the brake pedal.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) (P 560)
Check if the childproof lock is in the lock position. If so, open the rear door with the outside door handle. To cancel this function, slide the lever up to the unlock position.
If you do not open the doors within 30 seconds, the doors are relocked automatically for security.

Quick Reference Guide

Why does the beeper sound when I open the driver's door?
Models with keyless access system
Why does a beeper sound when I walk away from the vehicle after I close the door?
Why does the beeper sound when I start driving?

The beeper sounds when: The power mode is in ACCESSORY. The exterior lights are left on. The Auto Idle Stop is in operation.
The beeper sounds if the remote key has moved outside the walk away auto lock operating range before all doors completely close.
2 Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away auto lock®) (P 161)
The beeper sounds when the driver and/or front passenger are not wearing their seat belts.

Pressing the electric parking brake switch does not release the parking brake. Why?
U.S. models
I'm seeing an amber indicator of a tire with an exclamation point. What is that?
34

Press the electric parking brake switch with the brake pedal depressed.
The Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) needs attention. If you recently inflated or changed a tire, you have to recalibrate the system.
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) (P 462)

Quick Reference Guide

Depressing the accelerator pedal does not release the parking brake automatically. Why?
Why do I hear a screeching sound when I apply the brake pedal?

Fasten the driver's seat belt. Check if the transmission is in (P or (N. If so, select any other
position.
The brake pads may need to be replaced. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Safe Driving
You can find many safety recommendations throughout this chapter, and throughout this manual.

For Safe Driving Important Safety Precautions.............. 38 Your Vehicle's Safety Features............ 40 Safety Checklist ................................. 41
Seat Belts About Your Seat Belts ........................ 42 Fastening a Seat Belt .......................... 47 Seat Belt Inspection............................ 50

Airbags Airbag System Components............... 51 Types of Airbags ................................ 54 Front Airbags (SRS) ............................ 54 Knee Airbags ..................................... 59 Side Airbags....................................... 62 Side Curtain Airbags .......................... 65 Airbag System Indicators.................... 67 Airbag Care ....................................... 70

Child Safety Protecting Child Passengers ............... 71 Safety of Infants and Small Children .... 73 Safety of Larger Children ................... 82
Exhaust Gas Hazard Carbon Monoxide Gas....................... 84
Safety Labels Label Locations .................................. 85

For Safe Driving

Safe Driving

The following pages explain your vehicle's safety features and how to use them properly. The safety precautions below are ones that we consider to be among the most important.

Important Safety Precautions
Always wear your seat belt A seat belt is your best protection in all types of collisions. Airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. So even though your vehicle is equipped with airbags, make sure you and your passengers always wear your seat belts, and wear them properly.

1Important Safety Precautions
Some states, provinces and territories prohibit the use of cell phones other than hands-free devices by the driver while driving.

Restrain all children Children ages 12 and under should ride properly restrained in a back seat, not the front seat. Infants and small children should be restrained in a child seat. Larger children should use a booster seat and a lap/shoulder seat belt until they can use the belt properly without a booster seat.

Be aware of airbag hazards While airbags can save lives, they can cause serious or fatal injuries to occupants who sit too close to them, or are not properly restrained. Infants, young children, and short adults are at the greatest risk. Be sure to follow all instructions and warnings in this manual.

Don't drink and drive Alcohol and driving don't mix. Even one drink can reduce your ability to respond to changing conditions, and your reaction time gets worse with every additional drink. So don't drink and drive, and don't let your friends drink and drive, either.

Safe Driving

uuFor Safe DrivinguImportant Safety Precautions
Pay appropriate attention to the task of driving safely Engaging in cell phone conversation or other activities that keep you from paying close attention to the road, other vehicles, and pedestrians could lead to a crash. Remember, situations can change quickly, and only you can decide when it is safe to divert some attention away from driving.
Control your speed Excessive speed is a major factor in crash injuries and deaths. Generally, the higher the speed, the greater the risk, but serious injuries can also occur at lower speeds. Never drive faster than is safe for current conditions, regardless of the maximum speed posted.
Keep your vehicle in safe condition Having a tire blowout or a mechanical failure can be extremely hazardous. To reduce the possibility of such problems, check your tire pressures and condition frequently, and perform all regularly scheduled maintenance.
Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle Children, pets and people needing assistance left unattended in the vehicle may be injured if they activate one or more of the vehicle controls. They may also cause the vehicle to move, resulting in a crash in which they and/or another person(s) can be injured or killed. Also, depending on the ambient temperature, the temperature of the interior may reach extreme levels, which can result in harm or death. Even if the climate control system is on, never leave them in the vehicle unattended as the climate control system can shut off at any time.
39

Safe Driving

uuFor Safe DrivinguYour Vehicle's Safety Features

Your Vehicle's Safety Features

6 11 7
8

12
9 9 11 12

13
Safety Cage

Crush Zones

Seats and Seat-Backs

Head Restraints

Collapsible Steering Column

6 Seat Belts

7 Front Airbags

8 Knee Airbags

9 Side Airbags

10 Side Curtain Airbags

11 Door Locks

12 Seat Belt Tensioners

13 Outer Lap Pretensioners

The following checklist will help you take an active role in protecting yourself and your passengers.

1Your Vehicle's Safety Features
Your vehicle is equipped with many features that work together to help protect you and your passengers during a crash.
Some features do not require any action on your part. These include a strong steel framework that forms a safety cage around the passenger compartment, front and rear crush zones, a collapsible steering column, and tensioners that tighten the front and rear outer seat belts in a sufficient crash.
However, you and your passengers cannot take full advantage of these features unless you remain seated in the correct position and always wear your seat belts. In fact, some safety features can contribute to injuries if they are not used properly.

Safe Driving

uuFor Safe DrivinguSafety Checklist

Safety Checklist
For the safety of you and your passengers, make a habit of checking these items each time before you drive.
· After everyone has entered the vehicle, be sure all doors are closed and locked. Locking the doors helps prevent an occupant from being ejected and an outsider from unexpectedly opening a door.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 166

1Safety Checklist
If the door and/or trunk open message appears on the driver information interface, a door and/or the trunk is not completely closed. Close all doors and the trunk tightly until the message disappears.
2 Warnings P. 125, 150

· Adjust your seat to a position suitable for driving. Be sure the front seats are adjusted as far to the rear as possible while allowing the driver to control the vehicle. Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious or fatal injury in a crash.
2 Seats P. 198

· Adjust head restraints to the proper position. Head restraints are most effective when the center of the head restraint aligns with the center of your head. Taller persons should adjust their head restraint to the highest position.
2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 204

· Always wear your seat belt, and make sure you wear it properly. Confirm that any passengers are properly belted as well.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 47

· Protect children by using seat belts or child seats according to a child's age, height and weight.
2 Child Safety P. 71

Safe Driving

Seat Belts

About Your Seat Belts
Seat belts are the single most effective safety device because they keep you connected to the vehicle so that you can take advantage of many built-in safety features. They also help keep you from being thrown against the inside of the vehicle, against any passengers, or out of the vehicle. When worn properly, seat belts also keep your body properly positioned in a crash so that you can take full advantage of the additional protection provided by the airbags.
In addition, seat belts help protect you in almost every type of crash, including: - frontal impacts - side impacts - rear impacts - rollovers
Lap/shoulder seat belts All five seating positions are equipped with lap/shoulder seat belts with emergency locking retractors. In normal driving the retractor lets you move freely while keeping some tension on the belt. During a collision or sudden stop the retractor locks to restrain your body.
The front passenger's and rear seat belts also have a lockable retractor for use with child seats.
2 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt P. 78

1About Your Seat Belts
3 WARNING
Not wearing a seat belt properly increases the chance of serious injury or death in a crash, even though your vehicle has airbags.
Be sure you and your passengers always wear seat belts and wear them properly.
If you extend the seat belt too quickly, it will lock in place. If this happens, slightly retract the seat belt, then extend it slowly.
Seat belts cannot completely protect you in every crash. But in most cases, seat belts can reduce your risk of serious injury.
Most states and all Canadian provinces and territories require you to wear seat belts.

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Proper use of seat belts Follow these guidelines for proper use: · All occupants should sit upright, well back in the seat, and remain in that position
for the duration of the trip. Slouching and leaning reduce the effectiveness of the belt and can increase the chance of serious injury in a crash. · Never place the shoulder part of a lap/shoulder seat belt under your arm or behind your back. This could cause very serious injuries in a crash. · Two people should never use the same seat belt. If they do, they could be very seriously injured in a crash. · Do not put any accessories on the seat belts. Devices intended to improve comfort or reposition the shoulder part of a seat belt can reduce the protective capability and increase the chance of serious injury in a crash.

1About Your Seat Belts
If a front or rear seat passenger moves around and extends the seat belt, the lockable retractor may activate. If this happens, release the retractor by unfastening the seat belt and allow the belt to retract completely. Then, refasten the belt.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Seat Belt Reminder

Front seats The seat belt system includes an indicator on the instrument panel to remind the driver or a front passenger or both to fasten their seat belts. If you set the power mode to ON and a seat belt is not fastened, a beeper will sound and the indicator will blink. After a few seconds, the beeper will stop and the indicator will come on and remain illuminated until the seat belt is fastened.

1Seat Belt Reminder
The indicator will also come on if a front passenger does not fasten their seat belt within six seconds after the power mode is set to ON. When no one is sitting in the front passenger's seat, the indicator will not come on and the beeper will not sound. The indicator also may not come on and the beeper may not sound when the occupant is not heavy enough to trigger the weight sensor. Such occupants (e.g., infants and smaller children) should be moved to the rear seat as a deploying front airbag likely will injure or kill them.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 71

The beeper will periodically sound and the indicator will blink while the vehicle is moving until the seat belt is fastened.

Safe Driving

: Latched : Unlatched

Rear seats Your vehicle monitors rear seat belt use. A driver information interface and indicator notify you if any of the rear seat belts are unlatched.
The display appears when: · A rear door is opened or closed. · Any of the rear passengers latches or
unlatches their seat belt. The beeper sounds and indicator blinks if any rear passenger's seat belt is unlatched while driving.
To see the display:
2 Switching the Display P. 113, 139

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Continued

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuAbout Your Seat Belts

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners
The front seats and the outer rear seats are equipped with automatic seat belt tensioners to enhance safety.
The tensioners automatically tighten the front seat belts and the outer rear seat belts during a moderate-to-severe frontal collision, sometimes even if the collision is not severe enough to inflate the front airbags or the front knee airbags.
Front seats

1Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners The seat belt tensioners can only operate once. If a tensioner is activated, the SRS indicator will come on. Have a dealer replace the tensioner and thoroughly inspect the seat belt system as it may not offer protection in a subsequent crash.
During a moderate-to-severe side impact, the tensioner on both sides of the vehicle also activates.

Outer rear seats

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Fastening a Seat Belt

After adjusting a front seat to the proper position, and while sitting upright and well

back in the seat:

2 Seats P. 198

Pull out slowly.

1. Pull the seat belt out slowly.

Correct Seated Posture.

1Fastening a Seat Belt No one should sit in a seat with an inoperative seat belt or one that does not appear to be working correctly. Using a seat belt that is not working properly may not protect the occupant in a crash. Have a dealer check the belt as soon as possible.
Never insert any foreign objects into the buckle or retractor mechanism.

Latch Plate

Buckle

2. Insert the latch plate into the buckle, then tug on the belt to make sure the buckle is secure. u Make sure that the belt is not twisted or caught on anything.

If the seat belt appears to be locked in a fully retracted position, firmly pull out on the shoulder belt once, then push it back in. Then, smoothly pull it out of the retractor and fasten. If you are unable to release the seat belt from a fully retracted position, do not allow anyone to sit in the seat, and take your vehicle to a dealer for repair.
2 About Your Seat Belts P. 42 2 Seat Belt Inspection P. 50

Continued

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Lap belt as low as possible

3. Position the lap part of the belt as low as possible across your hips, then pull up on the shoulder part of the belt so the lap part fits snugly. This lets your strong pelvic bones take the force of a crash and reduces the chance of internal injuries.
4. If necessary, pull up on the belt again to remove any slack, then check that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder. This spreads the forces of a crash over the strongest bones in your upper body.

1Fastening a Seat Belt
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning the seat belts can cause serious injury or death in a crash.
Make sure all seat belts are properly positioned before driving.
To release the belt, push the red PRESS button and then guide the belt by hand until it has retracted completely. When exiting the vehicle, be sure the belt is properly stowed so that it will not get caught in the closing door.

Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor
The front seats have adjustable shoulder anchors to accommodate taller and shorter occupants.
1. Move the anchor up and down while holding the release button.
2. Position the anchor so that the belt rests across the center of your chest and over your shoulder.

1Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor After an adjustment, make sure that the shoulder anchor position is secure.
The shoulder anchor height can be adjusted to four levels. If the belt contacts your neck, lower the height one level at a time.

Push

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuFastening a Seat Belt

Advice for Pregnant Women
If you are pregnant, the best way to protect yourself and your unborn child when driving or riding in a vehicle is to always wear a seat belt and keep the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.
Wear the shoulder belt across the chest avoiding the abdomen.

1Advice for Pregnant Women
Each time you have a checkup, ask your doctor if it is okay for you to drive.
To reduce the risk of injuries to both you and your unborn child that can be caused by an inflating front airbag:
· When driving, sit upright and adjust the seat as far
back as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle.
· When sitting in the front passenger's seat, adjust
the seat as far back as possible.

Wear the lap part of the belt as low as possible across the hips.

Safe Driving

uuSeat BeltsuSeat Belt Inspection

Seat Belt Inspection
Regularly check the condition of your seat belts as follows:
· Pull each belt out fully, and look for frays, cuts, burns, and wear. · Check that the latch plates and buckles work smoothly and the belts retract
easily. u If a belt does not retract easily, cleaning the belt may correct the problem. Only
use a mild soap and warm water. Do not use bleach or cleaning solvents. Make sure the belt is completely dry before allowing it to retract.
Any belt that is not in good condition or working properly will not provide proper protection and should be replaced as soon as possible. A belt that has been worn during a crash may not provide the same level of protection in a subsequent crash. Have your seat belts inspected by a dealer after any collision.

1Seat Belt Inspection
3 WARNING
Not checking or maintaining seat belts can result in serious injury or death if the seat belts do not work properly when needed.
Check your seat belts regularly and have any problem corrected as soon as possible.

Airbags
Airbag System Components

11 10 9

7 9
6
9

Continued

6 9
51

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

The front, front knee, side, and side curtain airbags are deployed according to the direction and severity of impact. Both side curtain airbags are deployed in a rollover. The airbag system includes:
a Two SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) front airbags. The driver's airbag is stored in the center of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is stored in the dashboard. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
b Two knee airbags. The driver's knee airbag is stored under the steering column; the front passenger's knee airbag is stored under the glove box. Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.
c Four side airbags, one for the driver, one for the front passenger and one each for the rear outboard occupants. The front airbags are stored in the outer edges of the seat-backs and the rear airbags are stored next to the outer rear seating positions. All are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

d Two side curtain airbags, one for each side of the vehicle. The airbags are stored in the ceiling, above the side windows. The front and rear pillars are marked SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG.
e An electronic control unit that, when the power mode is in ON, continually monitors information about the various impact sensors, seat and buckle sensors, rollover sensor, airbag activators, seat belt tensioners, and other vehicle information. During a crash event the unit can record such information.
f Automatic seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats. In addition, the driver's and front passenger's seat belt buckles incorporate sensors that detect whether or not the belts are fastened.
g Driver's seat position sensor. This sensor detects the driver's seat slide position to help determine the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag.

h Weight sensors in the front passenger's seat. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger's airbag.
i Impact sensors that can detect a moderate-to-severe front or side impact.
j An indicator on the center console that alerts you that the front passenger's front airbag has been turned off.
k An indicator on the instrument panel that alerts you to a possible problem with your airbag system or seat belt tensioners.
l A rollover sensor that can detect if your vehicle is about to roll over and signal the control unit to deploy both side curtain airbags.

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Components

Important Facts About Your Airbags
Airbags can pose serious hazards. To do their job, airbags must inflate with tremendous force. So, while airbags help save lives, they can cause burns, bruises, and other minor injuries, sometimes even fatal ones if occupants are not wearing their seat belts properly and sitting correctly.
What you should do: Always wear your seat belt properly and sit upright and as far back from the steering wheel as possible while allowing full control of the vehicle. A front passenger should move their seat as far back from the dashboard as possible.

1Important Facts About Your Airbags Do not attempt to deactivate your airbags. Together, airbags and seat belts provide the best protection.
When driving, keep hands and arms out of the deployment path of the front airbag by holding each side of the steering wheel. Do not cross an arm over the airbag cover.

Remember, however, that no safety system can prevent all injuries or deaths that can occur in a severe crash, even when seat belts are properly worn and the airbags deploy.

Do not place hard or sharp objects between yourself and a front airbag. Carrying hard or sharp objects on your lap, or driving with a pipe or other sharp object in your mouth, can result in injuries if your front airbag inflates.

Do not attach or place objects on the front and front knee airbag covers. Objects on the covers marked SRS AIRBAG could interfere with the proper operation of the airbags or be propelled inside the vehicle and hurt someone if the airbags inflate.

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuTypes of Airbags

Types of Airbags
Your vehicle is equipped with four types of airbags: · Front airbags: Airbags in front of the driver's and front passenger's seats. · Knee airbags: Airbags under the steering column and under the glove box. · Side airbags: Airbags in the driver's and front passenger's outer seat-backs and
next to the outer rear seating positions. · Side curtain airbags: Airbags above the side windows. Each is discussed in the following pages.

1Types of Airbags
The airbags can inflate whenever the power mode is in ON.
After an airbag inflates in a crash, you may see a small amount of smoke. This is from the combustion process of the inflator material and is not harmful. People with respiratory problems may experience some temporary discomfort. If this occurs, get out of the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.

Front Airbags (SRS)
The front SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help protect the head and chest of the driver and/or front passenger.
SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbags are designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.
Housing Locations
The front airbags are housed in the center of the steering wheel for the driver, and in the dashboard for the front passenger. Both airbags are marked SRS AIRBAG.

1Front Airbags (SRS)
During a frontal crash severe enough to cause one or both front airbags to deploy, the airbags can inflate at different rates, depending on the severity of the crash, whether or not the seat belts are latched, and/ or other factors. Frontal airbags are designed to supplement the seat belts to help reduce the likelihood of head and chest injuries in frontal crashes.

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Operation
Front airbags are designed to inflate during moderate-to-severe frontal collisions. When the vehicle decelerates suddenly, the sensors send information to the control unit which signals one or both front airbags to inflate.

A frontal collision can be either head-on or angled between two vehicles, or when a vehicle crashes into a stationary object, such as a concrete wall.

How the Front Airbags Work
While your seat belt restrains your torso, the front airbag provides supplemental protection for your head and chest.
The front airbags deflate immediately so that they won't interfere with the driver's visibility or the ability to steer or operate other controls.

1How the Front Airbags Work
Although the driver's and front passenger's airbags normally inflate within a split second of each other, it is possible for only one airbag to deploy. This can happen if the severity of a collision is at the margin, or threshold, that determines whether or not the airbags will deploy. In such cases, the seat belt will provide sufficient protection, and the supplemental protection offered by the airbag would be minimal.

The total time for inflation and deflation is so fast that most occupants are not aware that the airbags deployed until they see them lying in front of them.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)
When front airbags should not deploy Minor frontal crashes: Front airbags were designed to supplement seat belts and help save lives, not to prevent minor scrapes, or even broken bones that might occur during a less than moderate-to-severe frontal crash. Side impacts: Front airbags can provide protection when a sudden deceleration causes a driver or front passenger to move toward the front of the vehicle. Side airbags and side curtain airbags have been specifically designed to help reduce the severity of injuries that can occur during a moderate-to-severe side impact which can cause the driver or passenger to move toward the side of the vehicle. Rear impacts: Head restraints and seat belts are your best protection during a rear impact. Front airbags cannot provide any significant protection and are not designed to deploy in such collisions. Rollovers: In a rollover, your best form of protection is a seat belt or, if your vehicle is equipped with a rollover sensor, both a seat belt and a side curtain airbag. Front airbags, however, are not designed to deploy in a rollover as they would provide little if any protection. When front airbags deploy with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent. When front airbags may not deploy, even though exterior damage
appears severe Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.
56

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

Advanced Airbags
The airbags have advanced features to help reduce the likelihood of airbag related injuries to smaller occupants.
The driver's advanced airbag system includes a seat position sensor.

Driver's Seat Position Sensor

Based on information from this sensor and the severity of the impact, the advanced airbag system determines the optimal deployment of the driver's airbag.
The front passenger's advanced airbag system has weight sensors. The sensors are used for occupant classification to activate or deactivate the front passenger's airbag.

Passenger's Seat Weight Sensors

For adult size occupants, the system will automatically activate the front passenger's airbag. If a small adult sits in the front passenger seat and the system does not recognize him/her as an adult, see
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 68

1Advanced Airbags
If there is a problem with the driver's seat position sensor or the passenger's seat weight sensors, the SRS indicator will come on, and in the event of a crash, the airbag will deploy (regardless of the driver's seating position or passenger's occupant classification) with a force corresponding to the severity of the impact.
2 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator P. 67
For the advanced front airbags to work properly, confirm that:
· The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is not excessively reclined.
· The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
· The occupant's feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
· There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger's seat.
· Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back
pocket.
· The steering wheel and passenger's side dashboard
are not obstructed by any object.
· No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuFront Airbags (SRS)

We advise against allowing a child age 12 or under to ride in the front passenger's seat. However, if you do allow a small child or infant to ride in the front passenger's seat, the system is designed to automatically deactivate the front passenger's airbag. Do not let a small child or infant ride in the front passenger's seat if the airbag does not automatically deactivate.

1Advanced Airbags
· There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat back.
· There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger's seat.
· There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger's seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· The head restraint is not contacting the roof.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 68
· The floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is
set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
2 Floor Mats P. 632

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Knee Airbags
The knee SRS airbags inflate in a moderate-to-severe frontal collision to help keep the driver and/or front passenger in the proper position and to help maximize the benefit provided by the vehicle's other safety features.

SRS (Supplemental Restraint System) indicates that the airbag is designed to supplement seat belts, not replace them. Seat belts are the occupant's primary restraint system.

Housing Locations

The knee airbag for the driver and the one for the front passenger are housed under the steering column and the glove box respectively.

1Knee Airbags
Do not attach accessories on or near a knee airbag as they can interfere with the proper operation of the airbag, or even hurt someone if the airbag inflates.
The driver and front passenger should not store any items under the seat or behind their feet. The items can interfere with proper airbag deployment in the event of a moderate to severe frontal collision and may result in inadequate protection.

Housing Location

Both are marked SRS AIRBAG.

Housing Location

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Operation

When inflated

The driver's and front passenger's knee airbag deploy at the same time as the driver's and front passenger's airbag respectively.

Knee Airbag
When inflated

Knee Airbag

Safe Driving

When knee airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden deceleration, a strong impact to the vehicle framework or suspension might cause one or more of the airbags to deploy. Examples include running into a curb, the edge of a hole, or other low fixed object that causes a sudden deceleration in the vehicle chassis. Since the impact is underneath the vehicle, damage may not be readily apparent.
When knee airbag may not deploy, even though exterior damage appears severe
Since crushable body parts absorb crash energy during an impact, the amount of visible damage does not always indicate proper airbag operation. In fact, some collisions can result in severe damage but no airbag deployment because the airbags would not have been needed or would not have provided protection even if they had deployed.

uuAirbagsuKnee Airbags

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Side Airbags
The side airbags help protect the torso and pelvis of the driver, front passenger, or an outer rear seat occupant during a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Housing Locations

The side airbags are housed in the outside edge of the driver's and passenger's seatbacks and next to the outer rear seating positions.

Housing Location

Each are marked SIDE AIRBAG.

1Side Airbags Make sure you and your front seat passenger always sit upright. Leaning into the path of a side airbag can prevent the airbag from deploying properly and increases your risk of serious injury.
Do not attach accessories on or near the side airbags. They can interfere with the proper operation of the airbags, or hurt someone if an airbag inflates.
Do not cover or replace the front seat-back covers without consulting a dealer. Improperly replacing or covering front seat-back covers can prevent your side airbags from properly deploying during a side impact.

Housing Location
62

Safe Driving

Operation

When inflated

When the sensors detect a moderate-tosevere side impact, the control unit signals the side airbag on the impact side to immediately inflate.

Side Airbag
When inflated

Side Airbag

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Airbags
When a side airbag deploys with little or no visible damage Because the airbag system senses sudden acceleration, a strong impact to the side of the vehicle's framework can cause a side airbag to deploy. In such cases, there may be little or no damage, but the side impact sensors detected a severe enough impact to deploy the airbag. When a side airbag may not deploy, even though visible damage appears
severe It is possible for a side airbag not to deploy during an impact that results in apparently severe damage. This can occur when the point of impact was toward the far front or rear of the vehicle, or when the vehicle's crushable body parts absorbed most of the crash energy. In either case, the side airbag would not have been needed nor provided protection even if it had deployed.
64

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags

Side Curtain Airbags
The side curtain airbags help protect the heads of the driver and passengers in the outer seating positions during a moderate-to-severe side impact. The side curtain airbags equipped in this vehicle are also designed to help reduce the likelihood of partial and complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side windows in crashes, particularly rollover crashes.

Housing Locations

The side curtain airbags are located in the ceiling above the side windows on both sides of the vehicle.

1Side Curtain Airbags To get the best protection from the side curtain airbags, occupants should wear their seat belts properly and sit upright and well back in their seats.
Do not attach any objects to the side windows or roof pillars as they can interfere with the proper operation of the side curtain airbags.
If the impact is on the passenger's side, the passenger's side curtain airbag deploys even if there are no occupants on that side of the vehicle.

Side Curtain Airbag Storage

If the SRS control unit senses that your vehicle is about to rollover, it immediately deploys both side curtain airbags and activates the seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats.

Operation

The side curtain airbag is designed to deploy in a rollover or a moderate-to-severe side impact.

Deployed Side Curtain Airbag

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuSide Curtain Airbags
When side curtain airbags deploy in a frontal collision One or both side curtain airbags may also inflate in a moderate-to-severe angled frontal collision.
66

Safe Driving

Airbag System Indicators
If a problem occurs in the airbag system, the SRS indicator will come on and a message appears on the driver information interface.
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
When the power mode is set to ON The indicator comes on for a few seconds, then goes off. This tells you the system is working properly.

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
1Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) Indicator
3 WARNING
Ignoring the SRS indicator can result in serious injury or death if the airbag systems or tensioners do not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if the SRS indicator alerts you to a possible problem.

If the indicator comes on at any other time, or does not come on at all, have the system checked by a dealer as soon as possible. If you don't, your airbags and seat belt tensioners may not work properly when they are needed.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators

Passenger Airbag Off Indicator

U.S.

Canada

When the passenger airbag off

indicator comes on

The indicator comes on to alert you that the

passenger's airbag has been turned off.

This occurs if the seat is empty or when the

weight sensors determine that a small child or

infant is on the passenger seat.

Children age 12 or under should always ride properly restrained in a back seat.
2 Child Safety P. 71
If the indicator is on, in the event of a crash the passenger's airbag will not deploy. The passenger's knee airbag will not deploy, either.

1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator
To ensure the passenger is detected properly, confirm that:
· The occupant is sitting in an upright position,
wearing the seat belt properly and the seat back is not excessively reclined.
· The occupant is not leaning against the door or
center console.
· The occupant's feet are placed on the floor in front
of them.
· There are no objects hanging from the front
passenger's seat.
· Only small, lightweight objects are in the seat back
pocket.
· No liquid has been spilled on or under the seat. · There is no child seat or other object pressing
against the rear of the seat or seat back.
· There is no rear passenger pushing or pulling on
the back of the front passenger's seat.
· There are no objects placed under or beside the
front passenger's seat. Improperly positioned objects can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· The floor mat behind the front passenger's seat is
set in the correct position evenly on the floor. An improperly placed mat can interfere with the advanced airbag sensors.
· The head restraint is not contacting the roof.

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag System Indicators
1Passenger Airbag Off Indicator The passenger airbag off indicator may come on and go off periodically if the total weight on the seat is near the airbag cutoff threshold. For a small adult, depending on physique and posture, the system may not recognize him/her as an adult and thus deactivate the passenger's airbag. If this occurs, please confirm that the conditions set forth in the above bullet points on the previous page are met. If the above conditions are met and the indicator is still on, then with the transmission in (P, set the power mode to OFF and back to ON. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer as soon as possible if:
· All of the above conditions are met, and the
indicator comes on with an adult seated in the front passenger seat.
· The seat is empty and the indicator is off.
Do not allow an adult passenger to ride in the front seat when the indicator is on.
69

Safe Driving

uuAirbagsuAirbag Care

Airbag Care
You do not need to, and should not, perform any maintenance on or replace any airbag system components yourself. However, you should have your vehicle inspected by a dealer in the following situations:
When the airbags have deployed If an airbag has inflated, the control unit and other related parts must be replaced. Similarly, once an automatic seat belt tensioner has been activated, it must be replaced.

1Airbag Care
We recommend against the use of salvaged airbag system components, including the airbag, tensioners, sensors, and control unit.

When the vehicle has been in a moderate-to-severe collision Even if the airbags did not inflate, have your dealer inspect the following: the driver's seat position sensor, weight sensors in the passenger's seat, the seat belt tensioners for the front seats and outer rear seats, and each seat belt that was worn during the crash.

Do not remove or modify a front seat without consulting a dealer This would likely disable or affect the proper operation of the driver's seat position sensor or the weight sensors in the passenger's seat. If it is necessary to remove or modify a front seat to accommodate a person with disabilities, contact a Honda dealer, or for U.S. vehicles, American Honda Automobile Customer Service at 1-800999-1009 and for Canadian vehicles, Honda Canada Customer Relations at 1-8889-HONDA-9.

Safe Driving

Child Safety

Protecting Child Passengers
Each year, many children are injured or killed in vehicle crashes because they are either unrestrained or not properly restrained. In fact, vehicle crashes are the number one cause of death of children ages 12 and under.
To reduce the number of child deaths and injuries, every state, Canadian province and territory requires that infants and children be properly restrained when they ride in a vehicle.
Children should sit properly restrained in a rear seat. This is because: · An inflating front airbag can injure or kill a child sitting in the front seat.

1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Children who are unrestrained or improperly restrained can be seriously injured or killed in a crash.
Any child too small for a seat belt should be properly restrained in a child seat. A larger child should be properly restrained with a seat belt, using a booster seat if necessary.

· A child in the front seat is more likely to interfere with the driver's ability to safely control the vehicle.
· Statistics show that children of all sizes and ages are safer when they are properly restrained in a rear seat.

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that all children ages 12 and under be properly restrained in a rear seat. Some states or provinces/territories have laws restricting where children may ride.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuProtecting Child Passengers

· Never hold a child on your lap because it is impossible to protect them in the event of a collision.
· Never put a seat belt over yourself and a child. During a crash, the belt would likely press deep into the child and cause serious or fatal injuries.
· Never let two children use the same seat belt. Both children could be very seriously injured in a crash.
· Any child who is too small to wear a seat belt correctly must be restrained in an approved child seat that is properly secured to the vehicle using either the seat belt or the lower anchors of the LATCH system.
· Do not allow children to operate the doors, windows or seat adjustments.

1Protecting Child Passengers
3 WARNING
Allowing a child to play with a seat belt or wrap one around their neck can result in serious injury or death.
Instruct children not to play with any seat belt and make sure any unused seat belt a child can reach is buckled, fully retracted, and locked.
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

· Do not leave children in the vehicle unattended, especially in hot weather when the inside of the vehicle can get hot enough to kill them. They could also activate vehicle controls causing it to move unexpectedly.

To remind you of the passenger's front airbag hazards and child safety, your vehicle has warning labels on the dashboard (U.S. models) and on the front visors. Please read and follow the instructions on these labels.
2 Safety Labels P. 85

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safety of Infants and Small Children
Protecting Infants
An infant must be properly restrained in a rear-facing child seat until the infant reaches the seat manufacturer's weight or height limit for the seat.
Positioning a rear-facing child seat Child seats must be placed and secured in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Infants
3 WARNING
Placing a rear-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death during a crash.
Always place a rear-facing child seat in the rear seat, not the front.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent the driver or a front passenger from moving their seat all the way back, or from locking their seat-back in the desired position. Make sure that there is no contact between the child seat and the seat in front of it.
It can also interfere with proper operation of the passenger's advanced front airbag system.
2 Airbags P. 51
If this occurs, we recommend that you install the child seat directly behind the front passenger's seat, move the seat as far forward as needed, and leave it unoccupied. Or, you may wish to get a smaller rear-facing child seat.

Experts recommend use of a rear-facing seat for a child so long as the child's height and weight are appropriate for a rear facing seat.
Infants should never be seated in a forward facing position.
Always refer to the child seat manufacturer's instructions before installation.
Do not allow a front seat to rest against a child seat installed in a rear seating position. The weight sensor in the front seat may not correctly detect the actual weight of the occupant.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Protecting Smaller Children
If a child has exceeded the weight and height limitations of a rearward-facing child seat, the child should be properly restrained in a firmly secured forward-facing child seat until they exceed the weight and height limitations for the forward-facing child seat.
Forward-facing child seat placement We strongly recommend placing a forwardfacing child seat in a rear seating position.

1Protecting Smaller Children
3 WARNING
Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can result in serious injury or death if the front airbag inflates.
If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, move the vehicle seat as far back as possible, and properly restrain the child.

Placing a forward-facing child seat in the front seat can be hazardous, even with advanced front airbags that automatically turn the passenger's front airbag off. A rear seat is the safest place for a child.

Educate yourself about the laws and regulations regarding child seat use where you are driving, and follow the child seat manufacturer's instructions.

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Selecting a Child Seat
Most child seats are LATCH-compatible (Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children). Some have a rigid-type connector while others have a flexible-type connector. Both are equally easy to use. Some existing and previously owned child seats can only be installed using the seat belt. Whichever type you choose, follow the child seat manufacturer's use and care instructions including recommended expiration dates as well as the instructions in this manual. Proper installation is key to maximizing your child's safety.

1Selecting a Child Seat Installation of a LATCH-compatible child seat is simple.
LATCH-compatible child seats have been developed to simplify the installation process and reduce the likelihood of injuries caused by incorrect installation.

In seating positions and vehicles not equipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed using the seat belt and a top tether for added security. This is because all child seats are required to be designed so that they can be secured with a lap belt or the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt. In addition, the child seat manufacturer may advise that a seat belt be used to attach a LATCH-compatible seat once a child reaches a specified weight. Please read the child seat owner's manual for proper installation instructions.

Important consideration when selecting a child seat Make sure the child seat meets the following three requirements: · The child seat is the correct type and size for the child. · The child seat is the correct type for the seating position. · The child seat is compliant with Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213 or
Canadian Motor Vehicle Safety Standard 213.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat

A LATCH-compatible child seat can be installed in either of the two outer rear seats. A child

seat is attached to the lower anchors with either the rigid or flexible type of connectors.

1. Locate the anchor marks affixed to the base

of the seat cushion.

2. Pull out the anchor covers under the marks

Marks

to expose the lower anchors.

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
3 WARNING
Never attach two child seats to the same anchor. In a collision, one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child seat attachments and may break, causing serious injury or death.

Lower Anchors Rigid Type

3. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat, then attach the child seat to the lower anchors according to the instructions that came with the child seat. u When installing the child seat, make sure that the lower anchors are not obstructed by the seat belt or any other object.

For your child's safety, when using a child seat installed using the LATCH system, make sure that the child seat is properly secured to the vehicle. A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

Lower Anchors

Flexible Type
76

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Safe Driving

Straight Top Tether Type
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
Other Top Tether Type
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor

4. Open the tether anchor cover behind the head restraint.
5. Route the tether strap over the top of the head restraint and secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. Make sure the strap is not twisted.
6. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the child seat manufacturer.
7. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; little movement should be felt.
8. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.
2 Protecting Child Passengers P. 71

1Installing a LATCH-Compatible Child Seat
3 WARNING
Using the outer rear seats' inner anchors to secure a LATCH compatible child seat in the center seating position may result in failure of the child seat, causing injury or death.
Only use the outer rear seats' inner anchors to install a child seat in the center seating position if the manufacturer's instructions expressly permit.
Installing a LATCH-compatible child seat in the rear center seat Each outer rear seat is equipped with a pair of lower anchors which are used to secure a LATCH-compatible child seat. The rear center seat, however, is not equipped with anchors of any kind. The inner and outer anchors are spaced apart at a standard distance of 11 inches (280 mm). The distance between the two inner anchors is 15.0 inches (380 mm). LATCH-compatible restraint systems that are fitted with rigid-type attachments cannot be installed in the rear center seat. However, a system fitted with flexible-type attachments can be installed in the center seat, provided that the manufacturer's instructions for that system permit the use of the inner anchors with the stated spacing. Before seating a child, make sure that the system is properly attached to both the lower anchors and tether anchors.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat can be installed with a lap/shoulder belt in any rear seat or, if absolutely necessary, the front passenger seat.
1. Place the child seat on the vehicle seat. 2. Route the seat belt through the child seat
according to the seat manufacturer's instructions, and insert the latch plate into the buckle. u Insert the latch plate fully until it clicks.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
A child seat that is not properly secured will not adequately protect a child in a crash and may cause injury to the child or other vehicle occupants.

3. Slowly pull the shoulder part of the belt all the way out until it stops. This activates the lockable retractor.
4. Let the seat belt retract a few inches and check that the retractor has switched modes by pulling on the webbing. It should not pull out again until it is reset by removing the latch plate from the buckle. u If you are able to pull the shoulder belt out, the lockable retractor is not activated. Slowly pull the seat belt all the way out, and repeat steps 3 4.

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

5. Grab the shoulder part of the seat belt near the buckle, and pull up to remove any slack from the lap part of the belt. u When doing this, place your weight on the child seat and push it into the vehicle seat.

1Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt
To deactivate a lockable retractor, release the buckle and allow the seat belt to wind up all the way.

6. Make sure the child seat is firmly secured by rocking it forward and back and side to side; less than one inch of movement should occur near the seat belt.
7. Make sure any unused seat belt that a child can reach is buckled, the lockable retractor is activated, and the belt is fully retracted and locked.

Continued

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Adding Security with a Tether

Tether Anchor Points

A tether anchor point is provided behind each rear seating position. If you have a child seat that comes with a tether but can be installed with a seat belt, the tether may be used for additional security.

1Adding Security with a Tether
Always use a tether for forward-facing child seats whether using the seat belt or lower anchors.

Anchor

Cover

Straight Top Tether Type in Outer Position
Tether Strap Hook

1. Locate the appropriate tether anchor point and lift the cover.
2. Route the tether strap over the head restraint. Make sure the strap is not twisted.

Anchor
Other Top Tether Type in Outer Position
Tether Strap Hook
Anchor
80

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Infants and Small Children

Straight Top Tether Type in Center Position
Tether Strap Hook

3. Secure the tether strap hook to the anchor. 4. Tighten the tether strap as instructed by the
child seat manufacturer.

Anchor
Other Top Tether Type in Center Position
Tether Strap Hook

Anchor

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Safety of Larger Children

Protecting Larger Children
The following pages give instructions on how to check proper seat belt fit, what kind of booster seat to use if one is needed, and important precautions for a child who must sit in front.
Checking Seat Belt Fit
When a child is too big for a child seat, secure the child in a rear seat using the lap/ shoulder seat belt. Have the child sit upright and all the way back, then answer the following questions.
Checklist · Do the child's knees bend comfortably over
the edge of the seat? · Does the shoulder belt cross between the
child's neck and arm? · Is the lap part of the seat belt as low as
possible, touching the child's thighs? · Will the child be able to stay seated like this
for the whole trip? If you answer yes to all these questions, the child is ready to wear the lap/shoulder seat belt correctly. If you answer no to any question, the child needs to ride on a booster seat until the seat belt fits properly without a booster seat.

1Safety of Larger Children
3 WARNING
Allowing a child age 12 or under to sit in front can result in injury or death if the passenger's front airbag inflates.
If a larger child must ride in front, move the vehicle seat as far to the rear as possible, have the child sit up properly and wear the seat belt properly, using a booster seat if needed.

Safe Driving

uuChild SafetyuSafety of Larger Children

Booster Seats

If a lap/shoulder seat belt cannot be used properly, position the child in a booster seat in the rear seat. For the child's safety, check that the child meets the booster seat manufacturer's recommendations.

Protecting Larger Children - Final Checks
Your vehicle has a rear seat where children can be properly restrained. If you ever have to carry a group of children, and a child must ride in front: · Make sure you read and fully understand the instructions and safety information
in this manual. · Move the front passenger seat as far back as possible. · Have the child sit upright and well back in the seat. · Check that the seat belt is properly positioned so that the child is secure in the
seat.

1Booster Seats
When installing a booster seat, make sure to read the instructions that came with it, and install the seat accordingly. There are high- and low-type booster seats. Choose a booster seat that allows the child to wear the seat belt correctly.
Some U.S. states, and Canadian provinces and territories require children to use a booster seat until they reach a given age or weight (e.g. 6 years or 60 lbs). Be sure to check current laws in the state or province, or territory where you intend to drive.

Monitoring child passengers We strongly recommend that you keep an eye on child passengers. Even older, more mature children sometimes need to be reminded to fasten their seat belts and sit up properly.

Safe Driving

Exhaust Gas Hazard

Carbon Monoxide Gas
The engine exhaust from this vehicle contains carbon monoxide, a colorless, odorless, and highly toxic gas. As long as you properly maintain your vehicle, carbon monoxide gas will not get into the interior.
Have the exhaust system inspected for leaks whenever · The exhaust system is making an unusual noise. · The exhaust system may have been damaged. · The vehicle is raised for an oil change.
When you operate a vehicle with the trunk open, airflow can pull exhaust gas into the interior and create a hazardous condition. If you must drive with the trunk open, open all the windows and set the climate control system as shown below.
1. Select the fresh air mode. 2. Select the mode. 3. Set the fan speed to high. 4. Set the temperature control to a comfortable setting.

1Carbon Monoxide Gas
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Avoid any enclosed areas or activities that expose you to carbon monoxide.
An enclosed area such as a garage can quickly fill up with carbon monoxide gas. Do not run the engine with the garage door closed. Even when the garage door is open, drive out of the garage immediately after starting the engine.

Adjust the climate control system in the same manner if you sit in your parked vehicle with the engine running.

Safety Labels
Label Locations
These labels are in the locations shown. They warn you of potential hazards that can cause serious injury or death. Read these labels carefully.
If a label comes off or becomes hard to read (except for the U.S. dashboard label which may be removed by the owner), contact a dealer for a replacement.

Sun Visor U.S. models

Canadian models

Safe Driving

Dashboard U.S. models only

Air Conditioner System 2.0 L engine models for U.S. 1.5 L engine models for U.S.

Reserve Tank Cap

Canadian models
85

Instrument Panel
This chapter describes the buttons, indicators, and gauges that are used while driving.
Indicators ............................................ 88 Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges............................................ 109
Models with A-type meter
Driver Information Interface ............. 113
Models with B-type meter
Driver Information Interface (Left Side Area) ............................................. 135
Models with B-type meter
Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area) ............................................. 138
87

Instrument Panel

Indicators

Indicators come on/blink depending on the condition of the vehicle. Messages may display on the driver information interface at the same time. Please take the appropriate action outlined in the message, such as contacting a dealer.

U.S.
*1
Canada

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

U.S.
*1
Canada

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Automatic Brake *1 Hold System
Indicator

P. 90 P. 92 P. 92

*1 Charging System Indicator

P. 93

Shift Position Indicator P. 93

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/

P. 93

Shift Indicator*

Low Fuel Indicator

P. 95

*1 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

P. 95

*1 Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

P. 95

*1 Electric Power Steering P. 96 (EPS) System Indicator

U.S. *1 Canada

Automatic Brake Hold Indicator

*1 Malfunction Indicator Lamp

P. 92 P. 93

Transmission System Indicator

P. 94

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

P. 94

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator

P. 96

*1 Vehicle Stability AssistTM P. 96 (VSA®) OFF Indicator

*1 : When you set the power mode to ON, these indicators come on to indicate that system checks are being performed. They go off a few seconds later or after the engine has started. If an indicator does not come on or turn off, there may be a malfunction in the corresponding system. To resolve the issue, follow the instructions in the owner's manual.

88 * Not available on all models

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

*1 Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator*

P. 97

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators
High Beam Indicator
Lights On Indicator
Fog Light Indicator*
*1 Auto High-Beam Indicator

P. 98 P. 98 P. 98 P. 98 P. 98

System Message Indicator

P. 99

*2
ECON Mode Indicator
*3

P. 100

NORMAL Mode Indicator*
SPORT Mode Indicator*

P. 100 P. 100

Low Temperature *1 Indicator*

P. 100

Cruise Mode Indicator (White/Green)

P. 105

Adaptive Cruise Control
(ACC) with Low Speed P. 105 Follow Interval Indicator*

Auto Idle Stop Off Indicator

P. 102

Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator

P. 103

*1 Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)
Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

P. 102 P. 102

Immobilizer System Indicator
Security System Alarm Indicator

P. 101 P. 101

Adaptive Cruise Control *1 (ACC) with Low Speed P. 104
Follow Indicator (Amber)

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (White/Green)

P. 104

Lane Keeping Assist *1 System (LKAS) Indicator
(Amber)
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White/Green)

P. 105 P. 105

*1 Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)

P. 106 P. 108

* Not available on all models

Continued 89

uu Indicators u

Indicator
U.S. Canada (Red)

Name

On/Blinking
Comes on when the parking brake is applied, and goes off when it is released.

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

· Comes on when the brake fluid level is low.

Explanation
The beeper sounds and the indicator comes on if you drive with the parking brake applied.
Comes on for about 30 seconds when you apply the electric parking brake while the power mode is in ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then goes off.
Stays on for about 30 seconds when you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF while the electric parking brake is applied, then goes off.
· Comes on while driving - Make sure the parking brake is released. Stop in a safe place and check the brake fluid level.
2 What to do when the indicator comes on while driving P. 660

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
Comes on if there is a problem with the brake system.

U.S.

Canada

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red)

(Red)

Explanation
1.5 L engine models
Comes on along with the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (amber) - Immediately stop in a safe place. Contact a dealer for repair. The brake pedal becomes harder to operate. Depress the pedal further than you normally do.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 661
All models
Comes on along with the ABS indicator - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks P. 660
Blinks and the Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (amber) comes on at the same time There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. The parking brake may not be set. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 661

Continued 91

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

U.S. Canada (Amber)

Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with a system related to braking other than the conventional brake system.
Comes on if there is a problem with the electric parking brake system and/or the automatic brake hold system.

Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability.
Stays on constantly - Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator

Comes on when the automatic brake hold system is on.

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 558

U.S.

Comes on when the automatic brake hold

is activated.

Canada

Automatic Brake Hold Indicator

2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 558

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Charging System Indicator
Shift Position Indicator

On/Blinking

Explanation

After you have set the power mode to ON, the vehicle performs system checks. However, if the readiness codes have not been set by that time, this indicator will blink five times and then go off.

Readiness codes are part of the on board diagnostics for the emissions control systems.
2 Testing of Readiness Codes P. 683

Comes on if there is a problem with the emissions control systems.
Blinks when a misfire in the engine's cylinders is detected.

2 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks P. 659

Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system.

Stop in a safe place and contact a dealer immediately.
2 Checking the Battery P. 627 2 If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
P. 659

Indicates the current shift position.

2 Shifting P. 443, 445

M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator*

Comes on when the 7-speed manual shift mode is applied.

2 7-Speed Manual Shift Mode P. 447

* Not available on all models

Continued 93

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem.

Blinks while driving - Avoid sudden starts and acceleration and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Transmission System Indicator

Blinks if the transmission system has a problem and the performance of the vehicle is reduced.

Avoid sudden starts, sudden acceleration and high speed, and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Models with paddle shifter
Blinks if the transmission system has a problem and the paddle shifters cannot be used.

Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

Seat Belt Reminder Indicator

Blinks and the beeper sounds for a few seconds if you are not wearing a seat belt when you set the power mode to ON, then the indicator comes on.
If the front passenger is not wearing a seat belt, the indicator comes on a few seconds later.
Comes on for a while when the rear seat belt is unfastened while the power mode in ON.
Blinks while driving if you and/or any passenger has not fastened a seat belt. The beeper sounds and the indicator blinks at regular intervals.

The beeper stops and the indicator goes off when you and the passengers fasten their seat belts.
Stays on after you and/or the passengers have fastened the seat belt(s) - A detection error may have occurred in the sensor. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Seat Belt Reminder P. 44

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Low Fuel Indicator

Comes on when the fuel reserve is running Comes on - Refuel your vehicle as soon as possible. low (approximately 1.8 U.S. gal/7.0 Liter left).

Blinks if there is a problem with the fuel gauge.

Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) Indicator

Comes on if there is a problem with the ABS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. With this indicator on, your vehicle still has normal braking ability but no anti-lock function.
2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 560

Supplemental Restraint System Indicator

Comes on if a problem with any of the following is detected: - Supplemental restraint system - Side airbag system - Side curtain airbag system - Seat belt tensioner

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Continued 95

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System Indicator
Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF Indicator

On/Blinking

Explanation

· Comes on if there is a problem with the EPS system.

· Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
· Do not drive displays on the driver information interface - Immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.
2 If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On P. 662

Blinks when VSA® is active.

Comes on if there is a problem with the VSA® system, brake assist system or hill start assist system.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System P. 459

Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

temporarily after the battery has been

The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your

disconnected, then re-connected.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on when you partially disable VSA®.

2 VSA® On and Off P. 460

Comes on if the VSA® system is deactivated Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h).

temporarily after the battery has been

The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your

disconnected, then re-connected.

vehicle checked by a dealer.

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

U.S. models

Low Tire Pressure/ TPMS Indicator

May come on briefly if the power mode is set to ON and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, to indicate the calibration process is not yet complete.
Comes on and stays on when: - One or more tires' pressures are determined to be significantly low. - The system has not been calibrated.

Comes on while driving - Stop in a safe place, check tire pressures, and inflate the tire(s) if necessary.
Stays on after the tires are inflated to the recommended pressures - The system needs to be calibrated.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 463

Blinks for about one minute, and then stays on if there is a problem with the TPMS, or when a compact spare tire is temporarily installed.

Blinks and remains on - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. If the vehicle is fitted with a compact spare tire, get your regular tire repaired or replaced and put back on your vehicle as soon as you can.

Comes on if the TPMS is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Continued 97

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators

High Beam Indicator

On/Blinking

Explanation

· Blinks when you operate the turn signal lever.
· Blink along with all turn signals when you press the hazard warning button.

· Does not blink or blinks rapidly
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 610, 611

· Comes on when the high beam headlights

are on.

Lights On Indicator

Comes on when the parking, tail, and other external lights are on.

Fog Light Indicator*

· Comes on when the fog lights are on.

2 Light Switches P. 183 2 Fog Lights* P. 186

Auto High-Beam · Comes on when all the operating

Indicator

conditions of the auto high-beam are met.

2 Auto High-Beam P. 187

98 * Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

System Message Indicator

On/Blinking

Explanation

· Comes on along with a beep when a problem is detected. A system message on the driver information interface appears at the same time.

Refer to the Indicators information in this chapter when a system message appears on the driver information interface. Take the appropriate action for the message.

Models with A-type meter
While the indicator is on, press the (home) button, and select Warnings to see the message again.
2 Accessing contents in the display P. 113
The driver information interface will not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the (home) button is pressed.

Models with B-type meter
While the indicator is on, roll the right selector wheel to see the message again.
2 Switching the Display P. 139
The driver information interface will not return to the normal screen unless the warning is canceled, or the right selector wheel is rolled.

Continued 99

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

*1 ECON Mode Indicator
*2

NORMAL Mode Indicator*

On/Blinking
Models without drive mode switch
Comes on when the ECON mode is on.
Models with drive mode switch
Comes on when you set the drive mode to ECON.
Comes on when you set the drive mode to NORMAL.

Explanation
2 ECON Button* P. 449 2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 450
2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 450

SPORT Mode Indicator*

Comes on when you set the drive mode to Models with A-type meter

SPORT.

The ambient meter remains lit up in red as long as

SPORT mode is selected.

Models with B-type meter
The ambient meter goes off and gauges in the instrument panel lit up in red as long as SPORT mode is selected.
2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 450

Low Temperature Indicator*

Comes on when the engine coolant temperature is low.

If the indicator stays on after the engine has reached normal operating temperature, there may be a problem with the temperature sensors. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

*1:Models without drive mode switch *2:Models with drive mode switch

100 * Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator
Models with A-type meter
Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
· Blinks if the immobilizer system cannot recognize the key information.

Models with B-type meter
Indicator

Immobilizer System Indicator

Explanation
· Blinks - You cannot start the engine. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, then select the ON mode again.
Canadian models
Depress and hold the brake pedal before setting the power mode to ON. · Repeatedly blinks - The system may be malfunctioning. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. · Do not attempt to alter this system or add other devices to it. Electrical problems can occur.

Models with A-type meter
Indicator

· Blinks when the security system alarm has been set.

Models with B-type meter
Indicator

Security System Alarm Indicator

2 Security System Alarm P. 173

Continued 101

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Comes on when the Auto Idle Stop system

Auto Idle Stop OFF has been turned off by the Auto Idle Stop

Indicator

OFF button.

Explanation
2 Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF P. 454

Auto Idle Stop System Indicator (Amber)
Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

Blinks if there is a problem with the Auto Blinks - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer. Idle Stop system.

Comes on when Auto Idle Stop is in operation. The engine automatically shuts off.

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 453

Instrument Panel

102

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on while Auto Idle Stop is

temporarily suspended in the following

situations.

- Brake pedal is not fully pressed

Depress the brake pedal firmly.

- The transmission is in a position other than (D

- System charging is prioritized

Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator

- Climate control system is prioritized
- Engine coolant temperature is not in operating range

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 453

- SPORT mode* is selected.
- Auto Idle Stop does not activate for some reason.

2 Auto Idle Stop P. 453 2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 450

If you press and hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF

button, you can select whether to display the status

messages or not.

* Not available on all models

Continued 103

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on if there is a problem with ACC Comes on while driving - Have your vehicle

with Low Speed Follow.

checked by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if the ACC with Low Speed Follow is deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected, then reconnected.
Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.
ACC with Low Speed Follow has been automatically canceled.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 433
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Indicator (White/Green)

Lights up in white when you press the button.
Lights up in green when you press the up or down the RES/+/SET/- switch.

2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 494

104

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking

Explanation

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (Amber)

Comes on if there is a problem with the LKAS.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 433
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Indicator (White/Green)

Lights up in white when you press the LKAS button.
Lights up in green when the LKAS is in operation.

2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 516

Cruise Mode Indicator (White/Green)

Lights up in white when you change to cruise mode.
Lights up in green when you have set a speed for cruise control.

2 To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control P. 513

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Interval Indicator*

Comes on when Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow indicator comes on.

Each time you press the Interval button, the following interval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through extra long, long, middle, and short following intervals.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval P. 509

* Not available on all models

Continued 105

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name
Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

On/Blinking

Explanation

Comes on if there is a problem with Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control* or blind spot information system*.

Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Indicator may come on temporarily when the Maximum Load Limit is exceeded.

Make sure the total load is within the Maximum Load Limit.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 433
Stays on constantly - Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Comes on if the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM and Low Speed Braking Control* are deactivated temporarily after the battery has been disconnected and then re-connected.

Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). The indicator should go off. If it does not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

106 * Not available on all models

Instrument Panel

uu Indicators u

Indicator

Name

On/Blinking
Comes on when the Road Departure Mitigation system and/or CMBSTM shuts itself off.

Safety Support Indicator (Amber)

Explanation
Stays on - The temperature inside the camera is too high. Use the climate control system to cool down the camera. The system activates when the temperature inside the camera cools down.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
Stays on - The area around the camera is blocked by dirt, mud, etc. Stop your vehicle in a safe place and wipe the debris off with a soft cloth.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if the indicator and message are still displayed even after you have cleaned the area around the camera.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
It may come on when the ambient conditions are dark, such as when driving in a tunnel, or at night, dawn, or dusk.

Continued 107

uu Indicators u

Instrument Panel

Indicator

Name
Safety Support Indicator (Amber)
Safety Support Indicator (Green/ Gray)

On/Blinking

Explanation

Models with Low Speed Braking Control
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of the sonar sensor.

Remove the obstacle in the vicinity of the sonar sensor.
2 Low Speed Braking Control* P. 488

Models with blind spot information system
Comes on when mud, snow, or ice accumulates in the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor.
Comes on when the temperature of the blind spot information system sensor is high.

Comes on while driving - Something may be interfering with the blind spot information system sensor. Check the vicinity of the blind spot information system sensor and remove any obstacles.
The system will return to normal when the temperature cools down.
2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 469

Lights up in green when Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control* and blind spot information system* are on.
Lights up in green and gray when Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control*, blind spot information system* or any two or three of these systems are off.
Lights up in gray when Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control* and blind spot information system* are off.

2 Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off P. 540
2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 480 2 Blind Spot Information System On and Off
P. 471 2 System On and Off P. 491

108 * Not available on all models

Gauges and Driver Information Interface
Gauges
Gauges include the speedometer, fuel gauge, and other related indicators. They are displayed when the power mode is in ON.
Speedometer
Displays your driving speed in mph or km/h.

1Speedometer You can set the speedometer and the displayed measurements to read in either km/h and mph. 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 125, 150 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
U.S. models with B-type meter
If you change the unit from miles and mph to km and km/h, the current vehicle speed in mph appears next to the digital speedometer.
Vehicle Speed in mph

Instrument Panel

Tachometer
Shows the number of engine revolutions per minute.

1Tachometer
Models with A-type meter
You can turn on or off the tachometer display. 2 Settings P. 126
Continued

109

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

Fuel Gauge
Displays the amount of fuel left in the fuel tank.
Models with B-type meter
Temperature Gauge
Displays the temperature of the engine coolant.

1Fuel Gauge
NOTICE You should refuel when the reading approaches E . Running out of fuel can cause the engine to misfire, damaging the catalytic converter.
The actual amount of remaining fuel may differ from the fuel gauge reading.
1Temperature Gauge
NOTICE Driving with the temperature gauge pointer in the upper zone can cause serious engine damage. Pull safely to the side of the road and allow engine temperature to return to normal.
2 Overheating P. 656

Odometer
Shows the total number of miles or kilometers that your vehicle has accumulated.

110

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

Outside Temperature
Shows the outside temperature in Fahrenheit (U.S.) or Celsius (Canada).

Adjusting the outside temperature display
Adjust the temperature reading by up to ±5°F or ±3°C if the temperature reading seems incorrect.

Traffic Sign Recognition System
Shows traffic signs while driving. The indicator blinks when the maximum speed of the traffic sign detected by the Traffic Sign Recognition System is exceeded.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 545

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

1Outside Temperature The temperature sensor is in the front bumper. Road heat and exhaust from another vehicle can affect the temperature reading when your vehicle speed is less than 19 mph (30 km/h).
It may take several minutes for the display to be updated after the temperature reading has stabilized.
You can adjust the temperature reading. 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Instrument Panel

Continued

111

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuGauges

Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, the LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist
Shows the current mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, LKAS, and traffic jam assist.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 494 2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 516 2 Traffic Jam Assist P. 528
Models with A-type meter
Clock
Shows the clock. You can adjust the time manually or change the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock by using the audio/information screen.
2 Clock P. 154

1Current Mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow, the LKAS, and Traffic Jam Assist
Models with B-type meter
When you set speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow or cruise control, a set speed mark will be displayed on the speedometer.
Set Speed

Instrument Panel

112

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Models with A-type meter
Driver Information Interface
The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings and other helpful information. When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer and have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the Engine oil pressure low. or Engine temperature too hot. message is displayed.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 658 2 Overheating P. 656

Switching the Display
Accessing contents in the display Press the (home) button, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to the content you want to see. Press the left selector wheel to see detailed information.

1Switching the Display
You can add or delete the meter contents. 2 Customize Display P. 124

Instrument Panel

Continued

113

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button
Roll the left selector wheel.

Warnings P. 125
No content P. 125
Customize display P. 124
Settings P. 126
Safety Support P. 122

Range & fuel P. 115
Speed & time P. 117
Driver attention P. 119
Seat belts P. 122
Maintenance P. 122

114

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Range / Fuel / Trip Meter
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
Average Fuel Economy Range

Instrument Panel

Trip Meter A

Trip Meter B Instant Fuel Economy

Continued

115

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Trip meter Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.

Resetting a trip meter To reset the trip meter, display it, press the left selector wheel and then select Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.

Average Fuel Economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

1Average Fuel Economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.
2 Settings P. 126

Instant Fuel Economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle's current fuel economy.

1Range
The driving range displayed is only an estimate and may differ to the actual distance the vehicle can travel.

116

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Speed & Time
Roll the left selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
Elapsed Time Average Speed

Trip Meter A

Trip Meter B

Continued

117

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 116
Elapsed time Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Average speed Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.

1Elapsed time You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Settings P. 126
1Average speed You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Settings P. 126

Instrument Panel

118

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor analyzes steering inputs to determine if the vehicle is being driven in a manner consistent with drowsy or inattentive driving. If it determines that the vehicle is being driven in such a manner, it will display the degree of the driver's attention on the driver information interface.

1Driver Attention Monitor
The Driver Attention Monitor cannot always detect if the driver is tired or inattentive. Regardless of the system's feedback, if you are feeling tired, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed.

Driver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

Left Selector Wheel
(home) Button

When you select Driver attention on the driver information interface, bars on it light up in white to indicate the degree of the driver's attention.
2 Accessing contents in the display P. 113

Level

Continued

119

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
If two bars light up, the Driver attention level low message will appear.
If one bar lights up, the Driver attention level low. Time for a break. message will appear, a beep will sound, and the steering wheel will vibrate. If this message appears, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed. The message will disappear when the left selector wheel is pressed or when the system has determined that the driver is driving normally. If the driver does not take a break and the monitor continues to detect that the driver is very tired, the message will appear again after approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a beep and steering wheel vibrations. The message does not appear when the traveling time is 30 minutes or less.
120

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when: · The engine is turned off. · The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

For the Driver Attention Monitor to function: · The vehicle must be traveling above 25 mph (40 km/h). · The electric power steering (EPS) system indicator must be off.
Depending on driving conditions or other factors, the Driver Attention Monitor may not function in the following circumstances:
· The steering assist function of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) is active.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 516
· The condition of the road is poor, e.g. the surface is unpaved or bumpy. · It is windy. · The driver is frequently operating the vehicle in an assertive manner such as
changing lanes or accelerating.

1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The bars on the driver information interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.

Customizing You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile and audible alert, Tactile alert or OFF.
2 Settings P. 126

Continued

121

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Seat Belts
Appears when any of the seat belts are latched or unlatched.

Maintenance
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 585

Safety Support
Indicates the state of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, and blind spot information system* such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
The following colors indicate the state of any of the above mentioned systems: · Green: The system is on. · Gray: The system is off. · Amber: There is a problem with the system.

1Safety Support
If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
To turn on or off each system, first rotate the left selector wheel to switch displays. From the next display you can select which system to turn on or off.
2 Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off P. 540
2 Blind Spot Information System On and Off P. 471
2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 480

You can also confirm the state of the each function by the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 106 2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 108

122 * Not available on all models

Area Info for CMBSTM
Area Info for Road Departure Mitigation System
Area Info for Blind spot information system*

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Road Departure Mitigation System Icon and State Info
Blind spot information system Icon and State Info*
CMBSTM Icon and State Info

Instrument Panel

* Not available on all models

Continued

123

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Customize Display
Change the settings to your liking.
Arrange content You can choose which icons to display on the home screen.
1. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Customize display, then press the left selector wheel.
2. Roll the left selector wheel.

1Customize Display Icons that are gray cannot be removed from the home screen.
When you customize settings, shift to (P.

3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll between icons, then press the left selector wheel to check or uncheck them.

124

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Speed/Distance Units

Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and km, mph and km/h.

Press and hold the left selector wheel when you select No content on the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds.

Warnings
You can check if there are any active warning messages.

1Warnings
If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the left selector wheel to see other warnings.

Continued

125

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Settings
Use the driver information interface to customize certain features.
How to customize Press the (home) button, then select the Settings screen by rolling the left selector wheel while the power mode is in ON, the vehicle is at a complete stop, and the shift position is in (P. Then, press the left selector wheel.

1Settings To customize other features, roll the left selector wheel. 2 List of customizable options P. 127 2 Example of customization settings P. 132
When you customize settings, shift to (P.

Driver Information Interface
(home) Button Left Selector Wheel

126

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

List of customizable options

Setup Group Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

TPMS calibration*

Calibrates the TPMS.

Cancel/Calibrate

Forward collision warning distance

Changes the distance at which CMBSTM alerts.

Long/Normal*1/Short

Driver assist system setup

ACC forward vehicle detect beep
Road departure mitigation setting

Causes the system to beep when the system detects a vehicle, or when the vehicle goes out of ACC with Low Speed Follow range.
Changes the setting for the Road Departure Mitigation system.

ON/OFF*1
Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/ Warning only

Lane keeping assist suspend beep

Causes the system to beep when the LKAS is suspended. ON/OFF*1

Blind spot information*

Changes the setting for the blind spot information.

Audible and visual alert*1/Visual alert

*1:Default Setting

* Not available on all models

Continued 127

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Setup Group

Customizable Features

Description

Traffic sign recognition system display setting

Turns the traffic sign recognition system on and off.

Traffic sign recognition system exceeding speed warning

Turns the traffic sign recognition system over speed warning on and off.

Driver assist system setup

Speed limit warning threshold setting

Changes the setting speed the traffic sign recognition system over speed warning is activated.

Driver attention monitor
*1:Default Setting

Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.

Selectable Settings
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF
Speed limit*1/ Speed limit+3mph/ Speed limit+5mph/ Speed limit+10mph (When mph is selected) Speed limit*1/ Speed limit+5km/h/ Speed limit+10km/h/ Speed limit+15km/h (When km/h is selected) Tactile and audible alert*1/ Tactile alert/OFF

128

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Setup Group Customizable Features

Description

Language selection

Changes the displayed language.

Adjust outside temp. display

Adjusts the temperature reading by a few degrees.

Meter setup

"Trip A" reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter A, average fuel economy A, average speed A, and elapsed time A.

"Trip B" reset timing

Changes the setting of how to reset trip meter B, average fuel economy B, average speed B, and elapsed time B.

Adjust alarm volume

Changes the alarm volume, such as buzzers, warnings, turn signal sound, and so on.

Fuel efficiency backlight Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

Rear seat reminder

Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off.

Speed/distance units Selects the trip meter units.

Tachometer *1:Default Setting

Selects whether the tachometer is displayed on the instrument panel.

Selectable Settings English*1/Français/ Español -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.) -3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada)
When fully refueled/ IGN OFF/Manually reset*1
When fully refueled/ IGN OFF/Manually reset*1
High/Mid*1/Low
ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF km/hkm/mphmiles*1 (U.S.) km/hkm*1/mphmiles (Canada)
ON*1/OFF
Continued 129

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Setup Group Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Door unlock mode

Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver's Driver door only*1/All

door handle.

doors

Keyless access setup*

Keyless access light flash
Keyless access beep

Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/ lock the doors.
Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.

ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF

Remote start system ON/OFF

Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Auto high-beam

Turns the auto high-beam on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Interior light dimming Changes the length of time the interior lights stay on

time

after you close the doors.

60sec/30sec*1/15sec

Headlight auto off Lighting setup timer

Changes the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver's door.

60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec

Auto light sensitivity* Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

Max/High/Mid*1/Low/Min

Auto headlight ON with wiper ON

Changes the settings for the wiper operation when the headlights automatically come on while the headlight switch is in the AUTO position.

ON*1/OFF

*1:Default Setting

130 * Not available on all models

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

Setup Group Customizable Features Auto door lock

Auto door unlock

Door setup

Key and remote unlock mode
Walk away auto lock*

Keyless lock answer back
Keyless remote power window control

Lockout prevention*

Maintenance reset

Default all

*1:Default Setting

Description
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically lock.
Changes the setting for when the doors automatically unlock.
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock on the first operation of the remote key or built-in key.
Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle.
LOCK/UNLOCK- The exterior lights flash. LOCK (2nd push)- The beeper sounds.
Turns remote window control using the remote key on and off.
Changes the settings for the lockout protection function.
Resets the Maintenance Minder display when you have performed the maintenance service.
Cancels customized changes you have made or restores them to their default setting.

Selectable Settings With vehicle speed*1/ Shift from P/OFF All doors when driver's door opens*1/All doors when shifted to Park/ All doors when ignition switched OFF/OFF
Driver door*1/All doors
ON/OFF*1
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF
(Selects Reset Items)
Cancel/Set

* Not available on all models

Continued 131

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
Example of customization settings The steps for changing the "Trip A" reset timing setting to When fully refueled are shown below. The default setting for "Trip A" reset timing is Manually reset.
1. Press the (home) button, to select Settings, then press the left selector wheel.
132

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
2. Roll the left selector wheel until Meter setup appears on the display.
3. Press the left selector wheel. u Language selection appears first in the display.
4. Roll the left selector wheel until "Trip A" reset timing appears on the display, then press the left selector wheel. u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select When fully refueled, IGN OFF, Manually reset, or Back.
5. Roll the left selector wheel and select When fully refueled, then press the left selector wheel. u The Selected appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.

Continued

133

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface
6. Press the left selector wheel after Back appears on the display.
7. Repeat Step 6 until you return to the normal screen.
134

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Left Side Area)

Models with B-type meter
Driver Information Interface (Left Side Area)
Shows the current mode for audio and phone information, etc.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 234 2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 409

Clock
Shows the clock. You can adjust the time manually or change the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock on the driver information interface by using the audio/ information screen.
2 Clock P. 154

1Clock
You can choose whether the clock is displayed on the driver information interface.
2 Customize Display P. 136

Instrument Panel

Continued

135

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Left Side Area)

Customize Display
Arrange audio source on the left side area You can choose which sources to display on the audio source screen.
1. Roll the left selector wheel, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Customize display and press the left selector wheel.

1Customize Display When you customize settings, shift to (P.

Instrument Panel

2. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Hide/show, then press the left selector wheel.

3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll between audio sources, then press the left selector wheel to check or uncheck them.

136

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Left Side Area)
Turn the displaying on the left side area on and off You can select whether the current audio information and clock appear on the left side area.
1. Roll the left selector wheel, then roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Customize display and press the left selector wheel.
2. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select Audio & clock, then press the left selector wheel.
3. Roll the left selector wheel to scroll to select your desired settings, then press the left selector wheel.
137

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area) Models with B-type meter
Driver Information Interface (Right Side Area)
The driver information interface shows information such as the estimated travelable distance and fuel economy of the vehicle. It also displays messages such as warnings and other helpful information. When a warning message displays, please check the message and contact a dealer and have the vehicle inspected if necessary. Please refer to the pages below if the Engine oil pressure low. or Engine temperature too hot. message is displayed.
2 If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears P. 658 2 Overheating P. 656
138

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Switching the Display
Roll the right selector wheel to view different types of content.

1Switching the Display
You can add or delete the meter contents. 2 Customize Display P. 151

Instrument Panel

Warning Messages P. 150

Range / Fuel / Trip Meter
P. 140

Speed & Time Navigation/Compass

P. 142

P. 143

Driver Attention Monitor
P. 144

Right Selector Wheel

No Content/ Unit Change
P. 150

Customize Display Safety Support

P. 151

P. 148

Maintenance P. 147

Seat Belts P. 147

Continued

139

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)
Range / Fuel / Trip Meter
Press the right selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
Average Fuel Economy Range

Instrument Panel

Trip Meter A

Instant Fuel Economy

Trip Meter B

Trip meter Shows the total number of miles or kilometers driven since the last reset. Meters A and B can be used to measure two separate trips.
Resetting a trip meter To reset the trip meter, display it, press and hold the right selector wheel and then select Reset.
u The trip meter is reset to 0.0.
140

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Average fuel economy Shows the estimated average fuel economy of each trip meter in mpg or l/100 km. The display is updated at set intervals. When a trip meter is reset, the average fuel economy is also reset.

1Average fuel economy
You can change when to reset the average fuel economy.
2 Customized Features P. 363

Instant fuel economy Shows the instant fuel economy as a bar graph in mpg or l/100 km.

Range Shows the estimated distance you can travel on the remaining fuel. This estimated distance is based on the vehicle's current fuel economy.

1Range
The driving range displayed is only an estimate and may differ to the actual distance the vehicle can travel.

Instrument Panel

Continued

141

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)
Speed & Time
Press the right selector wheel to switch between trip meter A and trip meter B.
Elapsed Time Average Speed

Instrument Panel

Trip Meter A

Trip Meter B

142

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Trip meter
2 Trip meter P. 140
Elapsed time Shows the time elapsed since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Average speed Shows the average speed in mph or km/h since Trip A or Trip B was reset.
Navigation
Compass Shows the compass screen.
Turn-by-Turn Directions When driving guidance is provided by the navigation system, Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, turn-by-turn directions to your destination appear.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual 2 Apple CarPlay P. 319 2 Android Auto P. 258

1Elapsed time You can change when to reset the elapsed time. 2 Customized Features P. 363
1Average speed You can change when to reset the average speed. 2 Customized Features P. 363
1Navigation When the compass or turn-by-turn directions are displayed, you can control some navigation system functions on the driver information interface by pressing the right selector wheel. 2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
You can select whether to have the turn-by-turn display come on or not during the route guidance.
2 Customized Features P. 363
Turn-by-turn directions may not be available for all apps.

Continued

143

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Driver Information Interface

Instrument Panel

Right Selector Wheel
When you select Driver Attention Monitor on the driver information interface, bars on it light up in white to indicate the degree of the driver's attention.
2 Switching the Display P. 139
Level
144

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)
If two bars light up, the Driver attention level low message will appear.

Instrument Panel

If one bar lights up, the Driver attention level low. Time for a break. message will appear, a beep will sound, and the steering wheel will vibrate. If this message appears, stop in a safe location and rest for as long as needed. The message will disappear when the right selector wheel is rolled or when the system has determined that the driver is driving normally. If the driver does not take a break and the monitor continues to detect that the driver is very tired, the message will appear again after approximately 15 minutes, accompanied by a beep and steering wheel vibrations. The message does not appear when the traveling time is 30 minutes or less.

Continued

145

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

The Driver Attention Monitor resets when: · The engine is turned off. · The driver unfastens the seat belt and opens the door while the vehicle is stopped.

1For the Driver Attention Monitor to function:
The bars on the driver information interface remain grayed out unless the Driver Attention Monitor is functioning.

Customizing You can change the Driver Attention Monitor settings. Select Tactile And Audible Alert, Tactile Alert, or OFF.
2 Customized Features P. 363

146

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)
Seat Belts
Appears when any of the seat belts are latched or unlatched.
Maintenance
Shows the remaining oil life and Maintenance MinderTM.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 585

Instrument Panel

Continued

147

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Safety Support
Indicates the state of the Road Departure Mitigation system, CMBSTM, Low Speed Braking Control and blind spot information system such as On, Off, or Failure, by color and letters.
The following colors indicate the state of any of the above mentioned systems: · Green: The system is on. · Gray: The system is off. · Amber: There is a problem with the system.

1Safety Support
If a system is indicated by the color amber, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
To turn on or off each system, first press the right selector wheel to switch displays. From the next display you can select which system to turn on or off.
2 Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off P. 540
2 Blind Spot Information System On and Off P. 471
2 System On and Off P. 491 2 CMBSTM On and Off P. 480
You can also confirm the state of the each function by the color of the safety support indicator.
2 Safety Support Indicator (Amber) P. 106 2 Safety Support Indicator (Green/Gray)
P. 108
Even when the Low Speed Braking Control icon is green, if the parking sensor is turned off for the rear only, the brake assist will not operate when reversing.
2 Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 568

148

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Area Info for Road Departure Mitigation System

Road Departure Area Info for Blind Blind spot

Mitigation System spot information information system

Icon and State Info system

Icon and State Info

Instrument Panel

Area Info for the Low Speed Braking Control

Low Speed Braking Control Icon and State Info

Area Info for CMBSTM

CMBSTM Icon and State Info

Continued

149

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Warnings
You can check if there are any active warning messages.

Speed/Distance Units

Enables you to show another unit on the driver information interface and set the displayed measurements to read in either miles and km, mph and km/h.

1Warnings
If there are multiple warnings, you can roll the right selector wheel to see other warnings.

Press and hold the right selector wheel when you select the Blank/Unit change screen on the driver information interface. Each time you do this, the unit will change from miles and mph to km and km/h or vice versa. After this, a confirmation screen will appear for a few seconds.

150

Instrument Panel

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Customize Display
Change the settings to your liking.
Arrange content on the right side area You can choose which contents to display on the right side area.
1. Press the right selector wheel when you select the Customize display on the driver information interface.
2. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select Hide/show, then press the right selector wheel.

1Arrange content on the right side area Contents that are gray cannot be removed from the right side area.
When you customize settings, shift to (P.

3. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll between contents, then press the right selector wheel to check or uncheck them.

Continued

151

uuGauges and Driver Information InterfaceuDriver Information Interface (Right Side Area)

Change gauge design You can change the design, such as speedometer, tachometer and so on.
1. Press the right selector wheel when you select the Customize display on the driver information interface.
2. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select Gauge design, then press the right selector wheel.
3. Roll the right selector wheel to scroll to select your desired settings, then press the right selector wheel.

1Change gauge design
You can select the following design. Round: Shows the speedometer and tachometer for round type. Bar: Shows the speedometer and tachometer for bar type. Round minimal: Shows the speedometer and tachometer for round type while ACC with Low Speed Follow is not in operation. Bar minimal: Shows the speedometer and tachometer for bar type while ACC with Low Speed Follow is not in operation.

Instrument Panel

152

Controls
This chapter explains how to operate the various controls necessary for driving.

Clock .................................................. 154 Locking and Unlocking the Doors
Key .................................................. 156 Low Remote Key Signal Strength...... 158 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside .......................................... 159 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ............................................. 166 Childproof Door Locks ..................... 168 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking .......... 169 Opening and Closing the Trunk....... 170 Security System Immobilizer System .......................... 173 Security System Alarm...................... 173
* Not available on all models

Windows ........................................... 176
Moonroof* ........................................ 179
Operating the Switches Around the
Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button............. 180 Turn Signals ..................................... 182 Light Switches.................................. 183 Fog Lights* ...................................... 186 Daytime Running Lights ................... 186 Auto High-Beam .............................. 187 Wipers and Washers ........................ 190 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror*
Button ........................................... 192

Models with A-type meter
Brightness Control ........................... 193
Models with B-type meter
Brightness Control ........................... 194 Adjusting the Steering Wheel .......... 195 Mirrors Interior Rearview Mirror ................... 196 Power Door Mirrors ......................... 197 Seats .................................................. 198 Interior Convenience Items.............. 207 Climate Control System Using Automatic Climate Control .... 222 Automatic Climate Control Sensors......227

153

Clock

Adjusting the Clock
You can adjust the time in the clock display with the power mode in ON.

Adjusting the Time
MENU Button

Models with color audio system
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select Clock Settings. 3. Select Automatic Time, then select OFF. 4. Select Set Time. 5. Select 12H/24H to change 12 or 24 hour
clock. 6. Select 3 or 4 . 7. Select Set to set the time.

1Adjusting the Clock The clock is automatically updated through the audio system.
Models with color audio system
You can also select and enter with the LIST / SELECT (List / Selector) knob instead of the touch panel.

Controls

154

uuClockuAdjusting the Clock

Models with Display Audio
1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Date & Time. 5. Select Set Date & Time. 6. Select Automatic Date & Time, then
select OFF.
To adjust date: 7. Select Set Date. 8. Select 3 or 4 . 9. Select Save to set the date.
To adjust time: 7. Select Set Time. 8. Select 3 or 4 . 9. Select Save to set the time.

1Adjusting the Clock
Models with Display Audio
You can also adjust the clock by touching the clock displayed on the header area of the audio/ information screen, Clock displayed on the home screen, or All Apps. 1. Touch the clock on the screen.
The clock screen of the face-type appears. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Date & Time. 4. Select Set Date & Time. 5. Select Automatic Date & Time, then select OFF. 6. Select Set Date or Set Time. 7. Adjusting the dates, hours and minutes by
selecting 3 or 4 . 8. Select Save to set the time.
You can customize the clock display to show the 12 hour clock or 24 hour clock.
2 Customized Features P. 363
You can customize the date display to MM/DD/ YYYY, DD/MM/YYYY or YYYY/MM/DD.
2 Customized Features P. 363

Controls

155

Locking and Unlocking the Doors

Key
This vehicle comes with the following keys: Models without keyless access system Use the keys to start and stop the engine, and
to lock and unlock all the doors, fuel fill door and open the trunk.

1Key
All the keys have an immobilizer system. The immobilizer system helps to protect against vehicle theft.
2 Immobilizer System P. 173

Models with keyless access system

Follow the advice below to prevent damage to the
keys:
· Do not leave the keys in direct sunlight, or in
locations with high temperature or high humidity.
· Do not drop the keys or set heavy objects on them. · Keep the keys away from liquids, dust or sand. · Do not take the keys apart except for replacing the
battery.

If the circuits in the keys are damaged, the engine may not start, and the remote transmitter may not work. If the keys do not work properly, have them inspected by a dealer.

Models with remote engine starter
You can remotely start the engine using the remote engine start.
2 Remote Engine Start* P. 437

Controls

156 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuKey

Built-in Key
Built-in Key
Release Button
Key Number Tag

The built-in key can be used to unlock the doors when the remote key battery becomes weak and the power door unlock operation is disabled.

To remove the built-in key, push the release button and then pull out the key. To reinstall the built-in key, push the built-in key into the remote key until it clicks.

Contains a number that you will need if you purchase a replacement key.

1Key Number Tag Keep the key number tag separate from the key in a safe place outside of your vehicle. If you wish to purchase an additional key, contact a dealer.
If you lose your key and you cannot start the engine, contact a dealer.

Controls

157

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLow Remote Key Signal Strength

Low Remote Key Signal Strength
The vehicle transmits radio waves to locate the remote key when locking/unlocking* the doors and fuel fill door, opening* the trunk, or starting the engine.
In the following cases, locking/unlocking* the doors, opening* the trunk, or starting the engine may be inhibited or operation may be unstable: · Strong radio waves are being transmitted by nearby equipment. · You are carrying the remote key together with telecommunications equipment,
laptop computers, cell phones, or wireless devices. · A metallic object is touching or covering the remote key.

1Low Remote Key Signal Strength
Communication between the remote key and the vehicle consumes the remote key's battery. Battery life is about two years, but this varies depending on regularity of use. The battery is consumed whenever the remote key is receiving strong radio waves. Avoid placing it near electrical appliances such as televisions and personal computers.

Controls

158 * Not available on all models

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Using the Keyless Access System*
When you carry the remote key, you can lock/ unlock the doors, fuel fill door, and open the trunk. You can lock/unlock the doors and fuel fill door within a radius of about 32 inches (80 cm) of the outside door handle. You can open the trunk within about 32 inches (80 cm) radius from the trunk release button.

1Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside If the interior light switch is in the door activated position, the interior lights come on when you unlock the doors. No doors opened: The lights fade out after 30 seconds. Doors relocked: The lights go off immediately. 2 Interior Lights P. 207
1Using the Keyless Access System* If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the keyless access system, the doors and trunk will automatically relock.

Locking the doors and trunk
Door Lock Sensor

Touch the door lock sensor on the front door. u All the doors and trunk lock and the security system sets. u Some exterior lights flash once and the beeper sounds once.

You can lock or unlock doors using the keyless access system only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

159

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Unlocking the doors and trunk

Grab the driver's door handle: u The driver's door and fuel fill door

unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Grab the front passenger's door handle: u All the doors and trunk unlock. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds twice.

Trunk Release Button

Press the trunk release button: u The trunk unlocks and opens. u Some exterior lights flash twice and the

beeper sounds once.

2 Using the Trunk Release Button* P. 171

Controls

160 * Not available on all models

1Using the Keyless Access System*
· Do not leave the remote key in the vehicle when
you get out. Carry it with you.
· Even if you are not carrying the remote key, you
can lock/unlock the doors while someone else with the remote key is within range.
· The door may be unlocked if the door handle is
covered with water in heavy rain or in a car wash if the remote key is within range.
· If you grip a front door handle or touch the front
door lock sensor wearing gloves, the door sensor may be slow to respond or may not respond by locking/unlocking the doors.
· After locking the door, you have up to 2 seconds
during which you can pull the door handle to confirm whether the door is locked. If you need to unlock the door immediately after locking it, wait at least 2 seconds before gripping the handle, otherwise the door will not unlock.
· The door might not open if you pull it immediately
after gripping the door handle. Grip the handle again and confirm that the door is unlocked before pulling the handle.
· Even within the 32 inches (80 cm) radius, you may
not be able to lock/unlock the doors with the remote key if it is above or below the outside handle.
· The remote key may not operate if it is too close to
the door and door glass.
The light flash, beep and door unlock mode settings can be customized using the audio/information screen or driver information interface.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

The activation range of the auto lock function is about 5 feet (1.5 m)

Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away auto lock®)
When you walk away from the vehicle with all doors closed while carrying the remote key, the doors will automatically lock. The auto lock function activates when all doors are closed, and the remote key is within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of the outside door handle or trunk release button. Exit vehicle while carrying the remote key and close door(s). 1. While within about 5 feet (1.5 m) radius of
the vehicle. u The beeper sounds; the auto lock
function will be activated. 2. Carry the remote key beyond about 5 feet
(1.5 m) from the vehicle and remain outside this range for 2 or more seconds. u Some exterior lights flash; the beeper
sounds; all doors will then lock.

1Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function is set to OFF as the factory default setting. The auto lock function can be set to ON using the audio/information screen or driver information interface. If you set the auto lock function to ON using the audio/information screen or driver information interface, only the remote transmitter that was used to unlock the driver's door prior to the setting change can activate auto lock.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
After the auto lock function has been activated, when you stay within the locking/unlocking operation range, the indicator on the remote key will continue to flash until the doors are locked.
When you stay beside the vehicle within the operation range, the doors will automatically lock approximately 30 seconds after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds.
When you open a door after the auto lock function activating beeper sounds, the auto lock function will be delayed until all doors are closed.

Continued

Under the following circumstances, the auto-lock
function will not activate:
· The remote key is inside the vehicle.
uThe beeper will not sound.
· The remote key is taken out of its operational range
before all the doors are closed. uThe beeper will sound.

Controls

161

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

To temporarily deactivate the function: 1. Set the power mode to OFF. 2. Open the driver's door. 3. Using the master door lock switch, operate
the lock as follows: Lock Unlock Lock Unlock. u The beeper sounds and the function is
deactivated.
To restore the function: · Set the power mode to ON. · Lock the vehicle without using the auto lock
function. · With the remote key on you, move out of
the auto lock function operation range. · Open any door.

1Locking the doors and trunk (Walk away auto lock®)
The auto lock function does not operate when any of the following conditions are met.
· The remote key is inside the vehicle. · A door or the hood is not closed. · The power mode is set to any mode other than
OFF.
· The remote key is not located within a radius of
about 5 feet (1.5 m) from the vehicle when you get out of the vehicle and close the doors.
Auto lock function operation stop beeper After the auto lock function has been activated, the auto lock operation stop beeper sounds for approximately two seconds in the following cases.
· The remote key is put inside the vehicle through a
window.
· You are located too close to the vehicle. · The remote key is put inside the trunk.

If the warning beeper sounds, check that you are carrying the remote key. Then, open/close a door and confirm the auto lock activation beeper sounds once.

Controls

162

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Using the Remote Transmitter

Lock Button

LED Unlock Button

Locking the doors Press the lock button. Once:
u Some exterior lights flash, all the doors and fuel fill door lock, and the security system sets.
Twice (within five seconds after the first push):
u Some exterior lights flash, the beeper sounds, and verifies the security system is set.

Unlocking the doors Press the unlock button. Once:
u Some exterior lights flash twice, and the driver's door and fuel fill door unlock.
Twice: u The remaining doors unlock.

1Using the Remote Transmitter If you do not open a door within 30 seconds of unlocking the vehicle with the remote transmitter, the doors will automatically relock.
You can lock or unlock doors using the remote transmitter only when the power mode is in VEHICLE OFF.
The remote transmitter uses low-power signals, so the operating range may vary depending on the surroundings.
The remote will not lock the vehicle when a door is open.
If the distance at which the remote transmitter works varies, the battery is probably low. If the LED does not come on when you press a button, the battery is dead.
2 Replacing the Remote Battery P. 629
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Controls

Continued

163

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Unlocking the Doors Using a Key
If the unlock button of the remote key does not work, use the built-in key instead. The keyhole is on the back of the door handle.
Insert the built-in key into the key cylinder from below the handle and then turn it.

1Unlocking the Doors Using a Key When unlocking, the driver's door unlocks first. Turn the key a second time within a few seconds to unlock the remaining doors.
You can customize the door unlock mode setting. 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

If the lock button of the remote key does not work, refer to the following.
2 Locking a Door Without Using a Key P. 165

Controls

164

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside

Locking a Door Without Using a Key
If you do not have the key on you, or if for some reason you cannot lock a door using the key, you can lock the door without it.
Locking the front door Push the lock tab forward a or push the master door lock switch in the lock direction b, and close the door.
Locking the rear doors Push the lock tab forward and close the door.

1Locking a Door Without Using a Key When you lock the driver's door, all the other doors and fuel fill door lock at the same time.
Before locking a door, make sure that the key is not inside the vehicle.
You can change the lockout protection operation setting.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Controls

Lockout protection function If the vehicle cannot detect the remote key, lockout protection activates.
u A beeper sounds, some exterior lights flash, the doors unlock, and a message appears on the driver information interface.
u This allows you to open a door in case the remote key is still inside the vehicle.
If you do not open a door, all doors relock after 15 seconds.
To avoid non-detection, make sure to keep the remote key away from cell phones and other devices that may cause signal interference.
165

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Using the Lock Tab

To lock

Lock Tab

Locking a door Push the lock tab forward.

To unlock

Unlocking a door Pull the lock tab rearward.

1Using the Lock Tab
When you lock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, all of the other doors and fuel fill door lock at the same time. When you unlock the door using the lock tab on the driver's door, only the driver's door and fuel fill door will unlock.

Controls

166

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuLocking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside

Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle

Inner Handle

Pull the front door inner handle. u The door unlocks and opens in one motion.

1Unlocking Using the Front Door Inner Handle
The front door inner handles are designed to allow front seat occupants to open the door in one motion. However, this feature requires that front seat occupants never pull a front door inner handle while the vehicle is in motion.
Children should always ride in a rear seat where childproof door locks are provided.
2 Childproof Door Locks P. 168

Unlocking and opening the driver's door from the inner handle unlocks all the other doors.
To avoid all the doors unlocking, use the lock tab on the driver's door to unlock, then lock again before opening the door.
u This setting works for one time only. If you do not want all the doors to be unlocked all the time, customize the Auto Door Unlock*1/Auto door unlock*2 setting to OFF using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Controls

*1 : Models with Display Audio *2 : Models with color audio system

Continued

167

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuChildproof Door Locks

Using the Master Door Lock Switch

To unlock

Press the master door lock switch in as shown to lock or unlock all doors and fuel fill door.

To lock

1Using the Master Door Lock Switch
When you lock/unlock either of the front doors using the master lock switch, all the other doors and fuel fill door lock/unlock at the same time.

Controls

Master Door Lock Switch

Childproof Door Locks
The childproof door locks prevent the rear doors from being opened from the inside regardless of the position of the lock tab.
Setting the Childproof Door Locks
Slide the lever in the rear door to the lock position, and close the door.

1Childproof Door Locks
To open the door from the inside when the childproof door lock is on, put the lock tab in the unlock position, lower the rear window, put your hand out of the window, and pull the outside door handle.

Unlock

When opening the door Open the door using the outside door handle.

Lock

168

uuLocking and Unlocking the DoorsuAuto Door Locking/Unlocking

Auto Door Locking/Unlocking

Your vehicle locks or unlocks all doors automatically when a certain condition is met.
Auto Door Locking
Drive lock mode All doors lock when the vehicle's speed reaches about 10 mph (15 km/h).

1Auto Door Locking/Unlocking
You can turn off or change to another auto door locking/unlocking setting using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Auto Door Unlocking
Driver's door open mode All doors unlock when the driver's door is opened.

Controls

169

Controls

Opening and Closing the Trunk
Precautions for Opening/Closing the Trunk
Models without self opening trunk lid
Opening the trunk Open the trunk all the way.
u If it is not fully opened, the trunk lid may begin to close under its own weight.
All models
Closing the trunk Keep the trunk lid closed while driving to:
u Avoid possible damage. u Prevent exhaust gas from leaking into the vehicle.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 84
Using the Trunk Opener
Press and hold the trunk opener on the driver's door to unlock and open the trunk.
2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 672
Trunk Opener
170

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuUsing the Trunk Release Button*

Using the Trunk Release Button*

Trunk Release Button

Push up the release button on the trunk lid after the doors are unlocked.
2 If You Cannot Open the Trunk P. 672

Even if the trunk is locked, you can open the trunk if you carry the remote key.
u Some exterior lights flash twice and the beeper sounds once.

1Using the Trunk Release Button*
· If you forget the remote key inside, the beeper will
sound and the trunk will not close.
· A person who is not carrying the remote key can
unlock the trunk if a person who is carrying it is within range.
· If the beeper sounds after you close the trunk,
move the remote key away from the trunk and close again.
· The remote key may not operate if it is too close to
the trunk.

Using the Remote Transmitter
Press the trunk release button for approximately one second to unlock and open the trunk.

1Using the Remote Transmitter
If the driver's door is locked, the trunk will automatically lock when you close it. Otherwise, you will have to lock it manually.

Trunk Release Button

Controls

* Not available on all models

171

uuOpening and Closing the TrunkuEmergency Trunk Opener

Emergency Trunk Opener

The trunk release lever allows you to open the trunk from inside for your safety.

Lever

Slide the release lever in the direction of the arrow.

1Emergency Trunk Opener
Parents should decide if their children should be shown how to use this feature.

Controls

172

Security System

Immobilizer System
This system prevents a key that has not been pre-registered from starting the engine.
Pay attention to the following when pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button: · Do not allow objects that emit strong radio waves near the ENGINE START/
STOP button. · Make sure the key is not covered by or touching a metal object. · Do not bring a key from another vehicle's immobilizer system near the ENGINE
START/STOP button. · Do not put the key near magnetic items. Electronic devices, such as televisions
and audio systems emit strong magnetic fields. Note that even a key chain can become magnetic.
Security System Alarm
The security system alarm activates when the trunk, hood or doors are forcibly opened. The alarm does not activate if the trunk or doors are opened with the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*.
However, the alarm activates if a door is opened with the key and then the transmission is taken out of (P or the hood is opened before the power mode is in ON.

1Immobilizer System
NOTICE Leaving the key in the vehicle can result in theft or accidental movement of the vehicle. Always take the key with you whenever you leave the vehicle unattended.
Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
Canadian models
Apply and hold the brake pedal before turning the vehicle on the first time after the battery has been disconnected.
1Security System Alarm Do not alter the system or add other devices to it. Doing so may damage the system and make your vehicle inoperable.
The security system alarm continues for a maximum of two minutes until the security system alarm deactivates.

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

173

Controls

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

When the security system alarm activates The horn sounds intermittently, and some exterior lights flash.
To deactivate the security system alarm Unlock the vehicle using the key, remote transmitter or keyless access system*, or power mode is in ON. The system, along with the horn and flashing lights, is deactivated.
Setting the security system alarm The security system alarm automatically sets when the following conditions have been met: · The power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK). · The hood is closed. · All doors and trunk are locked from outside with the remote transmitter, or
keyless access system*.

1Security System Alarm
Do not set the security system alarm when someone is in the vehicle or a window is open. The system can accidentally activate when:
· Unlocking the door with the lock tab. · Opening the trunk with the trunk opener on the
driver's door or the emergency trunk opener.
· Opening the hood with the hood release. · Taking the transmission out of (P.
If the battery goes dead after you have set the security system alarm, the security alarm may activate once the battery is recharged or replaced. If this occurs, deactivate the security system alarm by unlocking a door using the remote transmitter or keyless access system*.

When the security system alarm sets The security system alarm indicator in the instrument panel blinks and the blinking interval changes after about 15 seconds.

To cancel the security system alarm The security system is canceled when the vehicle is unlocked using the remote transmitter or keyless access system*, or when the power mode is set to ON. The security system alarm indicator goes off at the same time.

174 * Not available on all models

Panic Mode
Panic Button

The panic button on the remote
transmitter
If you press the panic button for approximately one second, the following will occur for about 30 seconds: · The horn sounds.
· Some exterior lights flash.

Canceling panic mode · Press any button on the remote transmitter. · Set the power mode to ON.

uuSecurity SystemuSecurity System Alarm

Controls

175

Controls

Windows

Opening/Closing the Power Windows
The power windows can be opened and closed when the power mode is in ON, using the switches on the doors.

The driver's side switches can be used to open and close all the windows. The power window lock button on the driver's side must be switched off (indicator off) to open and close the windows from anywhere other than the driver's seat.

When the power window lock button is pressed, the indicator comes on and you can only operate the driver's window. Turn the power window lock button on if a child is in the vehicle.

Opening/Closing the Windows with Auto-Open/Close Function

Indicator

Power Window Lock Button

Manual operation To open: Push the switch down lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Pull the switch up lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Driver's Window Switch

Front Passenger's Window Switch

Automatic operation To open: Push the switch down firmly. To close: Pull the switch up firmly.

The window opens or closes completely. To stop the window at any time, push or pull the switch briefly.

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows
3 WARNING
Closing a power window on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure your passengers are away from the windows before closing them.
The power windows can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
Auto Reverse If a power window senses resistance when closing automatically, it will stop closing and reverse direction.
The driver's window auto reverse function is disabled when you continuously pull up the switch.
The auto reverse function stops sensing when the window is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes.

176

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Opening/Closing the Windows without Auto-Open/Close Function

To open: Push the switch down. To close: Pull the switch up.

Open

Release the switch when the window reaches the desired position.

1Opening/Closing the Power Windows While driving with any of the windows open, you may hear a booming, throbbing, or helicopter-type noise or pressure. This is called wind buffeting. This is a normal occurrence that can be minimized.
If you hear a wind buffeting noise with any of the windows open, lower all of the other windows slightly or open the moonroof*.

Opening the Windows with the Remote Key

Unlock Button

To open: Press the unlock button, and then within 10 seconds, press it again and hold it. If the windows stop midway, repeat the procedure.

1Opening the Windows with the Remote Key
Models with moonroof
If you open the windows with the remote key, the moonroof will open automatically along with them.
You can turn off or on to open the windows with the remote key setting using the driver information interface or audio/information screen.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

177

uuWindowsuOpening/Closing the Power Windows

Opening the Windows with the Key
Pull and hold the outer handle. Insert the key into the key cylinder completely from below the handle.

1Opening the Windows with the Key
Models with moonroof
If you open the windows with the key, the moonroof will open automatically along with them.

Open

To open: Unlock the driver's door with the key. Within 10 seconds of returning the key to the central position, turn the key in the unlock direction and hold it there.

Release the key to stop the windows at the desired position. If you want further adjustment, repeat the same operation.

Controls

178

Controls

Moonroof*

Opening/Closing the Moonroof
You can only operate the moonroof when the power mode is in ON. Use the switch in the front of the ceiling to open and close the moonroof.

Using the Moonroof Switch

Open

Automatic operation To open: Pull the switch back firmly. To close: Push the switch forward firmly.

Close Tilt

The moonroof automatically opens or closes all the way. To stop the moonroof midway, pull or push the switch briefly.
Manual operation To open: Pull the switch back lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached. To close: Push the switch forward lightly, and hold it until the desired position is reached.

Tilting the moonroof up To tilt: Push on the center of the moonroof switch. To close: Push the switch forward firmly, then release.

1Opening/Closing the Moonroof
3 WARNING
Opening or closing the moonroof on someone's hands or fingers can cause serious injury.
Make sure all hands and fingers are clear of the moonroof before opening or closing it.
NOTICE Opening the moonroof in below freezing temperature or when it is covered with snow or ice can damage the moonroof panel or motor.
The moonroof can be operated for up to 10 minutes after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Opening either front door cancels this function.
When resistance is detected, the auto reverse function causes the moonroof to change directions, then stop. Auto reverse stops sensing when the moonroof is almost closed to ensure that it fully closes. Make sure that all objects, including fingers, are clear of the moonroof.
You can use the remote transmitter or the key to operate the moonroof.
2 Opening the Windows with the Remote Key P. 177
2 Opening the Windows with the Key P. 178

* Not available on all models

179

Operating the Switches Around the Steering Wheel
ENGINE START/STOP Button
Changing the Power Mode
VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) The button is off. The power to all electrical components is turned off.

1ENGINE START/STOP Button ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range You can start the engine when the remote key is inside the vehicle.
Operating Range

Controls

ACCESSORY The button blinks (in red). Operate the audio system and other accessories in this position.

ON The button blinks (in red). All electrical components can be used.

Without pressing the brake pedal

Press the button without the transmission in (P.

Press the button.

Press the button with the transmission in (P.

Put the transmission into (P.

The engine may also start if the remote key is close to the door or window, even if it is outside the vehicle.
ON mode: The ENGINE START/STOP button is on (in red), if the engine is running.
If the battery of the remote key is getting low, the engine may not start when you push the ENGINE START/STOP button. If the engine does not start, refer to the following link.
2 If the Remote Key Battery is Weak P. 649
Do not leave the power mode in ACCESSORY or ON when you get out.

180

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluENGINE START/STOP Button

Automatic Power Off
If you leave the vehicle for 30 to 60 minutes with the transmission in (P and the power mode in ACCESSORY, the vehicle automatically goes into the mode similar to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) to avoid draining the battery.

Power Mode Reminder
If you open the driver's door when the power mode is in ACCESSORY, a warning beep sounds.

Remote Reminder

When the power mode is set to any mode other than OFF and you remove the remote key from the vehicle and shut the door, an alarm will sound. If the alarm continues to sound, place the remote key in another location.
When the power mode is in ACCESSORY
The alarm will sound from outside the vehicle.
When the power mode is in ON An alarm will sound both inside and outside the vehicle. In addition, a warning indicator will appear on the instrument panel.

1Remote Reminder When the remote key is within the system's operational range, and all the doors are closed, the warning function cancels.
If the remote key is taken out of the vehicle after the engine has been started, you can no longer change the ENGINE START/STOP button mode or restart the engine. Always make sure if the remote key is in your vehicle when you operate the ENGINE START/ STOP button.
Removing the remote key from the vehicle through a window does not activate the warning buzzer.
Do not put the remote key on the dashboard or in the glove box. It may cause the warning buzzer to activate. Under some other conditions that can prevent the vehicle from locating the remote key, the warning buzzer may also activate even if the remote key is within the system's operational range.

Controls

181

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluTurn Signals

Turn Signals
(A) (B)
(B) (A)

The turn signals can be used when the power mode is in ON.
(A): Turn signal Push the lever up or down based on the direction you want to turn, and the turn signal will blink.

1Turn Signals
The turn signal indicator on the instrument panel will blink when the external turn signal blinks.
2 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning Indicators P. 98

(B): One-touch turn signal When you lightly push the lever up or down and release it, the turn signal will blink 3 times.
u If you lightly push the lever in the opposite direction while it is blinking, the blinking will stop.

Controls

182

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Light Switches
Manual Operation
High Beams

Rotating the light switch turns the lights on and off, regardless of the power mode setting.

High beams Push the lever forward until you hear a click.

Flashing the high beams Low Beams
Turns on parking lights, side marker, tail, and rear license plate lights
Turns on headlights, side marker, parking lights, tail, and rear license plate lights

Low beams When in high beams, pull the lever back to return to low beams.
Flashing the high beams Pull the lever back, and release it.
Lights off Turn the lever to OFF either when: · The shift lever is in (P. · The parking brake is applied. To turn the lights on again, turn the lever to OFF to cancel the lights off mode. Even if you do not cancel the lights off mode, the lights come on automatically when: · The transmission is taken out of (P and the
parking brake is released. · The vehicle starts to move.

1Light Switches If you leave the power mode in VEHICLE OFF while the lights are on, a chime sounds when the driver's door is opened.
When the lights are on, the lights on indicator in the instrument panel will be on.
2 Lights On Indicator P. 98
Do not leave the lights on when the engine is off because it will cause the battery to discharge.
If you sense that the level of the headlights is abnormal, have the vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Continued

183

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
Automatic lighting control can be used when the power mode is in ON.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)
We recommend that you turn on the lights manually when driving at night, in a dense fog, or in dark areas such as long tunnels or parking facilities.

When the light switch is in AUTO, the headlights and other exterior lights will switch on and off automatically depending on the ambient brightness.
The headlights come on when you unlock a door in dark areas with the headlight switch in AUTO.
u Once you lock the door, the headlights will go off.

The light sensor is in the location shown below. Do not cover this light sensor with anything; otherwise, the automatic lighting system may not work properly.
Models without automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor

Models with automatic intermittent wipers
Light Sensor

Controls

184

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluLight Switches

Headlight Integration with Wipers
The headlights automatically come on when the wipers are used several times within a certain number of intervals with the headlight switch in AUTO. The headlights automatically go off a few minutes later if the wipers are stopped.
Automatic Lighting Off Feature
The headlights, all other exterior lights, and the instrument panel lights turn off 15 seconds after you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK), take the remote key with you, and close the driver's door.
If you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF (LOCK) with the headlight switch on, but do not open the door, the lights turn off after 10 minutes (3 minutes, if the switch is in the AUTO position).
The lights turn on again when you unlock or open the driver's door. If you unlock the door, but do not open it within 15 seconds, the lights go off. If you open the driver's door, you will hear a reminder chime alerting you that the lights are on.

1Automatic Operation (automatic lighting control)

U.S. models
You can adjust the auto light sensitivity as follow:

Setting

The exterior lights come on when the ambient light is at

Max High

Bright

Mid

Low Min

Dark

2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

1Headlight Integration with Wipers
This feature activates while the headlights are off in AUTO. The instrument panel brightness does not change when the headlights come on.

At dark ambient light levels, the automatic lighting control feature turns on the headlights, regardless of the number of wiper sweeps.

1Automatic Lighting Off Feature
You can change the headlight auto off timer setting. 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

185

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluFog Lights*

Fog Lights*

When the low beam headlights are on, turn the fog light switch on to use the fog lights.

Fog Light Switch
Daytime Running Lights
The parking/daytime running lights come on when the following conditions have been met: · The power mode is in ON. · The headlight switch is AUTO or . · The parking brake is released.
The lights remain on even if you set the parking brake. Setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF will turn off the daytime running lights.
The daytime running lights are off once the headlight switch is turned on, or when the headlight switch is in AUTO and it is getting darker outside.

186 * Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

Controls

Auto High-Beam
The front wide view camera detects the light sources ahead of the vehicle such as the lights of a preceding or oncoming vehicle, or street lights. When you are driving at night, the system automatically switches the headlights between low beam and high beam depending on the situation.
Front Wide View Camera

1Auto High-Beam
The auto high-beam system does not always operate in every situation. This system is just for assisting the driver. Always observe your surroundings and switch the headlights between high beam and low beam manually if necessary.

If you find the timing of beam changes inconvenient for driving, change the headlight beams manually.

The range and the distance at which the camera can recognize varies depending on conditions surrounding your vehicle.

How to Use the Auto High-Beam

When all of the following conditions have been met, the auto high-beam indicator

comes on and the auto high-beam is activated.

· The power mode is in ON.

Auto High-Beam Indicator

· The light switch is in AUTO. · The lever is in the low beam position.

Light Switch · The headlights have been automatically

activated.

· It is dark outside the vehicle.

Regarding the handling of the camera mounted to the inside of the windshield, refer to the following.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
For the auto high-beam to work properly:
· Do not place an object that reflects light on the
dashboard.
· Keep the windshield around the camera clean.
When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to apply the windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
· Do not attach an object, sticker or film to the area
around the camera.
· Do not touch the camera lens.

If the auto high-beam indicator does not come on even when all the conditions have been met, carry out the following procedure and the indicator will come on. · Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving.

If the camera receives a strong impact, or repairing of the area near the camera is required, consult a dealer.

Continued

187

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

Controls

Automatic switching between high-beam and low-beam When auto high-beam is active, the headlights switch between high beam and low beam based on the following conditions.

Switching to high beam:
All of the following conditions must be met before the high beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 25 mph (40
km/h) or more. There are no preceding or
oncoming vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. There are few street lights on the road ahead.

Switching to low beam:
One of the following conditions must be met before the low beams turn on. Your vehicle speed is 15 mph (24
km/h) or less. There is a preceding or oncoming
vehicle with headlights or taillights turned on. There are many street lights on the road ahead.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
In the following cases, the auto high-beam system may not switch the headlights properly or the switching timing may be changed. In case of the automatic switching operation does not fit for your driving habits, please switch the headlights manually.
· The brightness of the lights from the preceding or
oncoming vehicle is intense or poor.
· Visibility is poor due to the weather (rain, snow,
fog, windshield frost, etc.).
· Surrounding light sources, such as street lights,
electric billboards and traffic lights are illuminating the road ahead.
· The brightness level of the road ahead constantly
changes.
· The road is bumpy or has many curves. · A vehicle suddenly appears in front of you, or a
vehicle in front of you is not in the preceding or oncoming direction.
· Your vehicle is tilted with a heavy load in the rear. · A traffic sign, mirror, or other reflective object
ahead is reflecting strong light toward the vehicle.
· The oncoming vehicle frequently disappears under
roadside trees or behind median barriers.
· The preceding or oncoming vehicle is a motorcycle,
bicycle, mobility scooter, or other small vehicle.

The auto high-beam system keeps the headlight low
beam when:
· Windshield wipers are operating at a high speed. · The camera has detected a dense fog.

188

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAuto High-Beam

Manual switching between high-beam and low-beam If you want to manually switch the headlights between high beam and low beam, follow either of the procedures below. Note that when you do this, the auto highbeam indicator will turn off and the auto high-beam will be deactivated.
Using the lever: Pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it within about one second while driving.
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, pull the lever toward you for flashing the high beams then release it while driving. The auto high-beam indicator will come on.
Using the light switch: Turn the light switch to .
u To reactivate the auto high-beam, turn the light switch to AUTO when the lever is in the low beam position, the auto high-beam indicator will come on.

1How to Use the Auto High-Beam
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Camera temperature too high message appears:
· Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed toward the camera.
· Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Clean front windshield or poor viewing conditions. message appears:
· Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the
windshield is clean. Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message does not disappear after driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

You can change the auto high-beam system on and off.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Controls

189

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Controls

Wipers and Washers

Windshield Wiper/Washer
The windshield wipers and washers can be used when the power mode is in ON.

Pull to use washer.
Intermittent Time Adjustment Ring*
MIST OFF INT*1/AUTO*2 LO: Low speed wipe HI: High speed wipe

MIST The wipers run at high speed until you release the lever.
Wiper switch (OFF, INT*1/AUTO*2, LO, HI)
Move the lever up or down to change the wiper settings.
Adjusting wiper operation* Turn the adjustment ring to adjust the wiper operation.
Lower speed, fewer sweeps
Higher speed, more sweeps

1Wipers and Washers
NOTICE Do not use the wipers when the windshield is dry. The windshield will get scratched, or the rubber blades will get damaged.
NOTICE In cold weather, the blades may freeze to the windshield. Operating the wipers in this condition may damage the wipers. Use the defogger to warm the windshield, then turn the wipers on.
Models with intermittent time adjustment ring
If the vehicle speeds up while the wipers are operating intermittently, the length of the wipe interval shortens. When the vehicle speeds up, the wiper operation's shortest delay setting ( ) and the LO setting become the same.
All models
Turn the washers off if no washer fluid comes out. The pump may get damaged.

Washer
Sprays while you pull the lever toward you. When you release the lever for more than one second, the spray stops, the wipers sweep two or three more times to clear the windshield, then stop.

190

*1 : Models with manual intermittent operation *2 : Models with automatic intermittent operation
* Not available on all models

The wiper motor may stop motor operation temporarily to prevent an overload. Wiper operation will return to normal within a few minutes, once the circuit has returned to normal.
If the wiper stops operating due to any obstacle such as the buildup of snow, park the vehicle in a safe place. Rotate the wiper switch to OFF, and set the power mode to ACCESSORY or VEHICLE OFF, then remove the obstacle.

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluWipers and Washers

Automatic Intermittent Wipers*
When you push the lever down to AUTO, the windshield wipers sweep once, and go into the automatic mode.

1Automatic Intermittent Wipers* The rainfall sensor is in the location shown below.
Rainfall Sensor

Adjustment Ring

The wipers operate intermittently, at low speed, or at high speed and stop in accordance with the amount of rainfall the rainfall sensor detects.

Auto sensitivity adjustment When the wiper function is set to AUTO, you can adjust the sensitivity of the rainfall sensor (using the adjustment ring) so that wipers will operate in accordance with your preference.
Sensor sensitivity
Low sensitivity

AUTO should always be turned OFF before the
following situations in order to prevent severe
damage to the wiper system:
· Cleaning the windshield · Driving through a car wash · No rain present

High sensitivity

* Not available on all models

191

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluRear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button

Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
Press the rear defogger and heated door mirror* button to defog the rear window and mirrors* when the power mode is in ON.
The rear defogger and heated door mirror* automatically switches off after 10-30 minutes depending on the outside temperature. However, if the outside temperature is 32°F (0°C) or below, it does not automatically switch off.

1Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button
This system consumes a lot of power, so turn it off when the window has been defogged. Also, do not use the system for a long time while the engine is idling. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
Models with heated door mirror
When the power mode is set to ON and the outside temperature is below 41°F (5°C), the heated door mirror may automatically activate for 10 minutes.

Controls

192 * Not available on all models

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Models with A-type meter
Brightness Control
Control Dial

When the power mode is in ON, you can use the brightness control dial to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the dial up. Dim: Turn the dial down.

1Brightness Control
The brightness of the instrument panel will be reduced when the following conditions:
· The power mode is in ON. · The parking lights are turned on and it is dark
outside.

You will hear a beep when the brightness reaches minimum or maximum. Several seconds after adjusting the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.

Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the driver information interface while you are adjusting it.

Controls

193

Controls

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluBrightness Control

Models with B-type meter
Brightness Control
Control Dial

The brightness of the gauge is automatically adjusted depending on the ambient brightness. · The brightness becomes darker when the
ambient light is dark. · The brightness becomes brighter when the
ambient light is bright.

1Brightness Control
Several seconds after you have adjusted the brightness, you will be returned to the previous screen.

Adjusting the brightness manually When the power mode is in ON, you can use the brightness control dial to adjust instrument panel brightness. Brighten: Turn the dial up. Dim: Turn the dial down.
u You can change the setting even when the ambient lighting is bright, but the brightness of the gauge won't change.

Brightness level indicator The brightness level is shown on the driver information interface while you are adjusting it.

194

uuOperating the Switches Around the Steering WheeluAdjusting the Steering Wheel

Adjusting the Steering Wheel

The steering wheel height and distance from your body can be adjusted so that you

can comfortably grip the steering wheel in an appropriate driving posture.

To lock

1. While the vehicle is stopped, push the steering wheel adjustment lever down.

u The steering wheel adjustment lever is

under the steering column.

2. Move the steering wheel up or down, and

in or out.

u Make sure you can see the instrument

Lever

To adjust

panel gauges and indicators. 3. Pull the steering wheel adjustment lever up

to lock the steering wheel in position.

u After adjusting the position, make sure

you have securely locked the steering

wheel in place by trying to move it up,

down, in, and out.

1Adjusting the Steering Wheel
3 WARNING
Adjusting the steering wheel position while driving may cause you to lose control of the vehicle and be seriously injured in a crash.
Adjust the steering wheel only when the vehicle is stopped.

Controls

195

Controls

Mirrors

Interior Rearview Mirror
Adjust the angle of the rearview mirror when you are sitting in the correct driving position.
Rearview Mirror with Day and Night Positions*
Flip the tab to switch the position. The night position will help to reduce the glare Tab from headlights behind you when driving after dark.

1Mirrors Keep the inside and outside mirrors clean and adjusted for best visibility.
Adjust the mirrors before you start driving. 2 Front Seats P. 198

Daytime Position

Night Position

Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*

Sensor

When you are driving after dark, the automatic dimming rearview mirror reduces the glare from headlights behind you. Press the AUTO button to turn this function on and off. When activated, the AUTO indicator comes on.

1Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror*
The auto dimming function cancels when the transmission is in (R.

Auto Button

196 * Not available on all models

Power Door Mirrors

Adjustment Switch

Selector Switch

You can adjust the door mirrors when the power mode is in ON.
Mirror position adjustment L/R selector switch: Select the left or right mirror. After adjusting the mirror, return the switch to the center position. Mirror position adjustment switch: Press the switch left, right, up, or down to move the mirror.

uuMirrorsuPower Door Mirrors

Controls

197

Seats

Front Seats
Allow sufficient space.
Move back.

Adjust the driver's seat as far back as possible while allowing you to maintain full control of the vehicle. You should be able to sit upright, well back in the seat and be able to adequately press the pedals without leaning forward, and grip the steering wheel comfortably. The passenger's seat should be adjusted in a similar manner, so that it is as far back from the front airbag in the dashboard as possible.

Adjusting the Seat Positions
Adjusting the front power seats*

1Seats Always make seat adjustments before driving.
1Front Seats
3 WARNING
Sitting too close to a front airbag can result in serious injury or death if the front airbags inflate.
Always sit as far back from the front airbags as possible while maintaining control of the vehicle.

Horizontal Position Adjustment

The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration and Transport Canada recommend that drivers allow at least 10 inches (25 cm) between the center of the steering wheel and the chest.

Controls

Height Adjustment (Driver's seat only)
Driver's seat is shown.
198 * Not available on all models

Seat-back Angle Adjustment

Adjusting the front manual seats*
Height Adjustment (Driver side only) Pull up or push down the lever to raise or lower the seat.

uuSeatsuFront Seats
1Adjusting the front manual seats* Once a seat is adjusted correctly, rock it back and forth to make sure it is locked in position.

Horizontal Position Adjustment Pull up on the bar to move the
seat, then release the bar.

Driver's seat is shown.

Seat-back Angle Adjustment Pull up the lever to change the angle.

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

199

uuSeatsuFront Seats

Adjusting the Seat-Backs
Adjust the driver's seat-back to a comfortable, upright position, leaving ample space between your chest and the airbag cover in the center of the steering wheel.
The front seat passenger should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, upright position.

1Adjusting the Seat-Backs
3 WARNING
Reclining the seat-back too far can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Adjust the seat-back to an upright position, and sit well back in the seat.
Do not put a cushion, or other object, between the seat-back and your back.

Reclining a seat-back so that the shoulder part of the belt no longer rests against the occupant's chest reduces the protective capability of the belt. It also increases the chance of sliding under the belt in a crash and being seriously injured. The farther a seat-back is reclined, the greater the risk of injury.

Doing so may interfere with proper seat belt or airbag operation.
If you cannot get far enough away from the steering wheel and still reach the controls, we recommend that you investigate whether some type of adaptive equipment may help.

Controls

200

Controls

uuSeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seats

Folding Down the Rear Seats

Release Lever*

1. Pull the release lever in the trunk to release the lock.

1Folding Down the Rear Seats The rear seat-back(s*) can be folded down to accommodate bulkier items in the trunk.
Never drive with the seat-back folded down and the trunk lid open.
2 Exhaust Gas Hazard P. 84

Release Lever

2. Fold the seat-back down.

To lock a seat-back upright, push it backwards until it locks. When returning the seat-back to its original position, push it firmly back. Also, make sure all rear shoulder belts are positioned in front of the seat-back.

Make sure that the folded seat-back does not press against the front passenger seat, as this can cause the weight sensors in the front passenger seat to work improperly.
2 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator P. 68

Make sure all items in the trunk or items extending through the opening into the rear seats are properly secured. Loose items can fly forward if you have to brake hard.

The front seat(s) must be far enough forward so they do not interfere with the rear seats as they fold down.

* Not available on all models

Continued

201

uuSeatsuRear Seats

Rear Seat Reminder
This feature alerts you to the possible presence of passengers or items in the rear seats before you exit the vehicle. It activates when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF if the rear doors were opened shortly before or after the power mode was set to ON.
A reminder appears on the driver information interface and an alert will sound when the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF.

1Rear Seat Reminder When the power mode is set to VEHICLE OFF, the reminder comes on briefly, then the function is deactivated.
The reminder will not work if the power mode has not been set to ON within 10 minutes of operating the rear doors.
The system does not detect passengers in the rear seats. Instead, it can detect when a rear door is opened and closed, indicating that there may be something in the rear seats.

You can turn off the notification setting. 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Controls

202

uuSeatsuMaintain a Proper Sitting Position

Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
After all occupants have adjusted their seats and head restraints, and put on their seat belts, it is very important that they continue to sit upright, well back in their seats, with their feet on the floor, until the vehicle is safely parked and the engine is off.
Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury during a crash. For example, if an occupant slouches, lies down, turns sideways, sits forward, leans forward or sideways, or puts one or both feet up, the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased.

1Maintain a Proper Sitting Position
3 WARNING
Sitting improperly or out of position can result in serious injury or death in a crash.
Always sit upright, well back in the seat, with your feet on the floor.

In addition, an occupant who is out of position in the front seat can be seriously or fatally injured in a crash by striking interior parts of the vehicle or being struck by an inflating front airbag.

Controls

203

uuSeatsuHead Restraints

Head Restraints
Your vehicle is equipped with head restraints in all seating positions.

Adjusting the Front Head Restraints

Position head in the center of the head restraint.

Head restraints are most effective for protection against whiplash and other rearimpact crash injuries when the center of the back of the occupant's head rests against the center of the restraint. The tops of the occupant's ears should be level with the center height of the restraint.

To raise the head restraint: Pull it upward. To lower the head restraint: Push it down while pressing the release button.

1Adjusting the Front Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Improperly positioning head restraints reduces their effectiveness and increases the likelihood of serious injury in a crash.
Make sure head restraints are in place and positioned properly before driving.
In order for the head restraint system to work properly:
· Do not hang any items on the head restraints, or
from the restraint legs.
· Do not place any objects between an occupant and
the seat-back.
· Install each restraint in its proper location.

Controls

204

uuSeatsuHead Restraints

Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
Head restraints can be removed for cleaning or repair.
To remove a head restraint: Pull the restraint up as far as it will go. Then, push the release button and pull the restraint up and out.
To reinstall a head restraint: Insert the legs back in place, then adjust the head restraint to an appropriate height while pressing the release button. Pull up on the restraint to make sure it is locked in position.

1Removing and Reinstalling the Front Head Restraints
3 WARNING
Failure to reinstall, or correctly reinstall, the head restraints can result in severe injury during a crash.
Always replace the head restraints before driving.

Controls

205

Controls

uu Seats u Armrest
Armrest
Using the Front Seat Armrest
The console lid can be used as an armrest.
Using the Rear Seat Armrest*
Pull down the armrest in the center backrest.
206 * Not available on all models

Controls

Interior Convenience Items

Interior Lights

Interior Light Switches

Front*

Door Activated Position

Rear

OFF ON
Door Activated Position

ON The interior lights come on regardless of whether the doors are open or closed. Door activated The interior lights come on in the following situations: · When any doors are opened. · You unlock the driver's door. · When the power mode is set to VEHICLE
OFF. OFF The interior lights remain off regardless of whether the doors are open or closed.

OFF ON

1Interior Light Switches
In the door activated position, the interior lights fade out and go off about 30 seconds after the doors are closed. The lights go off after about 30 seconds in the following situations:
· When you unlock the driver's door but do not open
it.
· When you set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF but
do not open a door.
You can change the interior lights dimming time. 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
The interior lights go off immediately in the following situations:
· When you lock the driver's door. · When you close the driver's door in ACCESSORY
mode.
· When you set the power mode to ON.
To avoid draining the battery, do not leave the interior light on for an extended length of time when the engine is off.
If you leave any of the doors open in VEHICLE OFF mode, the interior lights go off after about 15 minutes.

* Not available on all models

Continued

207

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuInterior Lights

Map Light Switches

The map lights can be turned on and off by pressing the switches.

1Map Light Switches
Models with moonroof
When the front interior light switch is in the door activated position and any door is open, the map light will not go off when you press the switches.

Controls

208

Storage Items
Glove Box

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Pull the handle to open the glove box.

1Glove Box
3 WARNING
An open glove box can cause serious injury to your passenger in a crash, even if the passenger is wearing the seat belt.
Always keep the glove box closed while driving.

Controls

Continued

209

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Console Compartment

Pull the handle to open the console compartment.

Removable tray The tray in the console compartment is detachable. To remove the tray, simply pull it up.

Controls

210

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Beverage Holders

Front seat beverage holders Are located in the console between the front seats.

1Beverage Holders
NOTICE Spilled liquids damage the upholstery, carpeting, and electrical components in the interior.
Be careful when you are using the beverage holders. Hot liquid can scald you.

Rear seat beverage holders* Fold the armrest down to use the rear seat beverage holders.

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

211

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

Front seat

Door beverage holders Are located on the both of front and rear door side pockets.

Rear seat

Controls

212

Coat Hook

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuStorage Items

There is a coat hook on the rear left grab handle.

1Coat Hook
The coat hook is not designed for large or heavy items.

Sunglasses Holder*
Push

To open the sunglasses holder, push and release the indent. To close, push it again until it latches.

1Sunglasses Holder*
Keep the holder closed while driving except when accessing stored items.

You can store eyeglasses and other small items in this holder.

Controls

* Not available on all models

213

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Other Interior Convenience Items
Accessory Power Socket
The accessory power socket can be used when the power mode is in ACCESSORY or ON.
Console panel Open the cover to use it.

1Accessory Power Socket
NOTICE Do not insert an automotive type cigarette lighter element. This can overheat the power socket.
The accessory power socket is designed to supply power for 12-volt DC accessories that are rated 180 watts (15 amps) or less.

To prevent battery drain, use the power socket only when the engine is running.

When the accessory power socket is not in use, close the cover to prevent any small foreign objects from getting into the accessory power socket.

Controls

214

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Wireless Charger*

To use the wireless charger, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Charge any devices compatible with Qi wireless charging on the area indicated by

the mark as follows:

Amber Indicator Green Indicator

1. To turn the system on and off, press and hold the (power) button. u When the system is activated, the green

indicator light comes on.

2. Place the device you want to charge on the

charging area. u The system will automatically start

charging the device, and the amber

indicator light will come on. u Make sure that the device is compatible

Charging Area (Power) Button

with the system and placed with the chargeable side in the center of the charging area.

3. When charging is completed, the green

indicator light will come on. u Depending on the device, the amber

indicator light will stay on.

1Wireless Charger*
RF Radiation Exposure Statement: This equipment complies with FCC RF Radiation exposure limits set forth for an uncontrolled environment. This device and its antenna must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter.
In order to use safely:
· Remove any metal objects from the charge pad
before charging a device.
· Do not open the charger case. · Do not use the charger if it malfunctions. Contact
your dealer.
If the charger interferes with radio communications, attempt to correct the interference:
· Press and hold the switch on the charger for a few
seconds to turn off the charger.

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

215

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

When charging does not start Perform one of the solutions in the following table.

Indicator

Cause

There is an obstacle(s) between the charging area and the device.

Green &
Amber

Blinking simultaneously

The device is not within the charging area.

The temperature of the wireless charger pad increases.

Amber Blinking The wireless charger is faulty.

Solution
Remove the obstacle(s).
Pick up and reset the device to the center of the charging area where is located.
Temporarily suspend charging the device. Wait for the temperature to drop and attempt to charge the device again.
Contact a dealer for repairs.

1Wireless Charger*
3 CAUTION
Metal objects between the charge pad and the device to be charged will get hot and can burn you. · Always remove foreign objects from
the charge pad before charging the device. · Be sure the surface is clear of dust and other debris before charging. · Do not spill liquids (i. e. water, drinks, etc.) on the charger and the device. · Do not use oil, grease, alcohol, benzine or thinner for cleaning the charge pad. · Do not cover the system with towels, clothing, or other objects while charging etc. · Avoid spraying aerosols which may come in contact with the charge pad surface.

216 * Not available on all models

This system consumes a lot of power. Do not use the system for a long time when the engine is not running. This may weaken the battery, making it difficult to start the engine.
When using the wireless charger, check the user's manual that came with the compatible device you want to charge.

* Not available on all models

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Controls

1Wireless Charger* The wireless charger can support up to 15 W, but the charging rate varies based on the device and other conditions.
NOTICE Do not place any magnetic recording media or precision machines within the charging area while charging. The data on your cards such as credit cards can be lost because of the magnetic effect. Also, precision machines such as watches can be affected.
"Qi" and marks are the registered trademarks owned by Wireless Power Consortium (WPC).
In the following cases, charging may stop or not start:
· The device is already fully charged. · The temperature of the device is extremely high
while charging.
· You are at a place that emits strong
electromagnetic waves or noises, such as a TV station, electric power plant, or gas station.
· The device has a cover, case or accessories which
are not compatible with wireless charging.
A device may not charge if the size or shape of its chargeable side is not appropriate for use with the charging area.
Not all devices are compatible with the system.

Continued

217

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

1Wireless Charger* During the charging phase, it is normal for the charging area and device to heat up.
Charging may be briefly interrupted when:
· All the doors and the trunk are closed
- to avoid interference with the proper functioning of the keyless access system.
· The position of the device is altered.
Do not charge more than one device at a time on a charging area.
If the device becomes too hot and its battery protection function activates, it may charge extremely slowly or no longer charge. The temperature at which the battery protection function activates depends on the device.

Controls

218 * Not available on all models

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Canadian models
Heated Steering Wheel*
The power mode must be in ON to use the heated steering wheel.
Press the button on the lower side of the steering wheel.

1Heated Steering Wheel*
Do not use the heated steering wheel continuously when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

When a comfortable temperature is reached, press the button again to turn it off.

The heated steering wheel is turned off every time you start the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

Controls

* Not available on all models

Continued

219

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Front Seat Heaters*

The seat heaters can be used when the power mode is in ON.

1Front Seat Heaters*
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.

Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)
When the power mode is turned on after it is turned off, the previous setting is maintained.

Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.
After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the front seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the front seat heaters shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

Controls

220 * Not available on all models

uuInterior Convenience ItemsuOther Interior Convenience Items

Rear Seat Heaters*

The power mode must be in ON to use the seat heaters.
There is no heater in the rear center seating position.
Press the seat heater button: Once - The HI setting (three indicators on) Twice - The MID setting (two indicators on) Three times - The LO setting (one indicator on) Four times - The OFF setting (no indicators on)

1Rear Seat Heaters*
3 WARNING
Heat induced burns are possible when using seat heaters.
Persons with a diminished ability to sense temperature (e.g., persons with diabetes, lower-limb nerve damage, or paralysis) or with sensitive skin should not use seat heaters.
Do not use the seat heaters even in LO when the engine is off. Under such conditions, the battery may be weakened, making the engine difficult to start.

After a certain period of time, the strength setting for the rear seat heaters will automatically be reduced by one level at a time until the rear seat heaters shuts off. The elapsed time varies according to the interior environment.

Controls

* Not available on all models

221

Controls

Climate Control System

Using Automatic Climate Control
The automatic climate control system maintains the interior temperature you select. The system also selects the proper mix of heated or cooled air that raises or lowers the interior temperature to your preference as quickly as possible.
Models with SYNC button

1Using Automatic Climate Control If any buttons are pressed while using the climate control system in auto, the function of the button that was pressed will take priority.
The auto button indicator*/AUTO indicator* will go off, but functions unrelated to the button that were pressed will be controlled automatically.

Dashboard vents
Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents Fan Control Dial

Floor and defroster vents
Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial

During idle-stops, air-conditioning is suspended, and only the blower remains active. If you do not want air-conditioning suspended, press the Auto Idle Stop OFF button to cancel idle-stop.
To prevent cold air from blowing in from outside, the fan may not start immediately when the AUTO button is pressed.

AUTO Button (Recirculation) Button

SYNC Button A/C (Air Conditioning) Button (ON/OFF) Button

Use the system when the engine is running. 1. Press the AUTO button. 2. Adjust the interior temperature using the driver's side or passenger's side
temperature control dial. 3. Press the (ON/OFF) button to cancel.

If the interior is very warm, you can cool it down more rapidly by partially opening the windows, turning the system on auto, and setting the temperature to low. Change the fresh air mode to recirculation mode until the temperature cools down.
When you set the temperature to the lower or upper limit, Lo or Hi is displayed.

222 * Not available on all models

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Models without SYNC button

Dashboard vents
Temperature Control Dial

Dashboard and floor vents

Floor vents

Fan Control Dial

Floor and defroster vents

1Using Automatic Climate Control Pressing the button switches the climate control system between on and off. When turned on, the system returns to your last selection.
While ECON mode is active, the climate control system may have reduced cooling performance.

Controls

AUTO Button (Recirculation) Button

A/C (Air Conditioning) Button (ON/OFF) Button

Use the system when the engine is running.

1. Press the AUTO button.

2. Adjust the interior temperature using the temperature control dial.

3. Press the

(ON/OFF) button to cancel.

Switching between the recirculation and fresh air modes

Press the

(recirculation) button and switch the mode depending on

environmental conditions.

Recirculation mode (indicator on): Recirculates air from the vehicle's interior through

the system.

Fresh air mode (indicator off): Maintains outside ventilation. Keep the system in

fresh air mode in normal situations.

Continued

223

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control

Defrosting the Windshield and Windows

Models with SYNC button

Pressing the (windshield defroster) button turns the air conditioning system on and automatically switches the system to fresh air mode.

Press the button again to turn off, the system returns to the previous settings.

1Defrosting the Windshield and Windows For your safety, make sure you have a clear view through all the windows before driving.
Do not set the temperature near the upper or lower limit. When cold air hits the windshield, the outside of the windshield may fog up.
If you press the button during Auto Idle Stop, the engine restarts automatically.

Models without SYNC button

Controls

224

To rapidly defrost the windows

Models with SYNC button

1. Press the

2. Press the

button. button.

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
1To rapidly defrost the windows After defrosting the windows, switch over to fresh air mode. If you keep the system in recirculation mode, the windows may fog up from humidity. This impedes visibility.

Models without SYNC button

Controls

Continued

225

uuClimate Control SystemuUsing Automatic Climate Control
Synchronization Mode*

1Synchronization Mode* When the system is in dual mode, the driver's side temperature and the passenger's side temperature can be set separately.
When you press the button, the system changes to synchronization mode.

Controls

Driver's Side Temperature Control Dial

SYNC Button

Passenger's Side Temperature Control Dial

You can set the temperature synchronously for the driver's side and the passenger's side in synchronization mode. 1. Press the SYNC button.
u The system switches to synchronization mode. 2. Adjust the temperature using the driver's side temperature control dial.

Press the SYNC button or adjust the interior temperature using the passenger's side temperature control dial to return to dual mode.

226 * Not available on all models

uuClimate Control SystemuAutomatic Climate Control Sensors

Automatic Climate Control Sensors

Sensor

The automatic climate control system is equipped with sensors. Do not cover or spill any liquid on them.

Controls

Sensor
227

228

Features
This chapter describes how to operate technology features.

Audio System About Your Audio System................ 230 USB Port(s) ....................................... 231 Audio System Theft Protection ......... 233 Audio Remote Controls.................... 234
Models with color audio system
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 237 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 238 Display Setup ................................... 239 Playing AM/FM Radio ....................... 240 Playing an iPod ................................ 242 Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 245 Playing Bluetooth® Audio................. 248 Siri Eyes Free .................................... 252
* Not available on all models

Smartphone Voice Recognition ........ 253 Apple CarPlay .................................. 254 Android Auto................................... 258
Models with Display Audio
Audio System Basic Operation ........ 262 Start Up ........................................... 263 Audio/Information Screen ................ 264 System Updates ............................... 275 Adjusting the Sound ........................ 280 Display Setup ................................... 281 Voice Control Operation .................. 283 Playing AM/FM Radio....................... 286 Playing SiriusXM® Radio ................... 290 Playing an iPod ................................ 301

Playing a USB Flash Drive ................. 304 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 307 HondaLink® ..................................... 310 Smart Shortcuts ............................... 314 Wi-Fi Connection............................. 317 Apple CarPlay .................................. 319 Android Auto .................................. 326 Audio Error Messages ...................... 332 General Information on the Audio System ............................................. 334 Customized Features................ 355, 363 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*... 386 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®..... 389, 409 Refuel Recommend .......................... 428

229

Audio System

About Your Audio System
The audio system features AM/FM radio and SiriusXM® Radio service*. It can also play USB flash drives, iPod, iPhone and Bluetooth® devices.
You can operate the audio system from the buttons and switches on the panel, the remote controls on the steering wheel, or the icons on the touchscreen interface.
USB Flash Drive
*1

1About Your Audio System
SiriusXM® Radio* is available on a subscription basis only. For more information on SiriusXM® Radio*, contact a dealer.
2 General Information on the Audio System P. 334
SiriusXM® Radio* is available in the United States and Canada, except Hawaii, Alaska, and Puerto Rico.

iPod

SiriusXM®* is a registered trademark of SiriusXM Radio, Inc.

iPod®, iPhone® and iTunes® are trademarks of Apple

Inc.

Remote Controls

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Features

230

*1 : Models with Display Audio *2 : Models with color audio system
* Not available on all models

USB Port(s)
On the front panel Models with color audio system
Models with Display Audio

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

On the front panel ( ) The USB port (2.5A) is for charging devices, playing audio files and connecting compatible phones with Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
u To prevent any potential issues, be sure to use an Apple MFi Certified Lightning Connector for Apple CarPlay, and for Android Auto, the USB cables should be certified by USB-IF to be compliant with USB 2.0 Standard.
On the front panel ( )* The USB port (2.5A) is only for charging devices.
u You cannot play music even if you have connected music players to it.

1USB Port(s)
· Do not leave the iPod or USB flash drive in the
vehicle. Direct sunlight and high temperatures may damage it.
· We recommend that you use a USB cable if you are
attaching a USB flash drive to the USB port.
· Do not connect the iPod or USB flash drive using a
hub.
· Do not use a device such as a card reader or hard
disk drive, as the device or your files may be damaged.
· We recommend backing up your data before using
the device in your vehicle.
· Displayed messages may vary depending on the
device model and software version.
USB charge
The USB port can supply up to 2.5A of power. It does not output 2.5A unless requested by the device. For amperage details, read the operating manual of the device that needs to be charged.

Under certain conditions, a device connected to the port may generate noise to the radio station you are listening to.

Features

* Not available on all models

Continued

231

uuAudio SystemuUSB Port(s)

On the back of the console compartment

On the back of the console compartment*
The USB ports (2.5A) are only for charging devices.
u You cannot play music even if you have connected music players to them.

Features

232 * Not available on all models

Audio System Theft Protection
The audio system is disabled when it is disconnected from the power source, such as when the battery is disconnected or goes dead. In certain conditions, the system may display a code entry screen. If this occurs, reactivate the audio system.
Reactivating the audio system 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Turn on the audio system. 3. Press and hold the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob for more than two
seconds. u The audio system is reactivated when the audio control unit establishes a
connection with the vehicle control unit. If the control unit fails to recognize the audio unit, you must go to a dealer and have the audio unit checked.

uuAudio SystemuAudio System Theft Protection

Features

233

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Audio Remote Controls

Models with color audio system

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on

the driver information interface.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

SOURCE Button Cycles through the audio modes as follows:

FMAMUSB/iPod/Apple CarPlay/

Android AutoBluetooth® Audio

1Audio Remote Controls Some modes appear only when an appropriate device or medium is used.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some functions may not be available.

VOL (+ /VOL ((Volume) Switch

SOURCE Button

VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch Press Up: To increase the volume. Press Down: To decrease the volume.

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons · When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station. · When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone Connection Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. · When listening to a USB flash drive or Bluetooth® Audio Press and hold : To skip to the next folder/group. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder/group.

Features

234

Models with Display Audio

Allow you to operate the audio system while driving. The information is shown on

the driver information interface.

(Seek/Skip) Buttons

VOL(+/VOL(- (Volume) Switch Press Up: To increase the volume.

Press Down: To decrease the volume.

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls

Features

VOL (+ /VOL ((Volume) Switch

Left Selector Wheel

/ (Seek/Skip) Buttons · When listening to the radio
Press : To select the next preset radio station. Press : To select the previous preset radio station. Press and hold : To select the next strong station. Press and hold : To select the previous strong station. · When listening to an iPod, USB flash drive, Bluetooth® Audio, or Smartphone Connection Press : To skip to the next song. Press : To go back to the beginning of the current or previous song. · When listening to a USB flash drive Press and hold : To skip to the next folder. Press and hold : To go back to the previous folder.

Continued

235

Features

uuAudio SystemuAudio Remote Controls
Left Selector Wheel Roll up or down:
To cycle through the audio modes, roll up or down and then press the left selector wheel:
FM AM SiriusXM® USB Bluetooth® Audio Smartphone Connection (Apple CarPlay/Android Auto)
236

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with color audio system

To use the audio system, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

Selector Knob

Use the selector knob or MENU button to access some audio functions.

Press to switch between the normal and extended display for some functions.

(Back) Button

MENU Button

Menu Display

Selector knob: Rotate left or right to scroll
through the available choices. Press to set your selection. MENU button: Press to display the menu screen.
(Back) button: Press to go back to the previous display.

1Audio System Basic Operation
These indications are used to show how to operate the selector knob. Rotate to select. Press to enter.
Menu Items 2 Adjust Clock P. 154 2 Adjusting the Sound P. 238 2 Display Setup P. 239 2 Customized Features P. 355
Press the buttons on the steering wheel to change any audio setting.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 234
Touchscreen operation
· Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
· Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
· You can select them when the vehicle is stopped. · Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.

You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 355

Features

237

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Select an audio source. 2. Press the MENU button. 3. Select Sound Settings.
Select an item from the following choices: · Bass / Treble: Bass, Midrange, Treble · Balance / Fader: Balance, Fader · Speed Volume Compensation: Speed
Volume Compensation (SVC)

1Adjusting the Sound
The SVC adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.

Features

238

Display Setup
You can set the screen brightness separately for Day and Night modes.
Changing the Screen Brightness
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select Display Adjustment. 3. Select Day or Night. 4. Select the setting you want.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup
1Changing the Screen Brightness You can change the Contrast and Black Level settings in the same manner. You can adjust the settings by sliding or tapping on the bar.

Features

239

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Seek Buttons

Press

to search the

selected band up or down for a

station with a strong signal.

RADIO Button Press to select a band.

Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display beyond preset 5.

240

Selector Knob Turn to tune the radio frequency. Press, and then turn to select an item. After that, press again to make your selection.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS capable FM station.

To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station.

Update List Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Press while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh.

Radio text Displays the radio text information of the selected RDS station. 1. Select Text.

Scan Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. 1. Select Scan.

To turn off scan, select Stop or press the

button.

1Playing AM/FM Radio Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
You can store 12 AM stations and 12 FM stations into the preset memory.
Switching the Audio Mode Press the SOURCE button on the steering wheel.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 234
1Radio Data System (RDS) When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the station name is displayed under the frequency. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the station name disappears.

Features

241

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Album Art

Audio/Information Screen
USB Indicator Appears when an iPod is connected.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Features

Track Buttons

Press

to change

songs. Press and hold to move

rapidly within a song.

Play/Pause Icon Select to play/pause a song.
Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.

MEDIA Button Press to select iPod (if connected).

242

Selector Knob Turn to change songs. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.
MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Shuffle Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

How to Select a Song from the iPod Music List
1. Press to display the iPod music list.

Category Selection

2. Select a category.

Features

Item Selection

3. Select an item. u Select an item repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.

Continued

243

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Shuffle/Repeat Select shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list (playlists, artists, albums, songs, genres, or composers) in random order.

Repeat Icon Shuffle Icon

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

Features

244

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then press the MEDIA button.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Audio/Information Screen

USB Indicator Appears when a USB flash drive is connected.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Selector Knob Turn to change files. Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

Features

Track Buttons

Press

to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Play Icon Select to play a file.
Pause Icon Select to pause a file.

Repeat Icons Select to repeat the current file.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.
Random Icons Select to play all files in the current category in random order. MEDIA Button Press to select USB flash drive (if connected).
Continued 245

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
How to Select a File from a Folder
1. Press to display a folder list.

Folder Selection

2. Select a folder.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 334
Files in WMA format protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, and then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 332

Track Selection

3. Select a file.

Features

246

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Select random or repeat icon.
Repeat Icons Random Icons
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Random Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.
Repeat Repeat track: Repeats the current file. Repeat folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.

Features

247

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Features

Playing Bluetooth® Audio

Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Audio/Information Screen
Shuffle Icon Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob
Press to turn the audio system on and off.
Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Buttons

Press

change files.

Play/Pause Icon Select to play/pause a file.

Selector Knob
Turn to change files.
Press and turn to select an item, then press to set your selection.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.
MEDIA Button Press to select Bluetooth® Audio.

MENU Button Press to display the menu items.
(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

1Playing Bluetooth® Audio Not all Bluetooth-enabled phones with streaming audio capabilities are compatible with the system. For a list of compatible phones:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
In some states, it may be illegal to perform some data device functions while driving.
Only one phone can be used with HFL at a time. When there are more than two paired phones in the vehicle, the system automatically connects to the prioritized phone. You can assign priority to a phone in the Bluetooth Settings menu.
2 HFL Menus P. 392 To change the searched phone manually, select Go to Device List.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting Audio from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 394

248

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to HFL.
2. Press the MEDIA button until the Bluetooth® Audio Source is selected.

Play/Pause Icon MEDIA Button

If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.

To pause or resume a file Select the play/pause icon.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
The pause function may not be available on some phones.
If any audio device is connected to the USB port, you may need to press the MEDIA button repeatedly to select the Bluetooth® Audio system.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
Check the volume setting of your phone if the audio volume is too loud or soft.

Features

Continued

249

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Press to display the music search list.

1How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the categories may not be displayed.

Category Selection

2. Select a category.

Features

Item Selection
250

3. Select an item. u Select an item repeatedly until a desired item you want to listen is displayed.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat and shuffle modes when playing a song. Shuffle/Repeat Select shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle
Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle Albums: Plays all available albums in a selected list in random order. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.

Repeat Icon Shuffle Icon
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the functions may not be displayed.

Features

251

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSiri Eyes Free

Siri Eyes Free
You can talk to Siri using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your iPhone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394

Using Siri Eyes Free

Appears when Siri is activated in Siri Eyes Free

1Siri Eyes Free Siri is a trademark of Apple Inc.
Check Apple Inc. website for features available for Siri.
We recommend against using Siri other than in Siri Eyes Free mode while operating a vehicle.
1Using Siri Eyes Free Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

While in Siri Eyes Free: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.
(Talk) Button Press until the display changes as shown. Press and hold to deactivate Siri Eyes Free.

Features

252

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmartphone Voice Recognition

Smartphone Voice Recognition
You can use Smartphone Voice Recognition using the (Talk) button on the steering wheel when your Android phone is paired to the Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Using Smartphone Voice Recognition
Appears when Smartphone Voice Recognition is activated
While in Smartphone Voice Recognition: The display remains the same. No feedback or commands appear.
(Talk) Button Press to activate Smartphone Voice Recognition. Press and hold to deactivate Smartphone Voice Recognition.

1Using Smartphone Voice Recognition Depending on your Android phone, you may need to operate your phone.
Some commands work only on specific phone features or apps.

Features

253

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
Apple CarPlay Menu
Apple CarPlay menu screen

Go back to the audio screen

To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, press the PHONE button. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF or detach the USB cable from your iPhone.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 256

: Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen
: Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen

CONNECT Button Press to display Apple CarPlay screen

When your iPhone is connected to Apple CarPlay, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio or Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Apple CarPlay is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.
For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Features

254

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

1Apple CarPlay
Apple CarPlay Operating Requirements & Limitations Apple CarPlay requires a compatible iPhone with an active cellular connection and data plan. Your carrier's rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Apple CarPlay functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Apple CarPlay functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Apple CarPlay performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Apple CarPlay. Refer to the Apple homepage for information on compatible apps.
To adjust the ring tone volume, the guidance volume of the navigation or Siri, or the audio volume, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the sound you want to adjust is playing.

Features

Continued

255

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Setting Up Apple CarPlay
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/information screen.
Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely parked. When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your iPhone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay: Press the MENU button Select Smartphone SettingsApple CarPlay Select device
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple's Privacy Policy.

Features

256

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Press the talk button to activate Siri.
(Talk) button: Press to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
1Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri Below are examples of questions and commands for Siri.
· What movies are playing today? · Call dad at work. · What song is this? · How's the weather tomorrow? · Read my latest email. · Find a table for four tonight in Chicago.
For more information, please visit www.apple.com/ios/siri.
To adjust the guidance volume of Siri, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while Siri is
activated.

Features

257

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Android Auto
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 260

1Android Auto
We recommend that you update Android OS to the latest version when using Android Auto. Bluetooth A2DP cannot be used while your phone is connected to Android Auto.
To use Android Auto on a smartphone with Android 9.0 (Pie) or earlier, you need to download the Android Auto app from Google Play to your smartphone.

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.

When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 394

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

Features

258

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Android Auto Menu
Android Auto menu screen

1Android Auto
For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.

Go back to the audio screen

Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your carrier's rate plans will apply.

Go back to the Android Auto menu screen

CONNECT Button Press to display Android Auto screen

· Maps Display Google Maps and use the navigation function just as you would with your Android phone. When the vehicle is in motion, it is not possible to make keyboard entries. Stop the vehicle in a safe location to undertake a search or provide other inputs.
· Phone Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
· Exit ·
Operate Android Auto with your voice.

Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.
To adjust the ring tone volume, the guidance volume of the navigation or voice recognition, or the audio volume, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the sound you want to adjust is playing.

Continued

Features

259

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Features

· You can check Android notifications.
· (Android Auto Home) Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they're needed.

Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
To enable Android Auto after connecting an Android phone to the system, select Yes on the screen.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Settings menu.

1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you have completed the initial setup: Press the MENU button Select Smartphone Settings Android Auto Select device
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google's Privacy Policy.

260

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
(Talk) button: Press to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press again to deactivate voice recognition.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:
· Reply to text. · Call my wife. · Navigate to Honda. · Play my music. · Send a text message to my wife. · Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of the screen.
To adjust the guidance volume of voice recognition, turn the VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) knob while the guidance is playing.

Features

261

Audio System Basic Operation

Models with Display Audio

To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

(Back) Button (Home) Button

(Home) button: Press to go to the home screen.
2 Using the audio/information screen

P. 264

(Back) button: Press to go back to the

previous screen.

/ (Seek/Track) buttons: Press to

change songs.

(Seek/Track) Buttons

Features

262

uuAudio System Basic OperationuStart Up

Start Up
The Display Audio starts automatically when you set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. At start-up, the following screen about the data upload will be displayed.
Select OK. u If you want to change the settings for data upload, select Data Sharing, then select the ON/OFF settings on the Data Sharing Setting screen. u If you do not select OK, the system will automatically be switched the home screen after a certain period of time. u If there is no registered device, select OK and the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed. u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be displayed.
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
2. Select Honda CIVIC from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this Display Audio, select Search for Devices, and then select your phone when it appears on the list.

1Start Up
Data Sharing Setting ON: Available the data communication. OFF: Not available the data communication.

Features

263

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Audio/Information Screen
Displays the audio status and wallpaper. From this display, you can go to various setup options.

Switching the Display
Using the audio/information screen
Button

Home Screen

All Apps

1Using the audio/information screen
Touchscreen operation
· Use simple gestures - including touching, swiping
and scrolling - to operate certain audio functions.
· Some items may be grayed out during driving to
reduce the potential for distraction.
· You can select them when the vehicle is stopped or
use voice commands.
· Wearing gloves may limit or prevent touchscreen
response.
You can change the touchscreen sensitivity setting. 2 Customized Features P. 363

Features

Press the button to go to the home screen. Select the following icons on the home screen or after selecting All Apps.
Phone Displays the HFL information.
2 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® P. 409
FM/AM/SiriusXM/USB/Bluetooth Audio Displays information for each audio format.
264

General Settings Enters the customizing menu screen.
2 Customized Features P. 363
Navigation Displays the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
HondaLink® Displays the HondaLink screen.
2 HondaLink® P. 310
Apple CarPlay/Android Auto Displays the Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.
2 Apple CarPlay P. 319 2 Android Auto P. 326
Vehicle Settings Displays the vehicle settings screen.
2 Customized Features P. 363

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Features

Continued

265

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Trip Computer Displays the trip computer information. · Current Drive tab: Displays the current trip information. · Trip A/Trip B tab: Displays information for the current and three previous drives. The information is stored every time you reset Trip A/B. To reset the Trip A/B, select Settings, then select Delete Trip History. To change the setting of how to reset Trip A/B, select Settings, then select "Trip A" Reset Timing or "Trip B" Reset Timing. System Updates Updates the software version of the audio system.
2 System Updates P. 275
Clock Displays the clock. Smart Shortcuts Displays the Smart Shortcuts screen.
2 Smart Shortcuts P. 314
Display Mode Displays the brightness bar.
266

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Wallpaper Setup
You can change, store, and delete the wallpaper on the audio/information screen.
Import wallpaper You can import up to 11 images, one at a time, for wallpaper from a USB flash drive.
1. Connect the USB flash drive to the USB port.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
2. Press the button. 3. Select Clock. 4. Select Settings. 5. Select Clock Faces. 6. Select Add More.
u The image of the pictures stored in the USB flash drive are displayed on the list.
7. Select a desired picture to import. u Multiple pictures can be selected at the same time.
8. Select OK. u The selected pictures are displayed.
9. Select Transfer. u It will return to the clock wallpaper setting screen.

1Wallpaper Setup
The wallpaper you set up on Clock Faces cannot be displayed on the driver information interface.
· When importing wallpaper files, the image must be
in the USB flash drive's root directory. Images in a folder cannot be imported.
· The file name must be less than 64 bytes. · The file format of the image that can be imported
is BMP (bmp) or JPEG (jpg).
· The individual file size limit is 10 MB. · The maximum image size is 4,096 × 2,304 pixels. If
the image size is less than 1,280 × 720 pixels, the image is displayed in the middle of the screen with the extra area appearing in black.
· If the USB flash drive does not have any pictures,
the No files detected message appears.

Features

Continued

267

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen
Select wallpaper 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select a desired picture to set.
u The preview is displayed on the screen. 6. Select Save.
u The clock screen which the wallpaper has been set is displayed.
To view wallpaper once it is set 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock.
Delete wallpaper 1. Press the button. 2. Select Clock. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Clock Faces. 5. Select Delete Photos. 6. Select a desired picture to delete.
u Multiple pictures can be selected at the same time. 7. Select OK.
u The selected pictures are displayed. 8. Select Delete.
u It will return to the clock wallpaper setting screen.
268

1Wallpaper Setup You cannot delete the initial imported wallpapers.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Home Screen
To move to the next screen

Swipe

1Home Screen The home screen has 3 pages. You can add up to 6 pages.
Press the button to go directly back to the first page of the home screen from any page.

> Icon

< Icon

Current page position

Selecting < or > , or swiping the screen left or right changes to the next screen.

Features

Continued

269

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To add app icons on the home screen App icons can be added on the home screen.
1. Press the button. 2. Select All Apps. 3. Select the box checked on the desired apps.

1To add app icons on the home screen Pre-installed apps may not start up normally. If this occurs, you need to reset the system. 2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 385
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it may reset all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 385

In case those apps still do not startup normally even after Factory Data Reset, contact your dealer.

Features

270

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To move icons on the home screen You can change location on the home screen.
1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

1To move icons on the home screen Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

Select and hold.

Drag and drop.

3. Drag and drop the icon to where you want it to be.
4. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home screen.

Features

Continued

271

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To remove icons on the home screen You can delete the icons on the home screen.
1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.

1To remove icons on the home screen You cannot delete the All Apps icon.
Apps will not be deleted by deleting the icon on the home screen.
Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

Select and hold.
Drag and drop to the header area.

3. Drag and drop the icon you want to remove to the header area. u The icon is removed from the home screen.
4. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home screen.

Features

272

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

To shortcut icons on the home screen You can store up to six icons on the bottom of the home screen.
1. Press the button. 2. Select and hold an icon.
u The screen switches to the customization screen.
Select and hold.

1To shortcut icons on the home screen Select Tips to show tips. To hide them, select it again.

Shortcut Icons
Drag and drop to shortcut icon.

3. Drag and drop the icon you want to store to the bottom of the home screen. u The icon is shortcut.
4. Select Done. u The screen will return to the home screen.

Features

Continued

273

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAudio/Information Screen

Status Area

1. Select the system status icon. u The status area appears.
2. Select an item to see the details. 3. Press the button or select the system
status icon to close the area.

System Status Icon

Status Area

Features

274

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

System Updates
The audio system's firmware can be updated with a Wi-Fi connection, or with a USB device.

How to Update

When the audio system update is available, the notification is shown on the status

area. Use the following procedure to update the system.

Notification

1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.

u If System Updates is not displayed on

the home screen, select All Apps. u The system will check for updates. u If the update icon is appeared on the
home screen, select the status icon.
2 Status Area P. 274
3. Select Download. u A notification appears on the screen if need to user acceptance for download.
4. Select Install Now or Install While Vehicle Off. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

1How to Update You can update the system via Wi-Fi, but cannot use the captive portal that require login or agreement the terms of use on the browser.
Your download will be canceled if:
· Your Wi-Fi connection is severed. · You stop the engine when the battery is low on
power.
Your download will recommence the next time a WiFi connection is established.
For the battery protection, Install While Vehicle Off cannot be selected when the battery is low on power. If you want to install the updated data, recharge the battery or select Install Now.

Features

Continued

275

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates
System Updates Settings
The following settings can be set. · Auto Download · Version Status · Connection Setup · Automatic Update* · Update History

Features

Automatic download settings Use the following procedure to change to the automatic download setting. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Auto Download. 5. Select the access point, then select Allow.
u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Block.

View a version and update status Use the following procedure to confirm the version and update status. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Version Status.

All Apps.

276 * Not available on all models

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

Connection setup Use the following procedure to connect to the Internet via a Wi-Fi network. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup. 5. Select OK. 6. Select Change Mode. 7. Select Network.
u If the vehicle's Wi-Fi is turned off, select OFF.

Features

Automatic update settings* Use the following procedure to change to the automatic update setting. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps. 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Automatic Update. 5. Select Accept.
u If you do not want to system update automatically, select Decline.

View the update history Use the following procedure to confirm the update history. 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Update History.

All Apps.

* Not available on all models

Continued

277

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

How to Update Wirelessly
Wireless connection mode setup 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select 3. Select Settings. 4. Select Connection Setup. 5. Select OK. 6. Select Change Mode. 7. Select Network.
u It will return to the network list. 8. Select an access point from the network list.
u If the audio system requires a password, enter a password. 9. Select Connect.

All Apps.

How to update 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps. 3. Select via Wireless. 4. Select Download.
u A notification appears on the screen if need to user acceptance for download. 5. Select Install Now or Install While Vehicle Off.
u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

Features

278

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSystem Updates

Features

How to Update with a USB Device
Download the update files from the server 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates.
u If System Updates is not displayed on the home screen, select All Apps. 3. Select Other Methods. 4. Select Via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen. 5. Connect a USB device into the USB port.
u The inventory data is copied into the USB device.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
6. Remove the USB device from the USB port. 7. Connect the USB device into your computer, and then download the update files.
u Follow the link to download the required software update files. Refer to https://usb.honda.com for instructions.

1How to Update with a USB Device A USB device with a minimum of 8 GB of free space or more is recommended.
Be sure to delete any previous inventory or update files from the USB before starting the USB update process.

Update the audio system 1. Press the button. 2. Select System Updates. 3. Select Other Methods. 4. Select Via USB.
u A notification appears on the screen. 5. Connect the USB device with the update files into the USB port.
u A notification appears on the screen.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
6. Select Install Now. u A notification appears on the screen if the update is successful.

279

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAdjusting the Sound

Adjusting the Sound

1. Press the button. 2. Select an audio source icon. 3. Select Sound.
Select an item from the following choices: · Bass / Treble: Treble, Midrange, Bass · Audio Zones & Balance / Fader: Driver
Only, Front Only, Rear Only, Full Vehicle, Balance, Fader · Bose Centerpoint: Bose Centerpoint · Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation: Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation

1Adjusting the Sound
The Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation adjusts the volume level based on the vehicle speed. As you go faster, audio volume increases. As you slow down, audio volume decreases.
You can also adjust the sound by the following procedure. 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Sound.
Audio Zones & Balance / Fader You can change where the sound comes from by selecting one of the speaker options below:
· Full Vehicle: All the speakers emit sound. · Driver Only: Only the speaker by the driver's seat
emits sound.
· Front Only: Only the front speakers emit sound. · Rear Only: Only the rear speakers emit sound.
To reset each setting for Bass / Treble, Audio Zones & Balance / Fader, and Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation, select Default on each setting screen.

Features

280

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Display Setup

You can set the screen brightness.
Switching Display Mode Manually
Select Display Mode. u The brightness bar is displayed for a few seconds. u Select or to adjust the brightness. u Select Display OFF to turn off the screen. To turn on the screen, press the or button.

1Display Setup You can adjust the screen brightness by sliding or tapping on the brightness bar.
You can also change the screen brightness on the following procedures. 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Display. 4. Select the setting you want.
To reset the settings, select Default.

Features

Continued

281

uuAudio System Basic OperationuDisplay Setup

Selecting an Audio Source
Select Audio Source

Source Select Screen

Source List Icons
Select Audio Source on the header area, then select an icon on the source list to switch the audio source.
Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Features

282

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Voice Control Operation
Your vehicle has a voice control system that allows hands-free operation. The voice control system uses the (Talk) button on the steering wheel and a microphone near the map lights on the ceiling.

1Voice Control Operation
When you press the button, a helpful prompt asks what you would like to do. Press and release the button again to bypass this prompt and give a command.

Voice Recognition
To achieve optimum voice recognition when using the voice control system: · Make sure the correct screen is displayed for the voice command that you are
using. The system recognizes only certain commands. Available voice commands:
2 Voice Portal Screen P. 284
· Close the windows and moonroof. · Adjust the dashboard and side vents so air does not blow onto the microphone
on the ceiling. · Speak clearly in a natural speaking voice without pausing between words. · Reduce any background noise if possible. The system may misinterpret your
command if more than one person is speaking at the same time.

1Voice Recognition
The voice control system can only be used from the driver's seat because the microphone unit removes noises from the front passenger's side.

Features

Continued

283

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation

Features

Voice Portal Screen
When the (talk) button is pressed, available voice commands appear on the screen. For a complete list of commands, say "Help" after the beep.
Depending on the selected mode, the displayed commands are different on the voice portal screen. The commands recognized are the same regardless of which screen is selected. Normal Mode: A list of example commands is displayed to quickly complete your desired function. Assist Mode: A list of basic commands is displayed to guide you step by step through the voice menu.

You can change the mode on the General Settings screen.
2 Voice Control P. 374
The system only recognizes the commands on the following pages, at certain screens. Free form voice commands are not recognized.
General Commands
When the voice portal screen is displayed, it will change to the top screen of each function by using the global commands. · Music Search · AM · FM · Sirius XM · Navigation · Phone
Phone Commands
This can only be used when the phone is connected. When the system recognizes the Phone command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the phone.

Phone Commands · Call <name> · Call <number> The system recognizes an only contact name in the stored phonebook of your phone. If full name is registered in first name field, the system will recognize the first name and last name as one contact name.
Phone commands are not available if using Apple CarPlay.
Audio Commands
When the system recognizes the Audio command, the screen will change the dedicated screen for the voice recognition of the audio.
FM Commands · Tune to <FM frequency>
AM Commands · Tune to <AM frequency>
Sirius XM Commands · Tune to SXM <channel number> · Tune to SXM <station name>

284

iPod Commands · List Album <name> · List Artist <name> · List Genre <name> · List Playlist <name> · Play <artist> <album> · Play · Play Album <name> · Play Artist <name> · Play Genre <name> · Play Music <text:media_combo> · Play Playlist <name> · Play Song <name>
USB Commands · List Album <name> · List Artist <name> · List Playlist <name> · Play <artist> <album> · Play · Play Album <name> · Play Artist <name> · Play Music <text:media_combo> · Play Playlist <name> · Play Song <name>

uuAudio System Basic OperationuVoice Control Operation
Navigation Commands
The screen changes to the navigation screen.
2 Refer to the Navigation System Manual
Standard Commands
· Voice Help · Cancel · Back Voice Help are readout voice guidance for Help on current screen.
List Commands
· Previous · Next · Yes · No

Features

285

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
Playing AM/FM Radio

Features

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.
VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek Buttons

Press

to search the selected band up

or down for a station with a strong signal.

286

Audio/Information Screen
Settings Icon Select whether to tune to HD RadioTM automatically.
Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display beyond preset 5.
Scan Icon Select to scan each station with a strong signal.
Tune Icon Select to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the radio frequency directly.

Preset Memory
To store a station: 1. Tune to the selected station. 2. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station.
u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset station.
Station List
Lists the strongest stations on the selected band. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select the station.
Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list. 2. Select Refresh.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
1Preset Memory The ST indicator appears on the display indicating stereo FM broadcasts. Stereo reproduction in AM is not available.
Switching the Audio Mode Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 234
You can store 12 AM/FM stations into preset memory.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. For patents see http://dts.com/patents. HD Radio, Artist Experience, and the HD, HD Radio, and "ARC" logos are registered trademarks or trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.

Features

Continued

287

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio

Scan
Samples each of the strongest stations on the selected band for 10 seconds. To turn off scan, select Stop or press the button.

HD Subchannel
Displays the subchannel list when an HD RadioTM station is selected while listening to an FM station. 1. Select HD Radio Channels. 2. Select the channel number.

Radio Data System (RDS)
Provides text data information related to your selected RDS-capable FM station.
To find an RDS station from Station List 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select the station.

1Radio Data System (RDS)
When you select an RDS-capable FM station, the RDS automatically turns on, and the frequency display changes to the station name. However, when the signals of that station become weak, the display changes from the station name to the frequency.

Manual update Updates your available station list at any time. 1. Select Station List to display a list while listening to an FM station. 2. Select Refresh.

Features

288

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying AM/FM Radio
AM/FM Settings
Change the AM/FM settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option. · HD Radio: Automatically choose a digital or an analog channel, or listen to
analog only. · Artwork: Turns the artwork display on and off.
289

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Playing SiriusXM® Radio

Album Art

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Seek Buttons

Press

to search the selected band

up or down for a station with a strong signal.

Audio/Information Screen
Settings Icon Select settings to display and customize SiriusXM® settings.
Preset Icons Tune the radio frequency for preset memory. Select and hold the preset icon to store that station. Select > to display beyond preset 5.
Category Icons Select or to display and select a SiriusXM® Radio category.
Channel Icons Select or to the previous or next channel. Select and hold to rapidly skip 10 channels at a time.

Features

290

To Change the Tune Mode
1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Mode. 3. Select Channel or Category.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Features

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio In the channel mode, all available channels are selectable. In the category mode, you can select a channel within a category (Jazz, Rock, Classical, etc.).
There may be instances when SiriusXM® Radio does not broadcast all the data fields (artist name, title). This does not indicate a problem with your audio system.
SiriusXM® Radio stations load in ascending order, which can take about a minute. Once they have loaded you will be able to scroll up or down to make your selections.
Switching the Audio Mode Roll the left selector wheel or select Audio Source on the screen.
2 Audio Remote Controls P. 234
Tune Start: When you change to a preset channel, a song being played on that channel restarts from the beginning with this function. This can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Tune Start. 3. Select ON or OFF.
To change a category, select Category icons, or select More and then select Category List.

Continued

291

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Preset Memory
To store a channel: 1. Tune to the selected channel. 2. Select and hold the preset icon to store that channel.
u Selecting Press & Hold can be set a new preset channel.
Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) You can store up to 10 of your preferred music channels per preset.
1. Tune a station. 2. Select and hold the preset number you
want to add a music channel. 3. Select Add to TuneMix or Create
TuneMix. u A message appears if there are no
available presets.

1Playing SiriusXM® Radio You can store 12 SiriusXM® channels into the preset memory.
1Multi-channel preset (for music channels only) TuneMix: The multi-channel preset function can be turned on or off by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select TuneMix. 3. Select ON or OFF.
When you want to replace the channel, select Replace Preset. If you want to delete a channel, select Edit TuneMix, and then select the channel you want to delete.

Features

292

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Listening to Featured Channels
Suggested channel listing received from SiriusXM® can be displayed and selected. 1. Select More. 2. Select Category List. 3. Select Featured Favorites. 4. Select the featured favorite list title you want to listen to.
u The selected channel list of the title is displayed. 5. Select the channel.

1Listening to Featured Channels Up to 10 featured channels by SiriusXM® can be displayed.
To switch the sorting method, select Number or Name on the upper right of the screen.
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

Features

Continued

293

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Replay Function
The system can record up to the last 60 minutes of your currently tuned channel's broadcast, as well as the last 30 minutes of your preset channel's broadcast, starting from the moment you turn the vehicle on. If you tuned to a preset channel, the system records up to 60 minutes of a broadcast instead of up to 30 minutes. You can rewind and replay the last 30 or 60 minutes of a broadcast.

Move the position you want to replay by selecting

or .

To play or pause on playback mode, select the play/pause icon.

1Replay Function The system starts storing broadcast in memory when the power mode is turned ON. You can go back to the program from that point.
You can no longer replay any program once the power mode is turned off as it erases memory. You can check how long the program has been stored in memory from the audio/information screen.
After 30 or 60 minutes of recording the system will automatically start deleting the oldest data.

Returning to real-time broadcast Select and hold .

Audio/Information Screen (A)

(B)

Features

294

(C) (D)
(A): Shows how much time the replayed segment is behind the real-time broadcast (B): Replayed segment (C): Length stored in memory (D): Play/Pause icon
When you listen a multi-channel preset while at the playback mode, the replayed segment is not displayed.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Live Sports Alert
While listening to other channels, you can receive sports alerts such as scores from the games of your favorite teams.

1Live Sports Alert
The Pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert function.

To set up a favorite team

1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Favorite Teams. 4. Select + Add Favorite Team. 5. Select a team.

Features

To set up an alert message 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Sports Notifications Setup. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select Game Notifications or SportsFlash Game Play Notifications. 5. Select Notifications. 6. Select ON. 7. Select a favorite team.

Receiving a sports alert 1. A pop-up appears and notifies you of a sports alert. 2. Select Listen.
u You can use the same items as the playback mode pop-up screen.
2 Replay Function P. 294
To go back to the previous screen, select .

Continued

295

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
Traffic and Weather Information
You can receive traffic and weather information.
To set up a traffic & weather information 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Traffic & Weather Now Setup. 3. Select Selected City. 4. Select the region.
u When you do not want to receive the information, select No Market Selected.
Listening a traffic and weather information 1. Select the status icon. 2. Select the traffic and weather information.
u Play mode can also use the any items same as playback mode.
2 Replay Function P. 294
To go back to the previous screen, select .

1Traffic and Weather Information When traffic and weather information is received, a notification is displayed in the header area. 2 Status Area P. 274
Traffic & Weather Now are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

Features

296

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Channel Schedule
You can view a channel schedule or receive an alert when your favorite program is about to start.

1Channel Schedule
Select Keypad to use the on-screen keyboard for entering the channel number directly.

To view a channel schedule

1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule.

Features

To set up an alert message 1. Select More. 2. Select Channel Schedule. 3. Select a program. 4. Select Set Program Alert. 5. Select Just Once or Every Time.

1To set up an alert message The Pop-up appears and notifies you of an alert function.
Selecting Just Once disables the alert feature next time you turn the power mode to ON.
If you want to delete the alert, select Remove Alert.
To enable an alert message, change settings for the alert function.
2 To enable the alert function P. 298

Continued

297

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio

Manage Program Alert
You can change settings for the alert function.

To enable the alert function

1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Notifications. 4. Select ON or OFF.

To remove an alert

1. Select Settings. 2. Select Manage Program Alerts. 3. Select Alerts Set. 4. Select on the alert you want to delete.

Features

298

Scan
Sample each channel on the selected mode for 10 seconds. 1. Select More. 2. Select Scan.
You can change a scan mode by the following procedure. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select Scan Mode. 3. Select Channel or Preset.
To turn off scan, select Stop.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
1Scan The "Scan Songs in Presets" function is based on TuneScanTM technology of SiriusXM®. The "Featured Channels" function is based on Featured FavoritesTM technology of SiriusXM®. TuneScanTM and Featured FavoritesTM are registered trademarks of SiriusXM® Radio, Inc.

Features

Continued

299

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying SiriusXM® Radio
SiriusXM® Settings
Change the SiriusXM® settings. 1. Select Settings. 2. Select an option.
· TuneMix: Turns multiple channel mix preset on and off. · Tune Mode: Choose whether to group by category or channel number when
changing channels.
2 To Change the Tune Mode P. 291
· Scan Mode: Select the scan mode from all channels or presets.
2 Scan P. 299
· Tune Start: Start the currently playing song at the beginning when you switch to a music channel preset.
2 Tune Start: P. 291
· Sports Notifications Setup: Set to receive sports alerts such as scores from your favorite teams.
2 Live Sports Alert P. 295
· Traffic & Weather Now Setup: Set to receive traffic and weather information.
2 Traffic and Weather Information P. 296
· Manage Program Alerts: Change settings for the alert function.
2 Manage Program Alert P. 298
300

Playing an iPod
Connect the iPod using your USB connector to the USB port, then select the iPod mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

Cover Art

Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Buttons

Press

to change songs.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

Shuffle Icon
Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.
Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select

to change songs.

Select and hold to move rapidly within a song.

Features

Continued 301

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

How to Select a Song from the Music Search List
1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find
the song of your choice.

1Playing an iPod Available operating functions vary on models or versions. Some functions may not be available on the vehicle's audio system.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 332
If you operate the music app on your iPhone/iPod while the phone is connected to the audio system, you may no longer be able to operate the same app on the audio/information screen. Reconnect the device if necessary.
If an iPhone or a smartphone is connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, the iPod/USB source will be unavailable and audio files on the phone will be playable only within Apple CarPlay or Android Auto.

Features

302

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying an iPod

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Shuffle/Repeat Select shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

Repeat Icon Shuffle Icon

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.

To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

Features

303

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive
Playing a USB Flash Drive
Your audio system reads and plays sound files on a USB flash drive in either MP3, WMA, AAC*1, FLAC, or WAV format. Connect your USB flash drive to the USB port, then select the USB mode.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
Audio/Information Screen

(Back) Button Press to go back to the previous display.

Features

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.

Track Buttons

Press

to change files.

Press and hold to move rapidly within a track.

Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

Random Icon
Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current file.

Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select

to change files.

Select and hold to move rapidly within a track.

*1:Only AAC format files recorded with iTunes are playable on this unit. 304

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a File from the Music Search List
1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Artists,
Albums, etc.). 3. Continue making selections until you find
the song of your choice.

1Playing a USB Flash Drive Use the recommended USB flash drives. 2 General Information on the Audio System P. 334
WMA files protected by digital rights management (DRM) cannot be played. The audio system displays Unplayable File, then skips to the next file.
If there is a problem, you may see an error message on the audio/information screen.
2 iPod/USB Flash Drive P. 332

Features

Continued

305

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying a USB Flash Drive

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select repeat, and random modes when playing a file. Random/Repeat Select random or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.

1How to Select a Play Mode
Play Mode Menu Items Random
Random off: Random mode to off. Random All Tracks: Plays all files in random order. Random in Folder: Plays all files in the current folder in random order.

Repeat Icon Random Icon
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat track: Repeats the current file. Repeat folder: Repeats all files in the current
folder.

Features

306

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

Playing Bluetooth® Audio
Your audio system allows you to listen to music from your Bluetooth-compatible phone. This function is available when the phone is paired and connected to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414

(Back) Button
Press to go back to the previous display.

Audio/Information Screen
Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Shuffle Icon
Select to play all files in the current category in random order.

VOL/ AUDIO (Volume/Power) Knob Press to turn the audio system on and off. Turn to adjust the volume.
Browse Icon Select to display the menu items.

Repeat Icon Select to repeat the current track.
Play/Pause Icon

Track Icons

Select

to change tracks.

Select and hold to move rapidly

within a track.

Continued

If more than one phone is paired to the HFL system, there may be a delay before the system begins to play.
In some cases, the name of the artist, album, or track may not appear correctly.
Some functions may not be available on some devices.
If a phone is currently connected via Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, Bluetooth® Audio from that phone is unavailable. However, a second previously paired phone can stream Bluetooth® Audio by selecting from the Bluetooth® device list.
2 Phone Setup P. 414

Features

307

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files
1. Make sure that your phone is paired and connected to the system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
2. Select the Bluetooth® Audio mode.
If the phone is not recognized, another HFLcompatible phone, which is not compatible for Bluetooth® Audio, may already be connected.
To pause or resume a file Select the play/pause icon.

Searching for Music

1. Select Browse. 2. Select a search category (e.g., Albums). 3. Select an item.
u The selection begins playing.

1To Play Bluetooth® Audio Files To play the audio files, you may need to operate your phone. If so, follow the phone maker's operating instructions.
Switching to another mode pauses the music playing from your phone.
You can change the connected phone by selecting Change Device.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
1Searching for Music Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the lists may not be displayed.

Features

308

uuAudio System Basic OperationuPlaying Bluetooth® Audio

How to Select a Play Mode
You can select shuffle and repeat modes when playing a file. Shuffle/Repeat Select shuffle or repeat icon repeatedly until a desired mode.
Repeat Icon Shuffle Icon
To turn off a play mode Select the mode you want to turn off.

1How to Select a Play Mode Play Mode Menu Items Shuffle Shuffle off: Shuffle mode to off. Shuffle All Songs: Plays all available songs in a selected list in random order.
Repeat Repeat off: Repeat mode to off. Repeat Song: Repeats the current song. Repeat Group: Repeats the current group. Repeat all: Repeats the all songs.
Depending on the Bluetooth® device you connect, some or all of the functions may not be displayed.

Features

309

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

HondaLink®
HondaLink® connects you to the latest information from Honda. You can connect your phone wirelessly through Wi-Fi or Bluetooth®.
2 Wi-Fi Connection P. 317 2 Phone Setup P. 414
HondaLink® Menu

1HondaLink® The HondaLink® connect app is compatible with most iPhone and Android phones.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone's data subscription package.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, HondaLink® can only be connected through Wi-Fi.

Features

Connect Displays the connection status of the vehicle. Help & Support Displays tips for vehicle usage, and get support via road side or customer service center. Message Displays helpful and important information from Honda.
310

To Set Up to Connect HondaLink® Service
Use the following procedure to connect to HondaLink® service.
To enable the HondaLink® service 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Data Sharing Setting. 5. Select ON.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

To link with HondaLink®

You can see the connection guide screen after launching HondaLink® when there is no connection to a network. If you do not need this guide, select check-box and select OK.

Features

Continued

311

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®
Vehicle Information and Message from Honda Tips
You can check the messages that are received quickly in the shortcut operation. 1. A notification appears and notifies you of a new message on the header area.

Notification

2. A notification icon is continuously displayed in the header area until the new message is read.

Features

312

3. Select the system status icon to see the messages.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuHondaLink®

4. Select a new message to open.

Features

313

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts

Smart Shortcuts
By observing and learning driver behaviors, patterns, and preferences, the system anticipates driver actions and presents on-screen suggestions to help perform desired actions quicker and with fewer steps.
· The app will suggest actions based on what it learns you do often, and occasionally make recommendations based on your learned preferences.
· The system will take some time to learn. The more you interact with the system, the more suggestion you will see, and the more accurate they will become.
· Suggestions will automatically refresh periodically to provide updated content for each profile.
· You can also provide feedback on whether a suggestion is helpful by pressing and holding on it. This can help the app grow smarter over time.

1Smart Shortcuts
The app also supports different profiles for each user, with customized learning for each profile. The app will also learn to associate a profile to a user over time based on key fob and connected phone data.

Smart Shortcuts Screen

Shortcut Suggestion

Features

· To change the notifications behavior for Smart Shortcuts: 1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen. 2. Select Suggestion Settings. 3. Select an option. · All data used for Smart Shortcuts can be erased by a Factory Data Reset.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 385
314

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts

How to Use

1. Press the button. 2. Select Smart Shortcuts. 3. Select a shortcut to take the action
suggested.

1How to Use
You can change the profile by selecting top of the Smart Shortcuts screen.

on the

You can customize the following items by selecting
Options on the top of the Smart Shortcuts screen.
· Profiles: Create, change, and manage profiles. · View App Walkthrough: View the Smart
Shortcuts walkthrough.
· Suggestion Settings: Change where suggestions
can appear.

· Call Suggestions: When selected, a call to the contact or number suggested will be placed and shown. Based on your calling patterns, contacts will be suggested for you to call. u Connect your smartphone through Bluetooth® to get contact suggestions. u Call suggestions will not be displayed when you are connected to Apple Carplay.
· Navigation Suggestions: When selected, a route will be started to the suggested destination and the embedded navigation app will open. u When a long route is set in your navigation system, you can receive recommendations for gas stations and places to stop at along the way. u The places you frequently navigate to while using the embedded navigation system will be suggested as shortcuts. u Save your home location in the embedded navigation app to have a shortcut suggestion for it when you're away from home.

To create a profile: 1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen. 2. Select Profiles. 3. Select Manage Profiles. 4. Select + Add New Profile. 5. Enter name for your profile. 6. Select Done. uA new profile has been created and the Smart App
will automatically switch to that profile.
To change a profile: 1. Select Options on the Smart Shortcuts screen. 2. Select Profiles. 3. Select Change Current Profile. 4. Select a profile from the list. uThe change to the selected profile has been made.

Features

Continued

315

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuSmart Shortcuts
· Radio Suggestions: When selected, the corresponding radio app (FM, AM, or SiriusXM®) will open and it will start playing the station. u From radio apps you can receive: - FM, AM, SiriusXM®: Most frequently listened stations you may like to play next. - FM, SiriusXM®: Genre-based suggestions. u Considerations: - FM suggestions will appear only when they are within range, according to your vehicle's tuner signal. - SiriusXM® suggestions will be available as long as there is an active account in the vehicle.
316

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection

Wi-Fi Connection
You can connect the audio system to the Internet using Wi-Fi on the audio/ information screen. If your phone has wireless hotspot capabilities, the system can be tethered to the phone. Use the following steps to setup.

Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time)
1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Wi-Fi. 5. Select OK. 6. Select Change Mode. 7. Select Network.
u If the data sharing settings is to OFF, the message will be displayed on the screen. You need to change to ON.
2 Customized Features P. 363
u If you want to turn off the Wi-Fi mode, select OFF.
8. Select the access point you want to connect to the system. u To add a new network or select the saved networks, select Options. u If Options is selected, Add Network and Saved Networks can be registered.

1Wi-Fi mode (setting for the first time) You cannot go through the setting procedure while a vehicle is moving. Park in a safe place to set the audio system in Wi-Fi mode.
Some cell phone carriers charge for tethering and smartphone data use. Check your phone's data subscription package.
Check your phone manual to find out if the phone has Wi-Fi connectivity.
You can confirm whether Wi-Fi connection is on or off with the icon on the system status area. Transmission speed and others will not be displayed on this screen.

Features

Continued

317

uuAudio System Basic OperationuWi-Fi Connection
Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
Make sure your phone's Wi-Fi setting is in access point (tethering) mode.

1Wi-Fi mode (after the initial setting has been made)
iPhone users
You may need to go through an initial setup for WiFi connection again after you boot your phone.

Features

318

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Apple CarPlay
If you connect an Apple CarPlay-compatible iPhone to the system via the front USB port or wirelessly, you can use the audio/information screen, instead of the iPhone display, to make a phone call, listen to music, view maps (navigation), and access messages.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231

Apple CarPlay Menu
Home screen

Apple CarPlay menu screen

1Apple CarPlay Only iPhone 5 or newer versions with iOS 8.4 or later are compatible with Apple CarPlay.
We recommend using the latest OS.
Park in a safe place before connecting your iPhone to Apple CarPlay and when launching any compatible apps.
To directly access the Apple CarPlay phone function, select Phone on the home screen. While connected to Apple CarPlay, calls are only made through Apple CarPlay. If you want to make a call with HandsFreeLink, turn Apple CarPlay OFF.
2 Setting Up Apple CarPlay P. 321

Apple CarPlay icon

Go back to the home screen
: Go back to the Apple CarPlay Dashboard screen
: Go back to the Apple CarPlay menu screen

For details on countries and regions where Apple CarPlay is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Apple homepage.

Features

Continued

319

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Phone Access the contact list, make phone calls, or listen to voice mail.
Messages Check and reply to text messages, or have messages read to you.
Music Play music stored on your iPhone.
Maps Display Apple Maps and use the navigation function just as you would on your iPhone.
Only one navigation system (pre-installed navigation or Apple CarPlay) can give directions at a time. When you are using one system, directions to any prior destination set on the other system will be canceled, and the system you are currently using will direct you to your destination.

Features

320

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Setting Up Apple CarPlay
After you have connected your iPhone to the system via the front USB port or wirelessly, use the following procedure to set up Apple CarPlay. Use of Apple CarPlay will result in the transmission of certain user and vehicle information (such as vehicle location, speed, and status) to your iPhone to enhance the Apple CarPlay experience. You will need to consent to the sharing of this information on the audio/ information screen.
Connecting Apple CarPlay Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
1. Connect the iPhone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Apple CarPlay, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings menu.

1Setting Up Apple CarPlay
Only initialize Apple CarPlay when you are safely parked. When Apple CarPlay first detects your iPhone, you will need to set up your iPhone. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your iPhone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Apple CarPlay:
Press the buttonSelect General Settings Smartphone ConnectionApple CarPlay
Select device
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your iPhone by Apple CarPlay is governed by the Apple iOS terms and conditions and Apple's Privacy Policy.

Features

Continued

321

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Connect Apple CarPlay Wirelessly
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the home screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Smartphone Connection. 3. Select + Connect New Device. 4. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
5. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
6. Select Yes or No.
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Apple CarPlay device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Smartphone Connection. 4. Select Apple CarPlay. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
7. Select Yes. u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
8. Select Yes or No.
322

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay

Features

Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
7. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
8. Select Connect. 9. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
10. Select Yes or No.
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly with the steering wheel 1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel. 2. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
3. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
4. Select Connect. 5. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
6. Select Yes or No.

Continued

323

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuApple CarPlay
Connect Apple CarPlay wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. 2. Select OK.
u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed. u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be
displayed. 3. Pair the iPhone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
4. Check the box on Apple CarPlay. u If you select Apple CarPlay, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
5. Select Connect. 6. Select Yes.
u If your iPhone asks to accept for connecting Apple CarPlay, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
7. Select Yes or No.
324

Operating Apple CarPlay with Siri
Press and hold the talk button to activate Siri.
(Talk) button: Press and hold to activate Siri. Press again to deactivate Siri. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

Features

325

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Android Auto
When you connect an Android phone to the audio system via the USB port or wirelessly, Android Auto is automatically initiated. When connected via Android Auto, you can use the audio/information screen to access the Phone, Google Maps (Navigation), and Google Now functions. When you first use Android Auto, a tutorial will appear on the screen. We recommend that you complete this tutorial while safely parked before using Android Auto.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231 2 Auto Pairing Connection P. 327

Features

Android Auto Menu
Home screen

Android Auto menu screen

Park in a safe place before connecting your Android phone to Android Auto and when launching any compatible apps.
When your Android phone is connected to Android Auto, it is not possible to use the Bluetooth® Audio. However, other previously paired phones can stream audio via Bluetooth® while Android Auto is connected.
2 Phone Setup P. 414

Android Auto icon

Go back to the home screen
Go back to the Android Auto menu screen

Apple CarPlay and Android Auto cannot run at the same time.

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

· Phone Make and receive phone calls as well as listen to voicemail.
· Exit ·
Operate Android Auto with your voice. ·
You can check Android notifications. · (Android Auto Home)
Display useful information organized by Android Auto into simple cards that appear just when they're needed.
Auto Pairing Connection
When you connect an Android phone to the unit via the USB port or wirelessly, Android Auto is automatically initiated.

1Android Auto For details on countries and regions where Android Auto is available, as well as information pertaining to function, refer to the Android Auto homepage.
Screens may differ depending on the version of the Android Auto app you are using.
Android Auto Operating Requirements & Limitations Android Auto requires a compatible Android phone with an active mobile connection and data plan. Your carrier's rate plans will apply.
Changes in operating systems, hardware, software, and other technology integral to providing Android Auto functionality, as well as new or revised governmental regulations, may result in a decrease or cessation of Android Auto functionality and services. Honda cannot and does not provide any warranty or guarantee of future Android Auto performance or functionality.
It is possible to use 3rd party apps if they are compatible with Android Auto. Refer to the Android Auto homepage for information on compatible apps.

Features

Continued

327

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
1. Connect the Android phone to the USB port using the USB cable.
2 USB Port(s) P. 231
u The confirmation screen will be displayed. 2. Select Yes.
u If you do not want to connect Android Auto, select No.
You may change the consent settings under the Smartphone Connection settings menu.
Connect Android Auto Wirelessly
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the home screen 1. Press the button. 2. Select Smartphone Connection. 3. Select + Connect New Device. 4. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
5. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
6. Select Yes or No.

1Connecting Android Auto Using the USB Cable to the USB Port
Only initialize Android Auto when you are safely parked. When Android Auto first detects your phone, you will need to set up your phone so that auto pairing is possible. Refer to the instruction manual that came with your phone.
You can use the following procedure to disconnect or delete the devices connecting Android Auto after you have completed the initial setup: Select General Settings Smartphone Connection Android Auto Select device
Use of user and vehicle information The use and handling of user and vehicle information transmitted to/from your phone by Android Auto is governed by the Google's Privacy Policy.

Features

328

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Features

Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Android Auto device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Smartphone Connection. 4. Select Android Auto. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
7. Select Yes. u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
8. Select Yes or No.
Connect Android Auto wirelessly on the Bluetooth® device list 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select + Connect New Device. 6. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
7. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
8. Select Connect. 9. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
10. Select Yes or No.

Continued

329

Features

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto
Connect Android Auto wirelessly with the steering wheel 1. Press and hold the (talk) button on the steering wheel. 2. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
3. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
4. Select Connect. 5. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
6. Select Yes or No.
Connect Android Auto wirelessly at start-up (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Set the power mode to ACCESSORY or ON. 2. Select OK.
u If there is no registered device, the Bluetooth® pairing screen will be displayed. u If you check the box with Do not show this again, this screen will not be
displayed. 3. Pair the Android phone to the vehicle's Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) system.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
4. Check the box on Android Auto. u If you select Android Auto, you cannot select Audio and Phone.
5. Select Connect. 6. Select Yes.
u If your Android phone asks to accept for connecting Android Auto, accept for connection. A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
7. Select Yes or No.
330

uuAudio System Basic OperationuAndroid Auto

Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Press and hold the (talk) button to operate Android Auto with your voice.
(Talk) button: Press and hold to operate Android Auto with your voice. Press and release to activate standard voice recognition system.

1Operating Android Auto with Voice Recognition
Below are examples of commands you can give with voice recognition:
· Reply to text. · Call my wife. · Navigate to Honda. · Play my music. · Send a text message to my wife. · Call flower shop.
For more information, please refer to the Android Auto homepage.
You can also activate the voice recognition function
by selecting the icon in the lower-right corner of the screen.

Features

331

Audio Error Messages

iPod/USB Flash Drive

If an error occurs while playing an iPod or USB flash drive, you may see the following error messages. If you cannot clear the error message, contact a dealer.

Error Message

Solution

Bad USB Device Please check owners manual*1

Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Connect Retry*1, *2

Appears when the system does not acknowledge the iPod. Reconnect the iPod.

Unplayable File*1, *2

Appears when the files in the USB flash drive are copyright protected or an unsupported format. This error message appears for about a few seconds, then plays the next file.

No Data*1, *2

iPod
Appears when the iPod is empty.
USB flash drive
Appears when the USB flash drive is empty or there are no MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV files in the USB flash drive.
iPod and USB flash drive
Check that compatible files are stored on the device.

Unsupported*1, *2

Appears when an unsupported device is connected. If it appears when a supported device is connected, reconnect the device.

*1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio

Features

332

uuAudio Error MessagesuiPod/USB Flash Drive

Error Message
Device No Response*1, *2
USB hub not supported*1, *2
A charging error has occurred with the connected USB device. When safe please check the compatibility of the device and USB cable and try again.*1, *2 *1:Models with color audio system *2:Models with Display Audio

Solution
Appears when the system does not communicate with a connected device. If it appears when a device is connected, contact your place of device purchase.
Appears when only a HUB is connected. If it appears, connect a USB flash drive to the HUB.
Appears when an incompatible device is connected. Disconnect the device. Then, turn the audio system off and turn it on again. Do not reconnect the device that caused the error.

Features

333

General Information on the Audio System

SiriusXM® Radio Service*
Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
1. You need your radio ID ready before registering for subscription. To see the ID on the screen, select Channel 0.
2. Have your radio ID ready, and either call or visit the SiriusXM® website to subscribe.

1Subscribing to SiriusXM® Radio
Contact Information for SiriusXM® Radio:
· U.S.: SiriusXM® Radio at www.siriusxm.com/
subscribenow, or 1-866-635-2349
· Canada: SiriusXM® Canada at www.siriusxm.ca/
subscribe-now, or 1-877-209-0079

Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
Switch to the SiriusXM® mode by using the audio remote controls on the steering wheel, or through the audio/information screen, and stay in this mode for about 30 minutes until the service is activated. Make sure your vehicle is in an open area with good reception.
SiriusXM® Radio Display Messages
Channel **** is not subscribed. Call SiriusXM to subscribe.*1 You are not subscribed to the channel selected. Subscription Updated: SiriusXM® radio is receiving information update from the network. Channel Not Available: No such channel exists, or the artist or title information is unavailable. No Signal: The signal is too weak in the current location. Check Tuner: There is a problem with the SiriusXM® tuner. Contact a dealer. Antenna Disconnected, Antenna Shorted: There is a problem with the SiriusXM® antenna. Contact a dealer.

1Receiving SiriusXM® Radio
The SiriusXM® satellites are in orbit over the equator; therefore, objects south of the vehicle may cause satellite reception interruptions. Satellite signals are more likely to be blocked by tall buildings and mountains the farther north you travel from the equator.
You may experience reception problems under the following circumstances:
· In a location with an obstruction to the south of
your vehicle.
· In tunnels · On the lower level of a multi-tiered road · Large items carried on the roof rack

Features

*1 : ****part is variable characters, and will change depending upon the channel selected.
334 * Not available on all models

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuCompatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

Features

Compatible iPod, iPhone, and USB Flash Drives

iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility
Models with color audio system
Model Made for iPod touch (6th to 7th generation) released between 2015 and 2019 Made for iPhone 5s/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/ iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/ iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max /iPhone SE (2nd generation)
Models with Display Audio
Model Made for iPod touch (5th to 6th generation) released between 2012 and 2015 Made for iPhone 4s/iPhone 5/iPhone 5s/iPhone 5c/iPhone 6/iPhone 6 Plus/iPhone 6S/ iPhone 6S Plus/iPhone SE/iPhone 7/iPhone 7 Plus/iPhone 8/iPhone 8 Plus/iPhone X/ iPhone XS/iPhone XS Max/iPhone XR/iPhone 11/iPhone 11 Pro/iPhone 11 Pro Max

1iPod and iPhone Model Compatibility This system may not work with all software versions of these devices.
The Lightning connector works with iPhone 5*1, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c*1, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation)*2, iPod touch (5th*1, 6th, 7th*2 generation).
The 30-pin connector works with iPhone 4s*1.
USB works with iPhone 4s*1, iPhone 5*1, iPhone 5s, iPhone 5c*1, iPhone 6, iPhone 6 Plus, iPhone 6S, iPhone 6S Plus, iPhone SE, iPhone 7, iPhone 7 Plus, iPhone 8, iPhone 8 Plus, iPhone X, iPhone XS, iPhone XS Max, iPhone XR, iPhone 11, iPhone 11 Pro, iPhone 11 Pro Max, iPhone SE (2nd generation)*2, iPod touch (5th*1, 6th, 7th*2 generation).

USB Flash Drives
· A USB flash drive of 256 MB or higher is recommended. · Some digital audio players may not be compatible. · Some USB flash drives (e.g., a device with security lockout) may not work. · Some software files may not allow for audio play or text data display. · Some versions of MP3, WMA, AAC, FLAC, or WAV formats may be unsupported.

1USB Flash Drives
Files on the USB flash drive are played in their stored order. This order may be different from the order displayed on your PC or device.

*1 : Models with Display Audio *2 : Models with color audio system

335

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Honda App License Agreement
END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT
PLEASE CAREFULLY READ THIS END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT (THIS "AGREEMENT") WHICH GOVERNS YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED ON YOUR HONDA OR ACURA VEHICLE (YOUR "VEHICLE") AS WELL AS THE APPLICATIONS, SERVICES, FUNCTIONS, AND CONTENT PROVIDED THROUGH THE SOFTWARE (COLLECTIVELY, THE "SERVICES"). YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES WILL SERVE AS YOUR CONSENT TO THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE IS OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY AMERICAN HONDA MOTOR CO. INC., ("HONDA," "US," "WE," OR "OUR"), WITH ITS BUSINESS ADDRESS AT 1919 TORRANCE BLVD., TORRANCE, CA 90501. REFERENCE TO "HONDA" IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES HONDA'S PARENT COMPANY AND ITS AFFILIATES AND DESIGNATED AGENTS. THE SERVICES ARE OWNED (OR LICENSED), PROVIDED, AND/OR OPERATED BY HONDA OR A THIRD-PARTY SERVICE PROVIDER (A "PROVIDER"). REFERENCE TO A "PROVIDER" IN THIS AGREEMENT INCLUDES SUCH PROVIDER'S PARENT COMPANY, AFFILIATES, AND DESIGNATED AGENTS.
A. Description of the Software. The SOFTWARE includes the software, firmware and the like, installed and executing on your VEHICLE during manufacture, and thereafter updated from time to time by HONDA, you or an authorized HONDA dealer (a "DEALER"). The SOFTWARE allows you to access and use a variety of SERVICES, including but not limited to: (a) HONDA applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, "HONDA SERVICES"); and (b) PROVIDER applications, services, and content provided through the SOFTWARE (together, "PROVIDER SERVICES"), each of which may provide access to various information, media, content, and services.
B. SOFTWARE Licensing and Intellectual Property. 1. SOFTWARE. This AGREEMENT grants you a non-exclusive, limited, and revocable license to use the SOFTWARE and SERVICES solely (a) as installed on your VEHICLE by HONDA, (b) as updated on your Vehicle by HONDA, you (but only as and when directed by HONDA), or a DEALER and (c) as permitted under the terms of this AGREEMENT.
2. HONDA Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various HONDA SERVICES. Installation, activation, or use of HONDA SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies applicable to those HONDA SERVICES (the "HONDA TERMS"). You acknowledge and agree that any collection, use, sharing of data generated by your VEHICLE or your use of your VEHICLE, and your use of the HONDA SERVICES shall be subject to this AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS that may be specifically applicable to such HONDA SERVICES or data generation. The HONDA SERVICES may collect, use, and share such data while you are using the SOFTWARE.
336

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
3. Open-Source Software. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may incorporate software licensed to HONDA under free or open-source licenses which govern HONDA's distribution and your use of such software. HONDA and the third-party authors, licensors, and distributors of such software disclaim all warranties and all liability arising from any and all use or distribution of the software. To the extent such software is provided under terms that differ from the applicable free or open-source licenses, those terms are offered by HONDA alone. Additional information regarding free and open-source software incorporated in the SOFTWARE and SERVICES is available in this manual or within the SOFTWARE.
4. Provider Services. The SOFTWARE may provide you with access to various PROVIDER SERVICES. Installation or use of such PROVIDER SERVICES may require your consent to additional terms, conditions, and privacy policies of the applicable PROVIDER (the "PROVIDER TERMS"). This AGREEMENT restricts the manner in which you can install and use PROVIDER SERVICES but does not grant you a license or permission to use such PROVIDER SERVICES. Your permission to use PROVIDER SERVICES is limited and subject to any license grants, conditions, and limitations included in the PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge that any collection, use, sharing of your information, targeted advertising practices by PROVIDERS, and your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES shall be subject to both this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS. The PROVIDER SERVICES may collect, use, and share such information while you are using the SOFTWARE.
5. License Limitations and Restrictions on Use. (a) Limited License. You understand and agree that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are licensed, not sold, to you solely for use in accordance with this AGREEMENT and any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and any documentation for the VEHICLE made available to you by HONDA (any "DOCUMENTATION"). HONDA and its licensors reserve all rights in the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES not expressly granted to you under this AGREEMENT. PROVIDERS and their licensors reserve all rights in the PROVIDER SERVICES not expressly granted to you under the applicable PROVIDER TERMS.
Continued 337

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
(b) Restrictions on Use. The licenses granted under this AGREEMENT do not permit you to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES on a device other than your VEHICLE. As a condition of using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, you agree that you may not and will not:
(1) copy, download, distribute, modify, publish, sell, rent, lease, lend, license, sublicense, reuse, or create derivative works of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or any of the content or other material within the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including without limitation, HONDA or PROVIDER names, logos, or any other trademarks of HONDA or PROVIDERS or used in association with the SOFTWARE or any SERVICES, except as required to use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in accordance with this AGREEMENT, any applicable PROVIDER TERMS, and the DOCUMENTATION; (2) access or use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any manner intended to damage or impair the operation of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES or interfere with anyone else's use and enjoyment of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES; (3) access or attempt to access any system or server on which the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is hosted or modify or alter the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in any way; (4) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES for any unlawful purpose, or in violation of any third party rights; (5) use the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in violation of any applicable traffic regulations, rules or laws, including but not limited to any driver distraction laws, rules or regulations; (6) violate the terms of this AGREEMENT, any HONDA TERMS, any PROVIDER TERMS or other applicable third-party terms, conditions, and privacy policies; or (7) reverse engineer, decompile, disassemble, attempt to derive the source code of, nor permit others to reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble, or attempt to derive the source code of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, except and only to the extent that such activity is expressly permitted (a) by applicable law notwithstanding this limitation or (b) the terms of applicable free or opensource software licenses.
6. Intellectual Property Rights. All title and intellectual property rights in and to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, the accompanying DOCUMENTATION, and all copies of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are owned by HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their suppliers or licensors. This AGREEMENT does not grant you any rights in connection with any trademarks or service marks of HONDA, PROVIDERS, or their licensors, affiliates, or suppliers.
338

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
7. Export Restrictions: You acknowledge that the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to U.S., European Union, and other export jurisdictions. You agree to comply with all applicable international and national laws that apply to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES, including the U.S. Export Administration Regulations, as well as end-user, end-use, and destination restrictions issued by the U.S. and other governments.
C. SOFTWARE Operation 1. HONDA reserves the right to suspend or terminate your access to and use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES if you are found to be in violation of this AGREEMENT or as reasonably deemed necessary by HONDA.
2. Eligibility/Registration/Activation. The SOFTWARE is intended for and available to individuals who (a) are of legal age of majority in their jurisdiction of residence (and at least 18 years of age), or are younger than 18 years of age and possess a valid driver's license issued by their jurisdiction of residence, and (b) own or have permissive access to a compatible VEHICLE. We do not knowingly collect any information, including personal information, from children under 13. If we learn or are notified that we have collected personal information of a child under 13, we will immediately take steps to delete such information.
3. Use of PROVIDER SERVICES through the SOFTWARE. Certain PROVIDER SERVICES made available through the SOFTWARE may require that you register or otherwise have an account with the PROVIDER and agree to PROVIDER TERMS. Any use of any of such PROVIDER SERVICES within the SOFTWARE is subject to this AGREEMENT and the applicable PROVIDER TERMS. HONDA does not exercise control over such PROVIDER SERVICES and is not responsible or liable for the availability, security, or content of such PROVIDER SERVICES, and the inclusion of any PROVIDER SERVICES does not imply a referral from, the approval of, or the endorsement by HONDA of such PROVIDER SERVICES. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for any damage relating to or resulting from your use of the PROVIDER SERVICES.
4. Links to Third Party Sites: The SOFTWARE may provide you with the ability to access third-party sites and content through the use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. The third-party sites and content are not under the control of HONDA. HONDA is not responsible or liable, directly or indirectly, for such third-party websites and their content or for any damage relating to or resulting from your access or use of such websites and content.
Continued 339

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
5. Unauthorized Use and Abuse. You are responsible for ensuring your (and any authorized third parties') use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES remains in compliance with this AGREEMENT and all other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS. You acknowledge and agree that any use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES occurring through your VEHICLE will be deemed your actions and that HONDA and PROVIDERS may rely upon such actions. You agree to immediately notify us if you suspect fraudulent or abusive activity involving the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. If you so notify us or if we otherwise suspect fraudulent or abusive activity, you agree to cooperate with us in any fraud investigation and to use any fraud prevention measures we prescribe. Your failure to immediately notify us or cooperate to use such measures will result in your liability for all fraudulent usage or abusive activity associated with your VEHICLE.
6. SOFTWARE Updates. The SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be updated when your VEHICLE is serviced by a DEALER or remotely, over-theair, by HONDA from time to time; such updates may occur with or without further notice or your future consent. The SOFTWARE may be updated at HONDA's discretion and for any purpose including, without limitation, to patch or otherwise improve the SOFTWARE or SERVICES functionality, security, or stability. All updates to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are subject to this AGREEMENT and any other applicable HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS.
7. Uninstalling, Removing, and Replacing the SOFTWARE. Replacing SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES with software or firmware not provided and installed by HONDA or a DEALER will render all representations and warranties for the SOFTWARE, HONDA SERVICES, and VEHICLE functionality reliant upon the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES null and void.
D. SOFTWARE Operational Notices and Warnings 1. Vehicle Geolocation Information. You acknowledge that your VEHICLE may be equipped with certain traffic and map features. The traffic feature will automatically collect and transmit, through GPS technology, your Vehicle's current location (longitude and latitude), travel direction and speed ("VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION") to HONDA and PROVIDERS. The VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION is used by HONDA and PROVIDERS to provide traffic and navigation-related information to you, but may also be used to provide other SERVICES or offers to you. HONDA will not use such VEHICLE GEOLOCATION INFORMATION for its own marketing efforts, or provide such information to unaffiliated third parties for their own purposes, without your express consent.
340

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
2. Potential Map Inaccuracy and Route Safety. Maps used by this system may be inaccurate because of changes in roads, traffic controls, routing, or driving conditions. Always use good judgment and common sense when following suggested routes. Do not follow the route suggestions if doing so would result in an unsafe or illegal driving maneuver, if you would be placed in an unsafe situation, or if you would be directed into an area that you consider unsafe. Do not rely on any navigation features included in the system to route you to emergency services. Not all emergency services such as police, fire stations, hospitals, or clinics are likely to be contained in the map database for such navigation features. Ask local authorities or an emergency services operator for such locations and routes. The driver is ultimately responsible for the safe operation of the vehicle and therefore, must evaluate whether it is safe to follow the suggested directions. Any navigation features are provided only as an aid. Make your driving decisions based on your observations of local conditions and existing traffic regulations. Navigation features are not a substitute for your personal judgment. Any route suggestions made by the SOFTWARE or SERVICES should never replace any local traffic regulations or your personal judgment or knowledge of safe driving practices.
3. Speech Recognition: You acknowledge and understand that HONDA and PROVIDERS may record, retain, and use voices commands when you use the speech recognition components of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. You and all VEHICLE operators and passengers (a) consent to the recording and retention of voice commands in support of providing speech recognition components and (b) release HONDA and PROVIDERS from all claims, liabilities, and losses that may result from any use of such recorded voice commands. Recognition errors are inherent in speech recognition. It is your responsibility to monitor any speech recognition functions included in the system and address any errors. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable for any damages arising out of errors in the speech recognition process.
4. Distraction Hazards. Navigation features may require manual (non-verbal) input or setup. Attempting to perform such set-up or insert data while driving can seriously distract your attention and could cause a crash or other serious consequences; the ability to undertake such interactions may also be limited by state or local law, which laws you are responsible to know and follow. Even occasional short scans of the screen may be hazardous if your attention has been diverted away from your driving at a critical time. Pull over and stop the vehicle in a safe and legal manner before attempting to access a function of the system requiring prolonged attention. Do not raise the volume excessively. Keep the volume at a level where you can still hear outside traffic and emergency signals while driving. Driving while unable to hear these sounds could result in a crash.
Continued 341

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
E. Information Collection and Storage 1. Information Collection, Use, Transmission and Storage of Data. Consent to Use of Data: You agree that HONDA and PROVIDERS may collect and use your information gathered in any manner as part of product support services related to the SOFTWARE or related services. HONDA may share such information with third parties, including, without limitation, PROVIDERS, third party software and services suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agents, solely to improve their products or to provide services or technologies to you. HONDA, third party software and systems suppliers, their affiliates and/or their designated agent may disclose this information to others, but not in a form that personally identifies you.
2. Information Storage. Depending on the type of multimedia system you have in your VEHICLE, certain information may be stored for ease of use of the SOFTWARE including, without limitation, search history, location history in certain applications, previous and saved destinations, map locations within certain applications, and device numbers and contact information.
(a) Vehicle Health Information. Your VEHICLE may remotely transmit information regarding the status and health of your VEHICLE ("VEHICLE INFORMATION") to HONDA without notification to you. VEHICLE INFORMATION may contain VEHICLE maintenance and malfunction status that is derived from VEHICLE diagnostic data and includes, but is not limited to, status of powered doors and windows, battery life data, battery charging data, VEHICLE speed, coolant temperature, air compressor revolution, output power, warning codes, diagnostic trouble codes, fuel injection volume, and engine rotations per minute. VEHICLE HEALTH INFORMATION may be used by HONDA for research and development, to deliver HONDA SERVICES and information to you, and to contact you, and is retained only for a period of time necessary to fulfill these goals.
(b) VEHICLE Geolocation Data (non-navigation/map based). If you opt-in to geolocation-based SERVICES, your vehicle's geolocation data (latitude and longitude) will be automatically sent from your VEHICLE to HONDA and PROVIDERS.
(c) You understand that the inputting or uploading of information to your VEHICLE's multimedia system or the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is at your own risk and that HONDA is not responsible for unauthorized access to or use of any personal or other information. All information uploaded to the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be stored on your VEHICLES's multimedia system and you understand that the security and safety of your VEHICLE's multimedia system is your sole responsibility.
342

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
F. NO WARRANTY. You understand and agree that your use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES are solely at your own risk and that you will be solely responsible for any damage to your VEHICLE's multimedia system or any other equipment or any loss of data that may result from your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. THE SOFTWARE AND SERVICES ARE PROVIDED ON AN "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE" BASIS WITHOUT ANY WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESSED, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY. WE SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIM ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, AND NON-INFRINGEMENT. HONDA makes no warranties that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will meet your requirements, or that the SOFTWARE or SERVICES will be uninterrupted, timely, secure, noninfringing or error free. You understand and agree that you are responsible for any and all charges, costs or expenses associated with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. Advice or information, whether oral or written, obtained by you from us or through the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are provided for informational purposes only and will not create any warranty not expressly made herein. You should not rely on any such information or advice. We assume no liability or responsibility for any errors or omissions in the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. We do not make any warranty or representation that your use of the material displayed on, or obtained through, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES is non-infringing of any rights of any third party. Any decision or action taken by you on the basis of information or content provided via the application is at your sole discretion and risk. HONDA and PROVIDERS are not responsible or liable for any such decision, or for the accuracy, completeness, usefulness, or availability of any content or information displayed, transmitted, or otherwise made available via the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. To the extent jurisdictions do not allow the exclusion of certain warranties, some of the above exclusions may not apply to you.
G. LIMITATIONS ON LIABILITY. You and HONDA are each waiving important rights. 1. Limitations on YOUR liability. HONDA cannot recover from you any consequential, indirect, incidental, or special damages, or attorney's fees in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or HONDA SERVICES. HONDA WAIVES TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT.
Continued 343

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
2. Limitation on HONDA and PROVIDER liability. Neither HONDA nor PROVIDERS will be liable to you or any other party for consequential, indirect, incidental, special, or punitive damages (including without limitation lost profits) in connection with your use of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if HONDA or PROVIDERS are aware of the possibility of such damages. These limitations apply to all claims, including, without limitation, claims in contract and tort (such as negligence, product liability and strict liability). To the extent that a jurisdiction does not permit the exclusion or limitation of liability as set forth herein our liability is limited to the maximum extent permitted by law in such states. If HONDA or PROVIDERS are found liable to you for any reason, you agree that the aggregate liability of all these parties to you for any claim is limited to ten U.S. dollars (US $10.00). Neither HONDA nor any PROVIDER would have agreed to provide the SOFTWARE or SERVICES to you if you did not agree to this limitation. This amount is the sole and exclusive liability of HONDA and PROVIDERS to you, and is payable as liquidated damages and not as a penalty. Except where prohibited by law, you may not bring any claim against HONDA or any third-party beneficiary more than two (2) years after the claim arises. We do not have any liability for SOFTWARE or SERVICES interruptions of any length.
(a) Release of HONDA and PROVIDERS For yourself and anyone else claiming under you, you agree to release and discharge HONDA, PROVIDERS, their respective officers, directors, and employees, and each third-party beneficiary from all claims, liabilities and losses in connection with the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, including, but not limited to claims for personal injury or property damage arising from the total or partial failure of performance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES, even if caused by or based upon the negligence, gross negligence, strict products liability, Deceptive Trade Practices Act violations, bad faith, or breach of warranty of us or the malfunction of the SOFTWARE or SOFTWARE SERVICES. YOU AGREE TO WAIVE TO THE FULLEST EXTENT ALLOWED BY LAW, ANY CLAIM FOR DAMAGES OTHER THAN DIRECT, COMPENSATORY DAMAGES AS LIMITED IN THIS AGREEMENT. YOU HEREBY RELEASE AND DISCHARGE HONDA AND ITS LICENSORS AND CONTRACTORS (INCLUDING ANY THIRD PARTIES PROVIDING ALL OR PART OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES) FROM AND AGAINST ANY CLAIMS, DAMAGES, EXPENSES AND LIABILITY ARISING FROM OR RELATED TO ANY INJURIES, DAMAGES, OR LOSSES TO ANY PERSON (INCLUDING DEATH) OR PROPERTY OF ANY KIND RESULTING IN WHOLE OR PART, DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY, FROM YOUR USE OF THE SOFTWARE OR SERVICES.
H. Survival. You agree that the limitations of liability and indemnities in this AGREEMENT will survive even after the AGREEMENT has ended. These limitations of liability apply not only to you, but to anyone using the SOFTWARE or SERVICES via your VEHICLE, to anyone making a claim on your behalf, and to any claims made by your family, employees, customers, or others arising out of or relating to your VEHICLE, the SOFTWARE, or SERVICES.
344

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
I. Availability/Interruption. The SOFTWARE and certain SERVICES are made available through your VEHICLE's compatible multimedia system when the VEHICLE is turned on. Certain SERVICES may be available only through your compatible mobile device when it is within the operating range of the VEHICLE and a wireless carrier. The availability of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES may be subject to transmission limitation or interruption, including but not limited to technical obsolesce or sunsetting of the hardware, software or firmware, inside of or external to the Vehicle, required for data transmission or receipt. HONDA does not guarantee that the SOFTWARE, SERVICES, or any portion thereof will be available at all times or in all areas. You acknowledge and agree that HONDA is not responsible for performance degradation, interruption or delays. You acknowledge that HONDA shall not be liable to you if the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in a given location are not available. If the SOFTWARE or SERVICES are not available within your intended location, you agree that your sole remedy shall be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
J. PRODUCT SUPPORT: Product support for the SOFTWARE is provided by HONDA. For product support, please refer to HONDA instructions provided in the DOCUMENTATION. Should you have any questions concerning this AGREEMENT, or if you desire to contact HONDA for any other reason, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
K. Termination and Transfer. 1. Termination. This AGREEMENT is effective until terminated by you or US. WE may terminate this AGREEMENT for any or no reason, and with or without notice to you. Your rights under this AGREEMENT will terminate automatically without notice from US if you fail to comply with any term of this AGREEMENT. Upon termination of this AGREEMENT, you shall cease all use of the SOFTWARE and SERVICES.
2. Transfer: You may permanently transfer your rights under this AGREEMENT only as part of a sale or transfer of the VEHICLE, provided you retain no copies, you transfer all of the SOFTWARE and HONDA SERVICES (including all component parts, the media and printed materials, and any upgrades), and the recipient agrees to the terms of this AGREEMENT. You agree to notify HONDA upon the sale or transfer of the VEHICLE. To contact HONDA, please refer to the HONDA contact information provided in the DOCUMENTATION.
Continued 345

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
L. Changes to the SOFTWARE or SERVICES. WE may change, modify, or update the SOFTWARE or SERVICES from time to time. Unless explicitly stated otherwise, any new features or services that augment or enhance the SOFTWARE or SERVICES in the future shall respectively be considered part of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES and subject to this AGREEMENT. WE reserve the right at any time and from time to time to interrupt, restrict, modify, suspend, discontinue, temporarily or permanently, the SOFTWARE or SERVICES (or any portion thereof), with or without notice to you, and you agree that HONDA shall not be liable to you or to any third party for any modification, suspension or discontinuance of the SOFTWARE or SERVICES.
M. ARBITRATION: PLEASE READ THIS ARBITRATION PROVISION CAREFULLY TO UNDERSTAND YOUR RIGHTS. YOU AGREE THAT ANY CLAIM THAT YOU MAY HAVE IN THE FUTURE MUST BE RESOLVED THROUGH BINDING ARBITRATION. YOU WAIVE THE RIGHT TO HAVE YOUR DISPUTE HEARD IN COURT AND WAIVE THE RIGHT TO BRING CLASS CLAIMS. YOU UNDERSTAND THAT DISCOVERY AND APPEAL RIGHTS ARE MORE LIMITED IN ARBITRATION. Arbitration is a method of resolving a claim, dispute or controversy without filing a lawsuit. By agreeing to arbitrate, the right to go to court is waived and instead claims, disputes or controversies are submitted to binding arbitration. This provision sets forth the terms and conditions of our agreement. YOU and HONDA agree and acknowledge that this Agreement affects interstate commerce and the Federal Arbitration Act ("FAA") applies. By using the Software, Vehicle, or Services, YOU elect to have disputes resolved by arbitration. YOU, HONDA or any involved third party may pursue a Claim. "Claim" means any dispute between YOU, HONDA, or any involved third party relating to your use of the Software, the Vehicle, or the Services, this Agreement, or our relationship, including any representations, omissions or warranties. "Claim" does not include personal injury or wrongful death claims. YOU or HONDA may seek remedies in small claims court or provisional judicial remedies without arbitrating. In addition, notwithstanding anything herein to the contrary, YOU or HONDA may seek equitable relief in a court of competent jurisdiction. YOU or HONDA may select arbitration with American Arbitration Association, JAMS or National Arbitration and Mediation. Contact these sponsors for their rules. The hearing will be in the federal district where YOU reside. If agreed, it may be by telephone or written submissions. Filing and arbitrator fees to be paid per the sponsor rules. You may contact the sponsor for a fee waiver. If no fee waivers, HONDA will pay filing and arbitrator fees up to $5,000, unless law requires more. Each party is responsible for other fees. Arbitrator may award costs or fees to prevailing party, if permitted by law. HONDA will not seek fees, unless the claims are frivolous.
346

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuHonda App License Agreement
Arbitrator shall be an attorney or current or retired judge familiar with automotive or consumer software. The arbitrator shall follow substantive law, statute of limitations and decide all issues relating to the interpretation, construction, enforceability and applicability of this provision. The arbitrator may order relief permitted by law. This provision is governed and enforceable by the FAA. An award shall include a written opinion and be final, subject to appeal by the FAA. This provision survives termination of this Agreement or relationship, bankruptcy, assignment or transfer. If part of this provision is unenforceable, the remainder remains in effect. If unenforceability allows arbitration as a class action, then this provision is entirely unenforceable. YOU may opt out within 30 days of your initial use of the Software by sending a signed, written notice to HONDA at Honda Financial Services, P.O. Box 165007, Irving, TX 75016. HONDA reserves the right to make changes to this provision after providing written notice and an opportunity to opt out.
N. Miscellaneous: You may not assign this AGREEMENT without HONDA's prior written consent. This AGREEMENT and any additional HONDA TERMS and PROVIDER TERMS represents the entire agreement between you and US. HONDA may amend the terms of this AGREEMENT by providing you with notices of such updated terms. If you do not consent to be bound by the updated terms, your sole remedy will be to cease using the SOFTWARE and SERVICES. If any part of this AGREEMENT is found invalid, void, or unenforceable, the balance of the AGREEMENT will remain valid and enforceable according to its terms. To the fullest extent permitted by law, and except as explicitly provided otherwise, this AGREEMENT and any disputes arising out of or relating to it will be governed by the laws of the State of California, except that California laws concerning choice of law or conflicts shall not apply if they would cause the substantive law of another jurisdiction to apply. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Section M shall be governed by the Federal Arbitration Act and the laws of the State of California, as applicable, as set forth therein. The failure to enforce any term of this AGREEMENT on one occasion shall not prevent enforcement on any other occasion or the enforcement of any other term. Headings and captions shall not be considered included for purposes of interpretation or application hereof, but are for convenience only.
347

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
Legal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
OWNER'S MANUAL LICENSE/LIABILITY STATEMENTS
USE OF APPLE CARPLAY IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE, WHICH ARE INCLUDED AS PART OF THE APPLE iOS TERMS OF USE. IN SUMMARY, THE CARPLAY TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY APPLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF CARPLAY, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE APPLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING APPLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY CARPLAY. USE OF ANDROID AUTO IS SUBJECT TO YOUR AGREEMENT TO THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE WHICH MUST BE AGREED TO WHEN THE ANDROID AUTO APPLICATION IS DOWNLOADED TO YOUR ANDROID PHONE. IN SUMMARY, THE ANDROID AUTO TERMS OF USE DISCLAIM GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' LIABILITY IF THE SERVICES FAIL TO PERFORM CORRECTLY OR ARE DISCONTINUED, STRICTLY LIMIT GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS' OTHER LIABILITIES, DESCRIBE THE KINDS OF USER INFORMATION (INCLUDING, FOR EXAMPLE, VEHICLE LOCATION, VEHICLE SPEED, AND VEHICLE STATUS) BEING GATHERED AND STORED BY GOOGLE AND ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS, AND DISCLOSE CERTAIN POSSIBLE RISKS ASSOCIATED WITH THE USE OF ANDROID AUTO, INCLUDING THE POTENTIAL FOR DRIVER DISTRACTION. SEE GOOGLE'S PRIVACY POLICY FOR DETAILS REGARDING GOOGLE'S USE AND HANDLING OF DATA UPLOADED BY ANDROID AUTO.
348

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLegal Information on Apple CarPlay/Android Auto
DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES; LIMITATION ON LIABILITY
YOU EXPRESSLY ACKNOWLEDGE AND AGREE THAT USE OF APPLE CARPLAY OR ANDROID AUTO ("THE APPLICATIONS") IS AT YOUR SOLE RISK AND THAT THE ENTIRE RISK AS TO SATISFACTORY QUALITY, PERFORMANCE, ACCURACY AND EFFORT IS WITH YOU TO THE MAXIMUM EXTENT PERMITTED BY APPLICABLE LAW, AND THAT THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND "AS AVAILABLE," WITH ALL FAULTS AND WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, AND HONDA HEREBY DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES AND CONDITIONS WITH RESPECT TO THE APPLICATIONS AND INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, EITHER EXPRESS, IMPLIED OR STATUTORY, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES AND/OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, ACCURACY, QUIET ENJOYMENT, AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. NO ORAL OR WRITTEN INFORMATION OR ADVICE GIVEN BY HONDA OR AN AUTHORIZED REPRESENTATIVE SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY. AS EXAMPLES, AND WITHOUT LIMITATION, HONDA DISCLAIMS ANY WARRANTY REGARDING THE ACCURACY OF DATA PROVIDED BY THE APPLICATIONS, SUCH AS THE ACCURACY OF DIRECTIONS, ESTIMATED TRAVEL TIME, SPEED LIMITS, ROAD CONDITIONS, NEWS, WEATHER, TRAFFIC, OR OTHER CONTENT PROVIDED BY APPLE, GOOGLE, THEIR AFFILIATES, OR THIRD PARTY PROVIDERS; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE AGAINST LOSS OF APPLICATION DATA, WHICH MAY BE LOST AT ANY TIME; HONDA DOES NOT GUARANTEE THAT THE APPLICATIONS OR ANY SERVICES PROVIDED THROUGH THEM WILL BE PROVIDED AT ALL TIMES OR THAT ANY OR ALL SERVICES WILL BE AVAILABLE AT ANY PARTICULAR TIME OR LOCATION. FOR EXAMPLE, SERVICES MAY BE SUSPENDED OR INTERRUPTED WITHOUT NOTICE FOR REPAIR, MAINTENANCE, SECURITY FIXES, UPDATES, ETC., SERVICES MAY BE UNAVAILABLE IN YOUR AREA OR LOCATION, ETC. IN ADDITION, YOU UNDERSTAND THAT CHANGES IN THIRD PARTY TECHNOLOGY OR GOVERNMENT REGULATION MAY RENDER THE SERVICES AND/OR APPLICATIONS OBSOLETE AND/OR UNUSABLE.
TO THE EXTENT NOT PROHIBITED BY LAW, IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA OR ITS AFFILIATES BE LIABLE FOR PERSONAL INJURY, OR ANY INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHATSOEVER, INCLUDING, WITHOUT LIMITATION, DAMAGES FOR LOSS OF PROFITS, CORRUPTION OR LOSS OF DATA, FAILURE TO TRANSMIT OR RECEIVE ANY DATA, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION OR ANY OTHER COMMERCIAL DAMAGES OR LOSSES, ARISING OUT OF OR RELATED TO THE APPLICATIONS OR YOUR USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE APPLICATIONS OR INFORMATION ON THE APPLICATIONS, HOWEVER CAUSED, REGARDLESS OF THE THEORY OF LIABILITY (CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE) AND EVEN IF HONDA WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. SOME STATES AND JURISDICTIONS DISALLOW THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES, SO THESE LIMITATIONS AND EXCLUSIONS MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. IN NO EVENT SHALL HONDA'S TOTAL LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ALL DAMAGES (OTHER THAN AS MAY BE REQUIRED BY APPLICABLE LAW IN CASES INVOLVING PERSONAL INJURY) EXCEED THE AMOUNT OF FIVE DOLLARS ($5.00). THE FOREGOING LIMITATIONS WILL APPLY EVEN IF THE ABOVE STATED REMEDY FAILS OF ITS ESSENTIAL PURPOSE.
349

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuAbout Open Source Licenses
About Open Source Licenses
To see the open source license information, follow these steps.
Models with color audio system
1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select License.
Models with Display Audio
1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select About. 5. Select Legal Information. 6. Select License.
350

1About Open Source Licenses
Models with color audio system
LICENCE: Copyright © 2001 Bob Trower, Trantor Standard Systems Inc.
Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions:
The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE.

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
License Information
Bluetooth
The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by PANASONIC CORPORATION is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of such marks by MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners. https://www.bluetooth.com/develop-with-bluetooth/marketing-branding/
Windows Media
This product is protected by certain intellectual property rights of Microsoft. Use or distribution of such technology outside of this product is prohibited without a license from Microsoft.

Features

Continued

351

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
Apple
"Made for iPod," and "Made for iPhone," mean that an electronic accessory has been designed to connect specifically to iPod, or iPhone, respectively, and has been certified by the developer to meet Apple performance standards. Apple is not responsible for the operation of this device or its compliance with safety and regulatory standards. Please note that the use of this accessory with iPod, or iPhone, may affect wireless performance. Apple, the Apple Logo, iPhone, iPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and other countries. Apple CarPlay, and Lightning are trademarks of Apple Inc. App Store is a service mark of Apple Inc.
352

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
MPEG
Mpeg4 Visual THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE MPEG-4 VISUAL PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER FOR (i) ENCODING VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE MPEG-4 VISUALA STANDARD ("MPEG-4 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODING MPEG-4 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED BY MPEG LA TO PROVIDE MPEG-4 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION INCLUDING THAT RELATING TO PROMOTIONAL, INTERNAL AND COMMERCIAL USES AND LICENSING MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, LLC. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
VC-1 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE VC-1 PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE VC-1 STANDARD ("VC-1 VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE VC-1 VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE VC-1 VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.

Features

Continued

353

Features

uuGeneral Information on the Audio SystemuLicense Information
AVC/H.264 THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO IN COMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD ("AVC VIDEO") AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THAT WAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIAL ACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDE AVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINED FROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.MPEGLA.COM.
354

Customized Features

Models with color audio system
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
How to Customize the Settings
While the vehicle is at a complete stop with the power mode in ON, press the MENU button. To customize the phone settings, press the PHONE button, then select Settings.

1Customized Features
When you customize settings:
· Make sure that the vehicle is at a complete stop. · Shift to (P.
To customize features detail, refer to the following. 2 Customization Flow P. 356 2 List of customizable options P. 359

Audio/Information Screen

Features

PHONE Button

MENU Button Selector Knob

Continued

355

uuCustomized Featuresu
Customization Flow
Press the MENU button. Sound Settings
Bluetooth Settings

Features

356

Clock Settings Smartphone Settings

Bass / Treble Balance / Fader Speed Volume Compensation
Connect New Device Change Device Priority Device Disconnect All Device Delete Device
Automatic Time Daylight Saving Time Set Time Time Zone
Apple CarPlay Android Auto

RDS Settings Display Adjustment
Touch Panel Sensitivity Rear Camera Setting Language License Factory Data Reset

RDS Information
Brightness Contrast Black Level Day Night Display OFF
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline

uuCustomized Featuresu
Continued 357

Features

uuCustomized Featuresu Press the PHONE button and select Settings.
Bluetooth Settings
Ringtone Auto Phone Call Transfer Hands-Free System Clear

Connect New Device Change Device Priority Device Disconnect All Device Delete Device
Phone Vehicle

Features

358

uuCustomized Featuresu

List of customizable options Press the MENU button.

Customizable Features

Bass / Treble

Sound Settings

Balance / Fader Speed Volume

Compensation

Connect New Device

Bluetooth Settings

Change Device
Priority Device Disconnect All Device Delete Device

Automatic Time

Clock Settings

Daylight Saving Time

Smartphone Settings RDS Settings

Set Time
Time Zone Apple CarPlay Android Auto
RDS Information

*1:Default Setting

Features

Description
Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers' sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 238
Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Connects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Sets a device as the priority device. Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. Deletes a paired phone. Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function. Sets the clock to update based on daylight savings time. Adjusts time.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 154
Changes the time zone manually. Sets up the Apple CarPlay connection. Sets up the Android Auto connection. Selects whether the RDS information comes on.

Selectable Settings
--
-- -- ON*1/OFF -- -- ON*1/OFF
ON/OFF*1
--
-- ON*1/OFF

Continued 359

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customizable Features Brightness

Contrast

Display Adjustment

Black Level

Day Night Display OFF Touch Panel Sensitivity

Rear Camera Setting

Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline

Language License Factory Data Reset
*1:Default Setting

Description Changes the brightness of the audio/ information screen. Changes the contrast of the audio/ information screen. Changes the black level of the audio/ information screen.

Selectable Settings --

Changes between the daytime mode, nighttime mode and display off mode.

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.
Shows the guideline that does not move with the steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 573
Shows the guideline that moves with the steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 573
Changes the display language.
Shows the legal information.
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 362

Normal*1/High ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF English*1/Español/Français
-- --

Features

360

uuCustomized Featuresu

Press the PHONE button and select Settings. Customizable Features Connect New Device

Bluetooth Settings Ringtone

Change Device
Priority Device Disconnect All Device Delete Device

Auto Phone Call Transfer

Hands-Free System Clear *1:Default Setting

Description Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Connects a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 394
Sets a device as the priority device. Disconnects a paired phone from HFL. Deletes a paired phone. Selects the ring tone. Sets calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. Resets all customized items in the Phone Settings group as default.

Selectable Settings --
-- ON*1/OFF
-- -- Phone*1/Vehicle ON*1/OFF
--

Features

361

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings
Defaulting All the Settings
Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults. 1. Press the MENU button. 2. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen. 3. Select Yes to reset the settings. 4. Select Yes again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.

Features

362

Customized Features
Models with Display Audio
Use the audio/information screen to customize certain features.
How to Customize the General Settings
With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select General Settings and select a setting item.

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Continued

363

Features

uuCustomized Featuresu
Customization flow
Press the button. Select General Settings.
System
364

Date & Time
Language Touch Panel Sensitivity
System Volumes

Set Date & Time
Time Zone
Auto Daylight Saving Time Date Format Time Format
System Sounds Text-to-Speech Navigation Guidance
Phone Calls Default

Automatic Date & Time
Set Date Set Time
Automatic Time Zone
(Select time zone)

uuCustomized Featuresu

Data Sharing Setting Refuel Recommend
About
Factory Data Reset Detail Information

Status Legal Information
Model Number Android Version Kernel Version
Build Number
App Manager

Continued 365

Features

uuCustomized Featuresu
Smartphone Connection Connections
Display 366

Apple CarPlay Android Auto
Wi-Fi
Bluetooth
Brightness Contrast Black Level Default

+ Connect New Device (Saved Devices)
+ Connect New Device (Saved Devices)
Change Mode (Available Networks/ Connected Devices)
Options
Options
+ Connect New Device (Saved Devices)

Add Network Saved
Networks
Bluetooth Priority Device

Sound
Camera Voice Control

Bass / Treble
Audio Zones & Balance / Fader
Bose Centerpoint Bose Dynamic Speed
Compensation Rear Camera
Cross Traffic Monitor Voice Control Mode

uuCustomized Featuresu
Treble Midrange
Bass
Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline

Features

Continued 367

uuCustomized Featuresu

System

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Set Date & Time

Automatic Date & Time Set Date
Set Time

Selects ON to have the GPS automatically adjust the clock. Select OFF to cancel this function.
Adjusts date.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 154
Adjusts time.
2 Adjusting the Clock P. 154

ON*1/OFF
Day/Month/Year Hour/Minute AM/PM

Date & Time

Time Zone

Automatic Time Zone
(Select time zone)

Sets the audio system to automatically adjust the clock when driving through different time zones.
Changes the time zone manually.

ON*1/OFF --

Auto Daylight Saving Time

Sets the clock to update based on daylight savings time. ON*1/OFF

Date Format

Select a date format.

MM/DD/YYYY*2/ DD/MM/YYYY*3/ YYYY/MM/DD

Time Format

Select a time format.

12H*1/24H

*1:Default Setting *2:Default Setting for U.S. models *3:Default Setting for Canadian models

Features

368

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customizable Features

Language

Touch Panel Sensitivity
System Volumes
Data Sharing Setting

System Sounds Text-to-Speech Navigation Guidance Phone Calls Default

Refuel Recommend

*1:Default Setting

Description
Changes the driver information interface and audio/ information screen language separately.

Selectable Settings
English*1/Español/ Français

Sets the sensitivity of the touch panel screen.

High/Normal*1

Sets the system sound volume level.

Sets the text-to-speech volume level.

Sets the navigation guidance volume level.

Sets the phone call volume level.

Resets all System Volumes settings to default values.

Turns the data sharing setting on and off.
2 Start Up P. 263

ON*1/OFF

Turns the refuel recommend function on and off.
2 Refuel Recommend P. 428

ON*1/OFF

Features

Continued 369

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customizable Features

Status

Legal Information

About

Model Number Android Version

Kernel Version

Build Number

Factory Data Reset

Detail Information

App Manager

Description
Displays the Android setting items.
Resets all the settings to their factory default.
2 Defaulting All the Settings P. 385
Displays the Android system memory and apps information.

Selectable Settings --
Continue/Cancel --

Features

370

Smartphone Connection Customizable Features

Apple CarPlay

+ Connect New Device (Saved Devices)

Android Auto

+ Connect New Device (Saved Devices)

Description
Pairs a new phone to Apple CarPlay.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
Pairs a new phone to Android Auto.
2 Phone Setup P. 414
Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 414

uuCustomized Featuresu
Selectable Settings -- -- -- --

Features

Continued 371

uuCustomized Featuresu

Connections Customizable Features

Description

Change Mode

Changes the Wi-Fi mode.

Features

(Available Networks/Connected Displays the available network(s) or current connected

Devices)

device(s).

Wi-Fi

Options

Add Network Saved Networks Network SSID

Adds a new network to connect Wi-Fi. Saves the connected network. Sets the network name.

Setup

Security Password

Displays the network security.
Sets password for require entering password when connecting Wi-Fi device to the network.

Wi-Fi Band

Displays the Wi-Fi band.

Options

Bluetooth Priority Device

Turns the Bluetooth® on and off. Displays the priority device.

Bluetooth + Connect New Device

Pairs a new phone to HFL.
2 Phone Setup P. 414

(Saved Devices)

Connects, disconnects, or deletes a paired phone.
2 Phone Setup P. 414

*1:Default Setting *2:Appears only when Apple CarPlay or Android Auto is connected wirelessly.

372

Selectable Settings Network*1/ Smartphone*2/OFF
--
-- -- -- --
--
-- ON*1/OFF
-- --
--

uuCustomized Featuresu

Display Customizable Features
Brightness Contrast Black Level
Default

Sound

Customizable Features

Treble

Bass / Treble

Midrange

Bass

Audio Zones & Balance / Fader

Bose Centerpoint

Bose Dynamic Speed Compensation

Description Changes the brightness of the audio/information screen. Changes the contrast of the audio/information screen. Changes the black level of the audio/information screen. Resets all customized settings for the brightness, contrast, and black level.

Selectable Settings -- -- --
--

Description

Selectable Settings

Adjusts the settings of the audio speakers' sound.
2 Adjusting the Sound P. 280

Features

Continued 373

uuCustomized Featuresu

Camera

Customizable Features

Rear Camera

Fixed Guideline Dynamic Guideline

Cross Traffic Monitor *1:Default Setting

Description
Shows the guideline that does not move with the steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 573
Shows the guideline that moves with the steering wheel.
2 Multi-View Rear Camera P. 573
Shows arrows on the rear camera image to indicate vehicles approaching from the sides.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor* P. 569

Voice Control

Customizable Features Voice Control Mode *1:Default Setting

Description
Selects a mode of the voice portal screen.
2 Voice Control Operation P. 283

Selectable Settings ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF ON*1/OFF
Selectable Settings Assist/Normal*1

Features

374 * Not available on all models

How to Customize the Vehicle Settings
With the power mode in ON, press the button, and then select Vehicle Settings and select a setting item.

uuCustomized Featuresu

Audio/Information Screen

Features

Continued

375

uuCustomized Featuresu
Customization flow
Press the button. Select Vehicle Settings.

Features

TPMS Calibration* Driver Assist System Setup
376 * Not available on all models

Forward Collision Warning Distance ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep Road Departure Mitigation Setting Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep Blind Spot Info
Traffic Sign Recognition System Display Setting Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning
Speed Limit Warning Threshold Setting Driver Attention Monitor

Meter Setup Keyless Access Setup

uuCustomized Featuresu
Adjust Outside Temp. Display "Trip A" Reset Timing "Trip B" Reset Timing Adjust Alarm Volume
Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turn By Turn Auto Display
Speed/Distance Units Rear Seat Reminder
Door Unlock Mode Smart Entry Light Flash
Smart Entry Beep Remote Start System ON/OFF
Lockout Protection

Features

Continued 377

uuCustomized Featuresu
Lighting Setup Door/Window Setup
Maintenance Info.

Auto High Beam Interior Light Dimming Time
Headlight Auto OFF Timer Auto Light Sensitivity*
Auto Headlight On with Wiper On
Auto Door Lock Auto Door Unlock Key And Remote Unlock Mode Walk Away Auto Lock Keyless Lock Answer Back Remote Window Control
Select Reset Items

Features

378 * Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

TPMS Calibration* Customizable Features
TPMS Calibration

Description
Cancels/Calibrates the tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS).
2 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) P. 462

Selectable Settings Calibrate/Cancel

Driver Assist System Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Forward Collision Warning Distance
ACC Forward Vehicle Detect Beep
Road Departure Mitigation Setting

Selects distance for Forward Collision Warning audible and visual alerts.
2 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) P. 476
Turns On/Off audible notification when vehicle has moved in/out of adaptive cruise control range.
2 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow P. 494
Selects operating mode of the Road Departure Mitigation system.
2 Road Departure Mitigation System P. 537

Long/Normal*1/Short
ON/OFF*1 Narrow/Normal*1/Wide/ Warning Only

Lane Keeping Assist Suspend Beep

Selects On/Off the LKAS alert for not detecting road lines.
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 516

ON/OFF*1

*1:Default Setting

Features

* Not available on all models

Continued 379

uuCustomized Featuresu

Customizable Features Blind Spot Info Traffic Sign Recognition System Display Setting Traffic Sign Recognition System Speed Limit Warning
Speed Limit Warning Threshold Setting
Driver Attention Monitor *1:Default Setting

Description

Selectable Settings

Selects On/Off the blind spot information system audible alert.
2 Blind Spot Information System* P. 469

Audible And Visual Alert*1/ Visual Alert

Displays the traffic sign recognition system on the instrument panel.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 545

Display*1/None

Enables over speed limit warning when speed limit is exceeded.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 545

ON*1/OFF

Changes the setting speed the traffic sign recognition system over speed warning is activated.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System P. 545
Changes the setting for the driver attention monitor.
2 Driver Attention Monitor P. 144

Speed Limit*1/Speed Limit +3mph/Speed Limit +5mph/Speed Limit +10mph (When mph is selected) Speed Limit*1/Speed Limit +5km/h/Speed Limit +10km/h/Speed Limit +15km/h (When km/h is selected)
OFF/Tactile Alert/Tactile And Audible Alert*1

Features

380 * Not available on all models

uuCustomized Featuresu

Meter Setup Customizable Features
Adjust Outside Temp. Display "Trip A" Reset Timing
"Trip B" Reset Timing
Adjust Alarm Volume Fuel Efficiency Backlight Turn By Turn Auto Display
Speed/Distance Units
Rear Seat Reminder *1:Default Setting

Description

Selectable Settings

Selects to adjust outside temperature reading by a few degrees. -5°F ~ ±0°F*1 ~ +5°F (U.S.)

2 Outside Temperature P. 111

-3°C ~ ±0°C*1 ~ +3°C (Canada)

Selects the timing to reset Trip A.
2 Range / Fuel / Trip Meter P. 140
2 Speed & Time P. 142

When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1

Selects the timing to reset Trip B.
2 Range / Fuel / Trip Meter P. 140 2 Speed & Time P. 142

When Fully Refueled/IGN OFF/ Manually Reset*1

Changes volume level of all system warnings, door opening warning and indicator.

High/Mid*1/Low

Turns the ambient meter feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Turns on/off the pop-up warning in the turn-by-turn navigation
in the driver information interface.
2 Turn-by-Turn Directions P. 143

ON*1/OFF

Selects the trip computer units.
2 Speed/Distance Units P. 150

km/h · km/mph · miles*1 (U.S.) km/h · km*1/mph · miles (Canada)

Turns the Rear Seat Reminder feature on and off.

ON*1/OFF

Features

Continued 381

uuCustomized Featuresu

Keyless Access Setup Customizable Features
Door Unlock Mode
Smart Entry Light Flash
Smart Entry Beep Remote Start System ON/ OFF Lockout Protection *1:Default Setting

Description Changes which doors unlock when you grab the driver's door handle. Causes some exterior lights to flash when you unlock/lock the doors. Causes the beeper to sound when you unlock/lock the doors.
Turns the remote engine start feature on and off.
Changes the settings for the lockout protection function.

Selectable Settings Driver Door Only*1/All Doors
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF

Features

382

uuCustomized Featuresu

Lighting Setup

Customizable Features

Description

Selectable Settings

Auto High Beam

Turns on/off auto high beam function.

ON*1/OFF

Selects the length of time the interior lights stay on after doors are Interior Light Dimming Time closed.
2 Interior Lights P. 207

Headlight Auto OFF Timer

Selects the length of time the exterior lights stay on after you close the driver's door.
2 Automatic Lighting Off Feature P. 185

Auto Light Sensitivity*

Changes the timing for the headlights to come on.

60sec/30sec*1/15sec 60sec/30sec/15sec*1/0sec Min/Low/Mid*1/High/Max

Auto Headlight On with Wiper On

Selects On/Off headlight function and wiper operation when the headlight is in AUTO setting.
2 Headlight Integration with Wipers P. 185

ON*1/OFF

*1:Default Setting

Features

* Not available on all models

Continued 383

uuCustomized Featuresu

Features

Door/Window Setup Customizable Features
Auto Door Lock
Auto Door Unlock
Key And Remote Unlock Mode Walk Away Auto Lock
Keyless Lock Answer Back Remote Window Control *1:Default Setting Maintenance Info.
Customizable Features Maintenance Info.
384

Description Changes the setting for the automatic locking feature.
Changes the setting for when the doors unlock automatically.
Sets up either the driver's door or all doors to unlock on the first push of the remote key or built-in key. Changes the settings for the auto lock function when you walk away from the vehicle. Turns on/off flash of exterior lights when doors are locked/unlocked by remote key.
2 Using the Remote Transmitter P. 163
Turns the remote window control on and off.

Selectable Settings OFF/With Vehicle Speed*1/ Shift From P OFF/All Doors When Driver's Door Opens*1/All Doors When Shifted to Park/All Doors With IGN OFF Driver Door Only*1/All Doors
ON/OFF*1
ON*1/OFF
ON*1/OFF

Description
Resets the maintenance information.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 585

Selectable Settings Select Reset Items

uuCustomized FeaturesuDefaulting All the Settings

Defaulting All the Settings

Reset all the menu and customized settings as the factory defaults.
Defaulting General Settings
1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select System. 4. Select Factory Data Reset.
u A confirmation message appears on the screen.
5. Select Continue to reset the settings. 6. Select Continue again to reset the settings.
u The system will reboot.

1Defaulting All the Settings When you transfer the vehicle to a third party, reset all settings to default and delete all personal data.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, it will reset the preinstalled apps to their factory default.
If you perform Factory Data Reset, you cannot use the HondaLink® because it becomes off line.
2 HondaLink® P. 310

Defaulting Vehicle Settings
1. Press the button. 2. Select Vehicle Settings. 3. Select Default. 4. Select Yes.

Features

385

HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*

The HomeLink® Universal Transceiver can be programmed to operate up to three remote controlled devices around your home, such as garage doors, lighting, or home security systems.
Important Safety Precautions
Refer to the safety information that came with your garage door opener to test that the safety features are functioning properly. If you do not have the safety information, contact the manufacturer.

1HomeLink® Universal Transceiver*
Before programming HomeLink to operate a garage door opener, confirm that the opener has an external entrapment protection system, such as an "electronic eye," or other safety and reverse stop features. If it does not, HomeLink may not be able to operate it.

Before programming HomeLink, make sure that people and objects are out of the way of the garage or gate to prevent potential injury or damage.

When programming a garage door opener, park just outside the garage door's path.

Features

386 * Not available on all models

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Training HomeLink
Indicator

If it is necessary to erase a previously entered learned code: · Press and hold the I and III HomeLink
buttons for about 10 seconds, until the green indicator blinks. Release the buttons, and proceed to step 1. · If you are training the second or third button, go directly to step 1.

I HomeLink Button

III HomeLink Button

The instructions on the next page should work for most gate or garage openers, but may not work for all. For detailed instructions about your specific remote opener, visit http://www.homelink.com or call (800) 355-3515.

Features

Continued

387

uuHomeLink® Universal Transceiver*uTraining HomeLink

Programming a Button
1. Position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 to 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink® button you want to program.

Features

2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button. Is the HomeLink indicator (LED) slowly flashing orange?

YES

3a. Hold the button on the remote transmitter. Does HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing green or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.
4. Press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for about a second. Does the device (garage door opener) work?

3b. Canadian Garage Door Opener A. Press and release the HomeLink button. Press, hold and release the button on the remote every 2 secs. Does the HomeLink indicator (LED) change from slowly flashing orange to rapidly flashing or continuously on green? The process should take less than 60 seconds.

YES

Training Complete

5. Press and hold the HomeLink button again.

HomeLink LED is continuously on green.

HomeLink indicator rapidly flashes green.

6. Press and hold the HomeLink button again. The remote-controlled device should operate.
Training Complete
388

5a. The remote has a rolling code. Press the "learn" button on the remote-controlled device (e.g. garage door opener).
5b. Within 30 secs, press and hold the programmed HomeLink button for 2 secs.

1Training HomeLink
Reprogramming a Button If you want to retrain a programmed button for a new device, you do not have to erase all button memory. You can replace the existing memory code using this procedure:
1. Press and hold the desired HomeLink button until the HomeLink indicator begins to slowly flash orange. This should take about 20 seconds.
2. Release the HomeLink button and position the remote transmitter you wish to link 1 - 3 inches (3 - 8 cm) from the HomeLink button you want to program, then follow steps 3 - 6 under "programming a button."
Erasing Button Memory To erase programming from the buttons, press and hold the two outside HomeLink buttons until the HomeLink indicator changes from orange to rapidly flashing green. This should take about 10 seconds. You should erase all programming before selling the vehicle.
Operating To operate, simply press and release the programmed HomeLink button. Activation will now occur for the trained device.
Questions For questions or comments, visit www.HomeLink.com, www.youtube.com/ HomeLinkGentex, or by calling the HomeLink Hotline (North America only) at (800) 355-3515.
HomeLink® is a registered trademark of Gentex Corporation.

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Models with color audio system
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
VOL (+/VOL ((Volume) Switch
Selector Knob

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere with the microphone.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.

State or local laws may prohibit the operation of handheld electronic devices while operating a vehicle.

Left Selector Wheel

PHONE Button

Up to 20 favorite contacts can be stored. If there is no entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 402
Up to 20 call histories can be stored. If there is no call history, Call History is disabled.

Features

Continued

389

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

Left Selector Wheel: While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.
2 Receiving a Call P. 407
PHONE button: Press to go directly to the Phone screen. Selector knob: Rotate to select an item on the screen, then press .

HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

390

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Bluetooth Indicator Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.
HFL Mode

Battery Level Status Signal Strength Roam Status

Call Name Call Number

1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.

Features

391

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
To use the audio system function, the power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON.

1HFL Menus
To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.

PHONE button Recent Calls*1

All Dialed Missed Received

Some functions are limited while driving. A message appears on the screen when the vehicle is moving and the operation is canceled.
Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Display the last outgoing calls.
Display the last missed calls.
Display the last incoming calls.

Favorite Contacts*1

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.

Contacts*1

Display the phonebook of the paired phone.

Keypad*1

Enter a phone number to dial.

Features

Settings

Bluetooth Settings

*1 : Available only when a phone is connected to HFL.
392

Connect New Device Pair a phone to the system.

Change Device

Connects a paired phone.

Priority Device

Sets a device as the priority device.

Disconnect All Device Disconnect a paired phone from the system.

Delete Device

Delete a previously paired phone.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ringtone
Auto Phone Call Transfer Hands-Free System Clear

Phone Vehicle

Select the ring tone stored in the connected cell phone. Select the ring tone stored in HFL.

Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle.
Clear the phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data.

Features

Continued 393

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Phone Setup
394

To pair a cell phone (No phone has been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode. 3. Select Yes.
u The audio system will enter a waiting mode for pairing.
4. Select Honda Civic from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this audio system, select Search from car and follow the prompts. When your phone appears on the list, select it.

1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to HFL before you can make and receive hands-free calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Up to six phones can be paired. · Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
connected to HFL.
· If your phone is not ready for pairing or not found
by the system within three minutes, the system will time out and return to the Bluetooth Settings screen.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or two icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. : The phone can be used with HFL.

5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.

When pairing a phone from this audio system: If your phone doesn't appear on the audio/ information screen, select Search from phone and search for Bluetooth® devices using your phone. From your phone, select Honda Civic.

To pair a cell phone (when a phone has already been paired to the system)
1. Press the PHONE button. u If a prompt appears asking to connect to a phone, select No and proceed with step 2.
2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Connect New Device. u The audio system will enter a waiting mode for pairing.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

395

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
5. Make sure your phone is in search or discoverable mode.
6. Select Honda Civic from your phone. u If you want to pair a phone from this audio system, select Search from car and follow the prompts. When your phone appears on the list, select it.
7. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
8. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful. u You can prioritize a Bluetooth® device at the same time. Select Yes if you want to prioritize the device.
396

To change the currently paired phone 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth Settings.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

4. Select Change Device. u The screen changes to a device list.

Features

5. Select a desired device name. 6. Select Both, Audio, or Phone.
u When another device is connected to Android Auto and you select Both or Phone, a confirmation message appears. Select Continue.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.

Continued

397

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To delete a paired phone 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Bluetooth Settings.
4. Select Delete Device. u The screen changes to a device list.
5. Select a phone you want to delete.
6. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes. u When the device is connected to Android Auto, a confirmation message appears. Select Yes.
398

Automatic Transferring
If paring between your phone and the system is executed while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 4. Select ON or OFF.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Ringtone. 4. Select Phone or Vehicle.

1Ring Tone
Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected. Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers.

Features

Continued

399

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To Clear the System
Phone settings, paired phones, all favorite contacts entries, all call history data, and all imported phonebook data are erased.
1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Settings. 3. Select Hands-Free System Clear. 4. Select Yes.
5. A confirmation message appears on the screen. Select Yes.
6. A notification appears on the screen. Select OK.
400

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to HFL.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a person from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see up to five category icons. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref Home Mobile Work Pager

Fax Car Voice Other

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to HFL.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

Continued

401

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen

To add a favorite contacts 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.
On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen
3. Select the star icon.

Contacts Screen

Star Icon

Features

Keypad Screen

Star Icon

On the Keypad screen
3. Select Add to Favorites. u A notification appears on the screen if the favorite contact is successfully stored. u To remove the favorite contact, select the star icon again.

Add to Favorites
402

To delete a favorite contact 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select the star icon. 4. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.
Star Icon

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

403

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Making a Call
You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported Recent Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.

1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.

Features

To make a call using the imported phonebook
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook are automatically imported to HFL. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Contacts. 3. The phonebook is stored alphabetically.
Select a name. 4. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
404

To make a call using a phone number 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number. 4. Select Call.
u Dialing starts automatically.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using the call history Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.
3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the call history
The call history appears only when a phone is connected to HFL, and displays the last 20 dialed, received, or missed calls.

Features

Continued

405

Features

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
To make a call using a favorite contact 1. Press the PHONE button. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select a number.
u Dialing starts automatically.
406

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Call
HFL Mode
Caller's Name

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds and the Incoming Call... screen appears.
You can answer the call using the left selector wheel. To pick the call, roll up or down to select Answer on the driver information interface and then press the left selector wheel.
u If you want to decline or end the call, select Ignore on the driver information interface using the left selector wheel.

1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting Select Answer using the left selector wheel to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Select Swap calls using the left selector wheel to return to the current call. Select Ignore using the left selector wheel to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Select Hang Up using the left selector wheel if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the icons on the driver information interface.

Features

Continued

407

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call

The following options are available during a call.

Swap Calls: Put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call.

Mute: Mute your voice.

Use Handheld: Transfer a call from HFL to your phone.

Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven

phone system.

Mute Icon

The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.

1Options During a Call Keypad: Available on some phones.

Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Features

408

Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®

Features

Models with Display Audio
Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® (HFL) allows you to place and receive phone calls using your vehicle's audio system, without handling your cell phone.
Using HFL
HFL Buttons
VOL (+ /VOL ((Volume) Switch

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Place your phone where you can get good reception.
To use HFL, you need a Bluetooth-compatible cell phone. For a list of compatible phones, pairing procedures, and special feature capabilities:
· U.S.: Visit automobiles.honda.com/handsfreelink/,
or call 1-888-528-7876.
· Canada: For more information on smartphone
compatibility, call 1-855-490-7351.
To use the system, the Bluetooth setting must be ON. If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay, HFL is unavailable.
2 Customized Features P. 363

Left Selector Wheel
(Talk) Button

Voice control tips
· Aim the vents away from the ceiling and close the
windows, as noise coming from them may interfere
with the microphone.
· Press the button when you want to call a
number using a phonebook name or a number.
Speak clearly and naturally after a beep.
· If the microphone picks up voices other than yours,
the command may be misinterpreted.
· To change the volume level, use the audio system's
VOL (Volume) or use the remote audio controls on the steering wheel.

If there is no Favorite Contact entry in the system, the pop-up notification appears on the screen.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 420

Continued

409

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

(Talk) button: Press to access Voice Portal. Left Selector Wheel: Roll up or down to select Phone on the driver information interface, and then press the left selector wheel. While receiving a call, the incoming call screen is displayed on the driver information interface. You can pick up the call using the left selector wheel.
2 Receiving a Call P. 424
To go to the phone screen: 1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone to switch the display to the phone screen.

1Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink®
Bluetooth® Wireless Technology The Bluetooth® word mark and logos are registered trademarks owned by Bluetooth SIG, Inc., and any use of such marks by Honda Motor Co., Ltd., is under license. Other trademarks and trade names are those of their respective owners.
HFL Limitations An incoming call on HFL will interrupt the audio system when it is playing. It will resume when the call is ended.

Features

410

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uUsing HFL

HFL Status Display
The audio/information screen notifies you when there is an incoming call.

Bluetooth Indicator
Appears when your phone is connected to HFL.

Signal Strength
Battery Level Status
HFL Mode Caller's Name (If registered)/Caller's Number (If not registered)

1HFL Status Display
The information that appears on the audio/ information screen varies between phone models.

Limitations for Manual Operation
Certain manual functions are disabled or inoperable while the vehicle is in motion. You cannot select a grayed-out option until the vehicle is stopped.
Only previously stored, phonebook names, or numbers can be called using voice commands while the vehicle is in motion.
2 Favorite Contacts P. 420

Features

411

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

HFL Menus
The power mode must be in ACCESSORY or ON to use the system.

Phone settings screen

1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone. 3. Select Settings.

1HFL Menus To use HFL, you must first pair your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone to the system while the vehicle is parked.
Some functions are limited while driving.

Change Devices
Auto Sync Phone Auto Phone Call Transfer
Ringtone HondaLink Assist

+ Connect New Device Pair a new phone to the system. (Existing entry list) Connect, disconnect, or delete a paired device.
Set phonebook and call history data to be automatically imported when a phone is paired to HFL. Set calls to automatically transfer from your phone to HFL when you enter the vehicle. Select the ring tone. Turn HondaLink® Assist on and off.

Features

412

Phone menu screen

1. Press the button. 2. Select Phone.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Recent Calls
Favorite Contacts Contacts Keypad

All Dialed Missed Received

Display the last outgoing, incoming and missed calls. Display the last outgoing calls. Display the last missed calls. Display the last incoming calls.

(Existing entry list) Dial the selected number in the favorite contacts list.

Display the phonebook of the paired phone. Enter a phone number to dial.

Continued

413

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Phone Setup
Bluetooth® setup You can turn Bluetooth® function on and off. 1. Press the button. 2. Select General Settings. 3. Select Connections. 4. Select Bluetooth. 5. Select Options. 6. Select Bluetooth, then select ON.
To pair a cell phone (when there is no phone paired to the system)
1. Select Phone. 2. Select Connect New Device. 3. Make sure your phone is in search or
discoverable mode. 4. Select Honda CIVIC from your phone.
u If you want to pair a phone from this audio system, select Search for Devices, and then select your phone when it appears on the list.
5. The system gives you a pairing code on the audio/information screen. u Confirm if the pairing code on the screen and your phone match. This may vary by phone.
6. Select desired functions and then select Connect.

1Phone Setup
Your Bluetooth-compatible phone must be paired to the system before you can make and receive handsfree calls.
Phone Pairing Tips:
· You cannot pair your phone while the vehicle is
moving.
· Up to six phones can be paired. · Your phone's battery may drain faster when it is
paired to the system.
Once you have paired a phone, you can see it displayed on the screen with one or more icons on the right side. These icons indicate the following:
: The phone is compatible with Bluetooth® Audio. : The phone can be used with HFL. : The phone is compatible with Apple CarPlay. : The phone is compatible with Android Auto.
If there is an active connection to Apple CarPlay or Android Auto, pairing of additional Bluetoothcompatible devices is unavailable.

414

7. A notification appears on the screen if pairing is successful.
8. Select OK. u A confirmation message for phone data collection appears.
9. Select ON or OFF. u A confirmation message for HondaLink Assist appears.
10. Select Yes or No.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

415

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To change the currently paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 412
2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone to connect.
u HFL disconnects the connected phone and starts searching for another paired phone.
u You can set the connected phone priority. Select the box checked on the phone you want to prioritize.
4. Select , , or . u and can be selected simultaneously, however, when or is selected, and cannot be selected.
5. Select Apply.

1To change the currently paired phone If no other phones are found or paired when trying to switch to another phone, HFL will inform you that the original phone is connected again.
To pair other phones, select + Connect New Device from the Bluetooth screen.

Features

416

To delete a paired phone 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 412
2. Select Change Devices. 3. Select a phone you want to delete. 4. Select Options.
5. Select Delete Device. 6. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Delete.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

417

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus
Ring Tone
You can change the ring tone setting. 1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 412
2. Select Ringtone. 3. Select Vehicle or Phone.

1Ring Tone
Vehicle: The fixed ring tone sounds from the speakers. Phone: Depending on the make and model of the cell phone, the ring tone stored in the phone will sound if the phone is connected.

Automatic Transferring
If you get into the vehicle while you are on the phone, the call can be automatically transferred to HFL.
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 412
2. Select Auto Phone Call Transfer. 3. Select ON or OFF.

Features

418

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When Automatic Phone Sync is set to On:
When your phone is paired, the contents of its phonebook and call history are automatically imported to the system.

1Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History
When you select a name from the list in the cellular phonebook, you can see a category icon. The icons indicate what types of numbers are stored for that name.

Pref

Fax

Home

Car

Mobile

Voice

Changing the Automatic Phone Sync setting
1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 412
2. Select Auto Sync Phone. 3. Select ON or OFF.

Work Pager

Other

On some phones, it may not be possible to import the category icons to the system.
The phonebook is updated after every connection. Call history is updated after every connection or call.

Features

Continued

419

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Favorite Contacts
Recent Calls Screen

To add a favorite contacts 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Recent Calls, Contacts, or Keypad.
On the Recent Calls or Contacts screen
3. Select the star icon.

Contacts Screen

Star Icon

Features

Keypad Screen

Star Icon

On the Keypad screen
3. Select Add to Favorite Contacts. u A notification appears on the screen if the favorite contact is successfully stored. u To remove the favorite contact, select the star icon again.

420

Add to Favorite Contacts

To edit a favorite contacts 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry
you want to edit. 4. Select a setting you want. 5. Select Done.
To delete a favorite contacts 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Favorite Contacts. 3. Select Edit on the favorite contacts entry
you want to delete. 4. Select Remove. 5. A confirmation message appears on the
screen. Select Yes.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Features

Continued

421

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Making a Call

You can make calls by inputting any phone number, or by using the imported Recent Calls, Favorite Contacts, and Contacts entries.

1Making a Call
Once a call is connected, you can hear the voice of the person you are calling through the audio speakers.
While there is an active connection with Apple CarPlay, phone calls cannot be made with HandsFreeLink® and are only made from Apple CarPlay.

To make a call using the imported phonebook
1. Select Phone. 2. Select Contacts. 3. Select a name.
u You can sort by First Name or Last Name. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.
4. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

Features

422

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

To make a call using a phone number 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Keypad. 3. Select a number.
u Use the keyboard on the touch screen for entering numbers.
4. Select Call. u Dialing starts automatically.

Features

To make a call using the Call History Call history is stored by All, Dialed, Missed, and Received. 1. Select Phone. 2. Select Recent Calls.
u You can sort by All, Dialed, Missed, or Received. Select the icon on the upper right of the screen.
3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.
To make a call using a favorite contacts entry
1. Select Phone. 2. Select Favorite Contacts.
u You can change the order of favorite contacts entries by selecting Reorder.
3. Select a number. u Dialing starts automatically.

1To make a call using the Call History
The call history displays the last 20 all, dialed, missed, or received calls. (Appears only when a phone is connected to the system.)

Continued

423

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Receiving a Call

When there is an incoming call, an audible notification sounds (if activated) and the Incoming Call... screen appears.
You can answer the call using the left selector wheel. To pick the call, roll up or down to select (answer) on the driver information interface and then press the left selector wheel.
u If you want to decline or end the call, select (ignore) on the driver information interface using the left selector wheel.

1Receiving a Call
Call Waiting Select (answer) to put the current call on hold to answer the incoming call. Select using the left selector wheel to return to the current call. Select (ignore) to ignore the incoming call if you do not want to answer it. Select if you want to hang up the current call.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen instead of the and on the driver information interface.

Features

424

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHFL Menus

Options During a Call
The following options are available during a call. Mute: Mute your voice. Use Handheld: Transfer a call from the system to your phone. Keypad: Send numbers during a call. This is useful when you call a menu-driven phone system.
The available options are shown on the lower half of the screen.

1Options During a Call Keypad: Available on some phones.
You can select the icons on the audio/information screen.

Select the option. u The mute icon appears when Mute is selected when the other source screen other than the phone screen is displayed. Select Mute again to turn it off.

Features

425

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist

HondaLink® Assist
In Case of Emergency
Automatic collision notification If your vehicle's airbags deploy or if the unit detects that the vehicle is severely impacted, your vehicle automatically will attempt to connect to the HondaLink operator. If connected, information about your vehicle, its location, and its condition can be sent to the operator*1; you also can speak to the operator when connected.

1In Case of Emergency
Your vehicle may not be able to connect to the operator if the battery level is low, the line is disconnected, or you do not have adequate cellular coverage.
You cannot use this emergency service when:
· You travel outside the HondaLink service coverage
areas.
· There is a problem with the connecting devices,
such as the microphones, speakers, or the unit itself.

IMPORTANT: For vehicles equipped with HondaLink Assist, owner activation constitutes authorization for Honda to collect information from your vehicle needed to provide the service, and agreement to the Terms of Use at www.hondalink.com/ TermsAndConditions. In a crash, HondaLink Assist will attempt to notify emergency services but NEITHER Honda-PRO NOR ITS SERVICE PROVIDERS GUARANTEE THAT SUCH NOTIFICATION WILL OCCUR.
Honda reserves the right to terminate HondaLink Assist services at any time or for any reason, and in the future may not be able to provide services due to changes in, or obsolescence of, technology integral to the service or changes in governmental regulation.

You cannot operate other phone-related functions using the screen while talking to the operator. Select Hang Up to terminate the connection to your vehicle.
1Automatic collision notification If the unit fails to connect to the operator, it repeatedly tries until it succeeds.

Features

*1: Depending on your phone and adequate cellular coverage, your vehicle's location may not be sent to the operator.
426

To enable notification

1. Go to the phone settings screen.
2 Phone settings screen P. 412
2. Select HondaLink Assist. 3. Select Yes or No.

uuBluetooth® HandsFreeLink®uHondaLink® Assist
1To enable notification Setting options:
· Yes: Notification is available. · No: Disable the feature.

Features

427

Refuel Recommend

Models with navigation system
Your vehicle is equipped with a feature that automatically calculates when to refuel. This feature will notify you when refueling is recommended as well as enable you to search for gas stations that are located in the vicinity of your vehicle.
1. When it is time to refuel the vehicle, a notification is displayed and a notification icon is displayed in the header.
2. Touch the box that contains the icon.

1Refuel Recommend You can turn the Refuel Recommend function on and off. 2 Customized Features P. 363
When you turn off this feature, the refuel recommend notification will not display.
This feature can only be used when the gas tank fuel level is below 30 percent.

Notification icon

3. Select Find Gas Station Now.

If you select Find Gas Station Now or put more than 5 liters of gasoline into the gas tank, the notification for refueling will disappear. If you prefer not to be notified, select OFF in the settings for Refuel Recommend.

When you drive on a rough road or ascend or descend a hill for an extended period of time, the notification may disappear or may not be displayed at all.

Features

4. Choose a gas station from the search screen of the navigation system. u For instructions on how to use the navigation system, refer to the navigation system manual.
428

Driving
This chapter discusses driving and refueling.

Before Driving................................... 430 Towing a Trailer................................ 435 When Driving
Starting the Engine .......................... 436 Precautions While Driving................. 441 Continuously Variable Transmission ..... 442 Shifting .................................... 443, 445 ECON Button* ................................. 449 Drive Mode Switch*......................... 450 Auto Idle Stop.................................. 453 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System .............. 459 Agile Handling Assist ....................... 461
* Not available on all models

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) ....462 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) -
Required Federal Explanation ......... 467 Blind Spot Information System* ....... 469 Honda Sensing® ................................ 473 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM
(CMBSTM) ....................................... 476 Low Speed Braking Control*............ 488 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow ................................. 494 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS).... 516 Traffic Jam Assist ............................. 528 Road Departure Mitigation System... 537

Traffic Sign Recognition System ....... 545 Front Wide View Camera................. 551 Sonar Sensors* ................................ 553 Braking
Brake System ................................... 554
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ........... 560
Brake Assist System ......................... 561 Parking Your Vehicle........................ 562 Multi-View Rear Camera.................. 573 Refueling........................................... 575 Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions.... 578 Turbo Engine Vehicle*...................... 579

429

Before Driving

Driving Preparation
Check the following items before you start driving.

Exterior Checks
· Make sure there are no obstructions on the windows, door mirrors, exterior lights, or other parts of the vehicle. u Remove any frost, snow, or ice. u Remove any snow on the roof, as this can slip down and obstruct your field of vision while driving. If frozen solid, remove ice once it has softened. u When removing ice from around the wheels, be sure not to damage the wheel or wheel components.
· Make sure the hood is securely closed. u If the hood opens while driving, your front view will be blocked.
· Make sure the tires are in good condition. u Check air pressures, and check for damage and excessive wear.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 617
· Make sure there are no people or objects behind or around the vehicle. u There are blind spots from the inside.

1Exterior Checks
NOTICE When doors are frozen shut, use warm water around the door edges to melt any ice. Do not try to force them open, as this can damage the rubber trim around the doors. When done, wipe dry to avoid further freezing.
Do not pour warm water into the key cylinder. You will be unable to insert the key if the water freezes in the hole.
Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite flammable materials left under the hood, causing a fire. If you've parked your vehicle for an extended period, inspect and remove any debris that may have collected, such as dried grass and leaves that have fallen or have been carried in for use as a nest by a small animal. Also, check under the hood for leftover flammable materials after you or someone else has performed maintenance on your vehicle.

Driving

430

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation

Interior Checks
· Store or secure all items on board properly. u Carrying too much cargo, or improperly storing it, can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, stopping distance, and tires, and make it unsafe.
2 Maximum Load Limit P. 433
· Do not pile items higher than the seat height. u They can block your view and may be thrown forward in the event of sudden braking.
· Do not place anything in the front seat footwells. Make sure to secure the floor mat. u An object or unsecured floor mat can interfere with your brake and accelerator pedal operation while driving.
· If you have any animals on board, do not let them move around in the vehicle. u They may interfere with driving and a crash could occur.
· Securely close and lock all doors and the trunk.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 166
· Adjust your seating position properly. u Adjust the front head restraint, too.
2 Seats P. 198 2 Adjusting the Front Head Restraints P. 204
· Adjust the mirrors and steering wheel properly. u Adjust them while sitting in the proper driving position.
2 Mirrors P. 196 2 Adjusting the Steering Wheel P. 195

1Interior Checks
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Driving

Continued

431

uuBefore DrivinguDriving Preparation
· Be sure items placed on the floor behind the front seats cannot roll under the seats. u They can interfere with the driver's ability to operate the pedals, the operation of the seats, or the operation of the sensors under the seats.
· Everyone in the vehicle must fasten their seat belt.
2 Fastening a Seat Belt P. 47
· Make sure that the indicators in the instrument panel come on when you start the vehicle, and go off soon after. u Always have a dealer check the vehicle if a problem is indicated.
2 Indicators P. 88
432

Driving

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

Maximum Load Limit
The maximum load for your vehicle is 850 lbs (385 kg). See the Tire and Loading Information label attached to the driver's doorjamb.
Label Example

1Maximum Load Limit
3 WARNING
Overloading or improper loading can affect handling and stability and cause a crash in which you can be hurt or killed.
Follow all load limits and other loading guidelines in this manual.

This figure includes the total weight of all occupants, cargo, and accessories, and the tongue load if you are towing a trailer.

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all accessories and all cargo.
2 Specifications P. 676, 678

Driving

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit (1) Locate the statement "The combined weight of occupants and
cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on your vehicle's placard. (2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle. (3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs. (4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if the "XXX" amount equals 1,400 lbs. and there will be five 150 lb. passengers in your vehicle, the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs. (1,400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs.)

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The maximum allowable weight of the vehicle axle.
2 Specifications P. 676, 678

Continued

433

uuBefore DrivinguMaximum Load Limit

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in step 4.
(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.

1Maximum Load Limit
Towing a Trailer: See Towing a Trailer to determine whether your vehicle is designed to tow a trailer.
2 Towing a Trailer P. 435

In addition, the total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, accessories, cargo, and trailer tongue load must not exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) or the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR). Both are on a label on the driver's doorjamb.

Load Limits Example

Example1

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 2 = 300 lbs (68 kg x 2 = 136 kg)

Cargo Weight 550 lbs (249 kg)

Driving

Example2

Max Load 850 lbs (385 kg)

Passenger Weight 150 lbs x 5 = 750 lbs (68 kg x 5 = 340 kg)

Cargo Weight 100 lbs (45 kg)

434

Towing a Trailer
Your vehicle is not designed to tow a trailer. Attempting to do so can void your warranties.
Towing Behind a Motorhome
Your vehicle is not designed to be towed behind a motor home. If your vehicle needs to be towed in an emergency, refer to the emergency towing information.
2 Emergency Towing P. 670
435

Driving

When Driving
Starting the Engine
Electric Parking Brake Switch Brake Pedal

1. Make sure the parking brake is applied. u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.

1Starting the Engine
Keep your foot firmly on the brake pedal when starting the engine.
The engine is harder to start in cold weather and in thinner air found at altitudes above 8,000 feet (2,400 meters).

2. Check that the transmission is in (P, then depress the brake pedal. u Although it is possible to start the vehicle in (N, it is safer to start it in (P.

When starting the engine in cold weather, turn off all electrical accessories such as the lights, climate control system, and rear defogger in order to reduce battery drain.
If you live in a region where winter is extremely cold, an engine block heater will improve starting and warming of the engine. Consult a dealer for details.
If the exhaust system sounds abnormal or you can smell exhaust gas inside the vehicle, have your vehicle checked by a dealer. There may be a problem with the engine or exhaust system.

3. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button without depressing the accelerator pedal.

Bring the remote key close to the ENGINE START/ STOP button if the battery in the remote key is weak.
2 If the Remote Key Battery is Weak P. 649
The engine may not start if the remote key is subjected to strong radio waves.

Do not hold the ENGINE START/STOP button to start the engine.
If the engine does not start, wait at least 30 seconds before starting the engine again.

The immobilizer system protects your vehicle from theft. If an improperly coded device is used, the engine's fuel system is disabled.
2 Immobilizer System P. 173

Driving

436

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Remote Engine Start*
You can remotely start the engine using the remote key.

To start the engine

Press the

button, then press and hold

the

button.

Some exterior lights flash once.

Go within the range, and try again.

LED: Blinks when any button is pressed.

1Remote Engine Start*
3 WARNING
Carbon monoxide gas is toxic and can rapidly accumulate in closed or even partly enclosed areas.
Breathing it can cause unconsciousness and even kill you.
Never use the remote engine starter with the vehicle parked in a garage or other areas with limited ventilation.

Driving

Some exterior lights flash six times if the engine starts successfully.

Exterior lights will not flash if the engine does not start.

The remote engine start may violate local laws. Before using the remote engine start, check your local laws.
If there are buildings and obstacles between your vehicle and the remote, the range will be reduced. This distance may vary by external electrical interference.

When started remotely, the engine automatically shuts off after 10 minutes of idling

and/or the brake pedal and ENGINE START/STOP button have not been pressed

simultaneously.

To extend the run time for another 10 minutes during the first run, press the

button, then press and hold the

button.

u Some exterior lights flash six times if a 10-minute extension request was

transmitted successfully.

* Not available on all models

Continued

437

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

To stop the engine

Go within the range, and try again.

The exterior lights will not flash when the remote is out of the keyless access system range. The engine will not stop.

Press and hold the button for one
second.

The exterior lights flash once if the engine stops successfully.

1Remote Engine Start*
The engine may not start by the remote engine start
if:
· You have disabled a remote engine start setting
using the driver information interface or audio/
information screen. 2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
· The power mode is not in VEHICLE OFF. · The transmission is in a position other than (P. · The hood is open, or any door or the trunk is
unlocked.
· You have already used the remote twice to start
the engine.
· Another registered remote key is in the vehicle. · There is any antenna failure. · The door is unlocked with the built-in key. · The engine oil pressure is low. · The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. · The security system alarm is not set.

Driving

438 * Not available on all models

* Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine
1Remote Engine Start*
The engine may stop while it is running if:
· You do not start the vehicle within 10 minutes of
starting the engine with the remote key.
· The engine is stopped by using the remote key. · The security system alarm is not set. · The door is unlocked with the built-in key. · The hood is open, or any door, or the trunk is
unlocked.
· You press the shift lever release button. · The engine coolant temperature is extremely high. · The battery is low. · The engine oil pressure is low. · The malfunction indicator lamp comes on if there is
a problem with the emissions control systems.
While the engine is running, the vehicle will automatically precondition inside the vehicle. When it is cold outside:
· The defroster is activated at a moderately warm
temperature.
· The rear defogger, heated door mirrors*, front seat
heaters* and heated steering wheel* are activated. 2 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror* Button P. 192 2 Front Seat Heaters* P. 220 2 Heated Steering Wheel* P. 219

Driving

Continued

439

uuWhen DrivinguStarting the Engine

Starting to Drive

When the engine was started using the

button on the remote key

1. Depress and hold the brake pedal, then press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

When the engine was started in any case
2. Keeping your right foot on the brake pedal, put the transmission into (D. Select (R when reversing.
3. With the parking brake applied, release the brake pedal and gently depress the accelerator pedal. u Make sure the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.
2 Parking Brake P. 554

Hill start assist system Hill start assist keeps the brake engaged briefly to help prevent the vehicle from rolling on inclines as you move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator.
Put the transmission into (D, (S *, or (L * when facing uphill, or (R when facing downhill, then release the brake pedal.

Stopping the Engine
You can turn the engine off when the vehicle is completely stopped. 1. Put the transmission into (P. 2. Press the ENGINE START/STOP button.

1Starting to Drive

When the engine was started using the the remote key

button on

The engine stops when the transmission is taken out of (P before the ENGINE START/STOP button is pressed. Follow step 1 when starting to drive.

You can also release the parking brake by pressing the electric parking brake switch while depressing the brake pedal. When facing downhill, you can start your vehicle more smoothly by manually releasing it with the electric parking brake switch than by releasing it with the accelerator pedal.
1Hill start assist system
Hill start assist may not prevent the vehicle from rolling downhill on a very steep or slippery slope, and will not operate on small inclines.

Hill start assist is not a replacement for the parking brake.

Hill start assist will operate even when VSA® is switched off.
1Stopping the Engine
The power mode will automatically turn to VEHICLE OFF about 20 minutes after the following conditions have been met:
· A door has been opened, such as when leaving the
vehicle.
· The transmission is in (P. · The driver's seat belt is not fastened.

Driving

440 * Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguPrecautions While Driving

Precautions While Driving
In Rain
Avoid driving in deep water and on flooded roads. This can damage the engine or driveline, or cause electrical component failure.
Other Precautions
If there is a strong impact with something under the vehicle, stop in a safe location. Check the underside of the vehicle for damage or any fluid leaks.

1Precautions While Driving
NOTICE Do not operate the shift lever while pressing the accelerator pedal. You could damage the transmission.
NOTICE If you repeatedly turn the steering wheel at an extremely low speed, or hold the steering wheel in the full left or right position for a while, the electric power steering (EPS) system heats up. The system goes into a protective mode, and limits its performance. The steering wheel becomes harder and harder to operate. Once the system cools down, the EPS system is restored. Repeated operation under these conditions can eventually damage the system.

If the power mode is set to ACCESSORY while driving, the engine will shut down and all steering and brake power assist functions will stop, making it difficult to control the vehicle.
Do not select (N while driving as you will lose engine braking (and acceleration) performance.

During the first 600 miles (1,000 km) of operation, avoid sudden acceleration or full throttle operation so as not to damage the engine or powertrain.

Avoid hard braking for the first 200 miles (300 km) after purchasing your new vehicle or replacing the brake pads or rotors, to allow for proper break-in.

Driving

Continued

441

uuWhen DrivinguContinuously Variable Transmission
1Precautions While Driving NOTICE The following can damage the under spoiler:
· Parking the vehicle by a parking block · Parallel parking along the road shoulder · Driving towards the bottom of a hill · Driving up or down to a different surface level
(such as a road shoulder)
· Driving on a rutted or bumpy road · Driving on a road with potholes
Continuously Variable Transmission
Creeping
When the engine runs at higher idle speeds, the creeping force increases. Keep the brake pedal firmly depressed when stopped.
Kickdown
Quickly depressing the accelerator pedal while driving uphill may cause the transmission to drop to a lower ratio, unexpectedly increasing vehicle speed. Depress the accelerator pedal carefully, especially on slippery roads and curves.
442

Driving

Models without paddle shifter
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift positions
Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse Used when reversing
Neutral Transmission is not locked
Drive Used for normal driving

uuWhen DrivinguShifting
1Shifting You cannot change the power mode from ON to VEHICLE OFF unless the shift position is in (P.
The vehicle may move very slightly even in (N while the engine is cold. Depress the brake pedal firmly and, when necessary, apply the parking brake.

Release Button

Drive (S)
Used:
For better acceleration To increase engine braking When going up or down hills
Low Used to further increase engine braking Used when going up or down hills

Driving

Continued

443

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Operation

Shift Position Indicator
(Transmission System Indicator)

Tachometer's red zone
Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift. Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.
Press the shift lever release button and shift.

1Shift Operation
NOTICE When you change the shift position from (D to (R and vice versa, come to a complete stop and keep the brake pedal depressed. Operating the shift lever before the vehicle has come to a complete standstill can damage the transmission.
Use the shift position indicator to check the lever position before pulling away.
If the transmission system indicator blinks when driving, in any shift position, there is a problem with the transmission. Avoid sudden acceleration and have the transmission checked by a dealer as soon as possible.
The fuel supply may be cut off if you drive at engine speeds in or over the tachometer's red zone (engine speed limit). If this happens, you may experience a slight jolt.
It may not be possible to operate the shift lever if the brake pedal is applied while the shift lever release button is held down. Depress the brake pedal first.
When shifting positions in extremely low temperatures (-22°F/-30°C), there may be a short delay before the shift position is displayed. Always confirm you are in the correct shift position before driving.

Driving

444

Models with paddle shifter
Shifting
Change the shift position in accordance with your driving needs.
Shift positions

Release Button

Park Used when parking or starting the engine
Reverse Used when reversing
Neutral Transmission is not locked
Drive Used: For normal driving When temporarily driving in the
7-speed manual shift mode When driving in the 7-speed
manual shift mode (when driving in SPORT mode)

Driving

Continued

445

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

Shift Operation

Models with A-type meter

Tachometer's red zone

Models with B-type meter

Shift Position Indicator (Transmission System Indicator)

M (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode) Indicator/Shift Indicator
Press the shift lever release button and shift. Depress the brake pedal and press the shift lever release button to shift.
Shift without pressing the shift lever release button.

Driving

446

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode
Use the paddle shifters to change between 1st and 7th speeds without releasing your hands from the steering wheel. The transmission switches to the 7-speed manual shift mode when you pull a paddle shifter while driving. This mode is useful when engine braking is needed.
When the transmission is in (D: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode temporarily, and the number is displayed in the shift indicator. The 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled automatically if you drive at constant speed or accelerate, and the number in the shift indicator goes off. You can cancel this mode by pulling the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds. The 7-speed manual shift mode is especially useful when reducing the vehicle speed temporarily before making a turn.
When the transmission is in (D with SPORT mode: The shift mode goes into the 7-speed manual shift mode. The M indicator and the speed number are displayed in the shift indicator. As the vehicle speed slows down, the transmission automatically shifts down accordingly. When the vehicle comes to a stop, it automatically shifts down into 1st.

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode
In the 7-speed manual shift mode, the transmission shifts up or down by operating either paddle shifter under the following conditions: Shift Up: The engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the higher speed position. Shift Down: The engine speed reaches the highest threshold of the lower speed position.
When the engine speed reaches near the tachometer's red zone, the transmission shifts up automatically. When the engine speed reaches the lowest threshold of the selected speed position, the transmission shifts down automatically.
Operating the paddle shifters on slippery surfaces may cause the tires to lock up. In this case, the 7speed manual shift mode is canceled and goes back to the normal (D driving mode.

Driving

If the vehicle speed increases and the engine speed reaches near the tachometer's red zone, the transmission automatically shifts up.

You can only pull away in 1st speed.

When canceling the 7-speed manual shift mode, use the drive mode switch to select other than SPORT mode or pull the (+ paddle shifter for a few seconds. When the 7-speed manual shift mode is canceled, the M indicator and shift indicator will turn off.

Continued

447

uuWhen DrivinguShifting

7-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation

(- Paddle Shifter (Shift down)

(+ Paddle Shifter (Shift up)

17-Speed Manual Shift Mode Operation
Each paddle shift operation makes a single speed change. To change continuously, release the paddle shifter before pulling it again for the next speed.
The shift indicator blinks when you cannot shift up or down. It indicates that your vehicle speed is not in its allowable shifting range. Slightly accelerate to shift up and decelerate to shift down while the indicator is blinking.

Downshifting when pulling the (- paddle shifter (Changes to lower speed
number)

Upshifting when pulling the (+ paddle shifter (Changes to higher speed number)

Driving

448

ECON Button*

uuWhen DrivinguECON Button*
1ECON Button* While in the ECON mode, the climate control system has greater temperature fluctuation. Due to emergency brakes operation or driving conditions, you may not be able to change the mode.

ECON Mode Indicator

ECON Button

The ECON button turns the ECON mode on and off. The ECON mode helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission and climate control system.

Driving

* Not available on all models

449

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch*

Drive Mode Switch*
Constantly controls your vehicle's engine, transmission, EPS, brakes and VSA® according to the mode you select. You can choose between three modes, SPORT mode, NORMAL mode and ECON mode by using the drive mode switch. The current mode is displayed on the driver information interface, and each mode will appear differently. If you were driving in SPORT or NORMAL mode last time, NORMAL mode is selected when you set the power mode to ON. If you were driving in ECON mode last time, ECON mode is selected when you set the power mode to ON.

1Drive Mode Switch*
The mode may not be able to be changed when:
· The vehicle is turning. · The VSA® system is activating. · There is a problem with the engine, the
transmission, the VSA®, and the EPS.

SPORT Mode

NORMAL Mode

Driving

Drive Mode Switch
450 * Not available on all models

ECON Mode

SPORT Mode

Enhances heightened throttle response.

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch*

NORMAL Mode

Balances handling and riding in all environments.

Driving

Continued

451

uuWhen DrivinguDrive Mode Switch*

ECON Mode

Helps you improve your fuel economy by adjusting the performance of the engine, transmission and climate control system.

Driving

452

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

Auto Idle Stop
To help maximize fuel economy, the engine automatically stops when the vehicle comes to a stop, depending on environmental and vehicle operating conditions. The indicator (green) comes on at this time.
The environmental and vehicle conditions that impact Auto Idle Stop system operation are varied.
2 Auto Idle Stop Activates When: P. 455

1Auto Idle Stop
The 12-volt battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a 12-volt battery other than this specified type may shorten the 12-volt battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the 12-volt battery, make sure to select the specified type. Ask a dealer for more details.

Auto Idle Stop Indicator (Green)

The engine then restarts once the vehicle is about to move again, and the indicator (green) goes off.
2 The Engine Automatically Restarts When: P. 457
The Auto Idle Stop suspend indicator comes on and a message appears on the gauge when the Auto Idle Stop system cannot be activated.
2 Indicators P. 88

The duration of the Auto Idle Stop operation:
· Increase in the ECON mode, compared to when the
ECON mode is off, with climate control in use. 2 ECON Button* P. 449 2 Drive Mode Switch* P. 450

Auto Idle Stop Suspend Indicator

If the driver's door is opened while the indicator (green) comes on, a buzzer sounds to notify you that the Auto Idle Stop function is in operation.

A message associated with Auto Idle Stop appears on the driver information interface.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

453

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF

Auto Idle Stop OFF Indicator

To turn the Auto Idle Stop system off, press this button. The Auto Idle Stop system stops.
u Auto Idle Stop system will stop, the indicator will come on and a message appears on the gauge.

1Auto Idle Stop System ON/OFF If you turn off the Auto Idle Stop system while it is activated, the engine will restart.
If you hold the Auto Idle Stop OFF button, you can disable idle stop messages.

The Auto Idle Stop system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

Driving

454

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
The vehicle stops with the transmission in (D and the brake pedal depressed. When you put the transmission into (P quickly with depressing the brake pedal, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate, even if the brake pedal is released.
u If you depress the brake pedal, the engine may automatically restart.
Auto Idle Stop does not activate when: · The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. · The driver's seat belt is not fastened. · The engine is adequately not warmed up or coolant temperature is high. · The transmission fluid temperature is low or high. · The vehicle comes to a stop again before the vehicle speed reaches 3 mph (5
km/h) after the engine starts. · The vehicle is stopped on a steep incline. · The transmission is in a position other than (D. · The engine is started with the hood open.
u Turn off the engine. Close the hood before you restart the engine to activate Auto Idle Stop.
· The battery charge is low. · The internal temperature of the battery is 41°F (5°C) or less. · The climate control system is in use, and the outside temperature is below -4°F
(-20°C) or over 104°F (40°C). · The climate control system is in use, and the temperature is set to Hi or Lo. · is ON (indicator on).
Models with Drive Mode Switch
· The drive mode is in the SPORT mode.

1Auto Idle Stop Activates When:
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated. If the hood is opened, the engine will not restart automatically. In this case, restart the engine with the ENGINE START/STOP button.
2 Starting the Engine P. 436
When Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow is in operation, the vehicle stops without depressing the brake pedal and Auto Idle Stop may activate. In such cases, the engine may restart if you change the shift position other than (D.
Pressing the ENGINE START/STOP button causes the engine to no longer restarts automatically. Follow the standard procedure to start the engine.
2 Starting the Engine P. 436

Driving

Continued

455

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Auto Idle Stop may not activate when: · The vehicle is stopped by braking suddenly. · The steering wheel is operated. · The vehicle is repeatedly accelerated and decelerated at a low speed. · The fan speed is high. · The climate control system is in use, and there is a significant difference between
the set temperature and the actual interior temperature. · The climate control system is in use, and humidity in the interior is high.
1.5 L engine models
· Altitude is high.
456

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop

The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
· The brake pedal is released (without the automatic brake hold system activated). · The accelerator pedal is depressed (with the automatic brake hold system
activated).
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 558
· When the transmission is put into (P from (D or (N on a slope.

1The Engine Automatically Restarts When:
If you are using an electronic device during Auto Idle Stop, the device may temporarily be turned off when the engine restarts.

Driving

The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when: · The Auto Idle Stop OFF button is pressed. · The steering wheel is operated. · The transmission is put into (R, (S *, or (L *, or when it is set from (N to (D.
u If you put the transmission into (P after the Auto Idle Stop activates, the Auto Idle Stop continues to operate. In this case, the engine restarts when you depress the brake pedal.
· The pressure on the brake pedal is reduced and the vehicle starts moving while stopped on an incline.
· The pressure on the brake pedal is repeatedly applied and released slightly during a stop.
· The battery charge becomes low. · The accelerator pedal is depressed. · The driver's seat belt is unlatched. · is ON (indicator on). · The climate control system is in use, and the difference between the set
temperature and actual interior temperature becomes significant. · The climate control system is being used to dehumidify the interior. · The vehicle ahead of you starts again when your vehicle stops automatically with
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow.
Models with Drive Mode Switch
· The SPORT mode is selected by using the drive mode switch.

1The engine restarts even if the brake pedal is depressed*1 when:
*1: With the automatic brake hold system activated, you can release the brake pedal while Auto Idle Stop is in operation.
If the automatic brake hold system has been turned off, or if there is a problem with the system, the engine will restart automatically when you release the brake pedal.
2 Automatic Brake Hold P. 558

* Not available on all models

Continued

457

uuWhen DrivinguAuto Idle Stop
Starting Assist Brake Function
Briefly keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal to restart the engine. This can keep your vehicle from unexpectedly moving while on an incline.
458

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
VSA® helps stabilize the vehicle during cornering if the vehicle turns more or less than what was intended. It also assists in maintaining traction on slippery surfaces. It does so by regulating engine output and selectively applying the brakes.

VSA® Operation
VSA® System Indicator
*1 *2

When VSA® activates, you may notice that the engine does not respond to the accelerator. You may also notice some noise from the hydraulic brake system. You will also see the indicator blink.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System
The VSA® may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire, and the air pressures as specified.
When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While this may not interfere with normal driving, have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

VSA® cannot enhance stability in all driving situations and does not control the entire braking system. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter
* Not available on all models

The main function of the VSA® system is generally known as Electronic Stability Control (ESC). The system also includes a traction control function.

Continued

459

uuWhen DrivinguVehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System

VSA® On and Off
VSA® OFF Indicator
*1 *2

This button is on the driver side control panel. To partially disable VSA® functionality/ features, press and hold it until you hear a beep.
Your vehicle will have normal braking and cornering ability, but traction control function will be less effective.
To restore VSA® functionality/features, press the (VSA® OFF) button until you hear a beep.
VSA® is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®), aka Electronic Stability Control (ESC), System In certain unusual conditions when your vehicle gets stuck in shallow mud or fresh snow, it may be easier to free it with the VSA® temporarily switched off.
When the button is pressed, the traction control function becomes less effective. This allows for the wheels to spin more freely at low speed. You should only attempt to free your vehicle with the VSA® off if you are not able to free it when the VSA® is on.
Immediately after freeing your vehicle, be sure to switch VSA® on again. We do not recommend driving your vehicle with the VSA® system switched off.
You may hear a motor sound coming from the engine compartment while system checks are being performed immediately after starting the engine or while driving. This is normal.

Driving

460

*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter

uuWhen DrivinguAgile Handling Assist

Agile Handling Assist
Lightly brakes the front wheels, as needed, when you turn the steering wheel, and helps support the vehicle's stability and performance during cornering.

1Agile Handling Assist
The agile handling assist cannot enhance stability in all driving situations. You still need to drive and corner at speeds appropriate for the conditions and always leave a sufficient margin of safety.

When the VSA® system indicator comes on and stays on while driving, the agile handling assist does not activate.

You may hear a sound coming from the engine compartment while the agile handling assist is activated. This is normal.

Driving

461

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

Instead of directly measuring the pressure in each tire, the TPMS on this vehicle

monitors and compares the rolling radius and rotational characteristics of each

wheel and tire while you are driving to determine if one or more tires are

significantly under-inflated.

Models with A-type meter

This will cause the low tire pressure/TPMS

Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

indicator to come on and a message to appear on the gauge.

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The system does not monitor the tires when driving at low speed.
Conditions such as low ambient temperature and altitude change directly affect tire pressure and can trigger the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator to come on.
Tire pressure checked and inflated in:
· Warm weather can become under-inflated in
colder weather.
· Cold weather can become over-inflated in warmer
weather. The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator will not come on as a result of over inflation.

Models with B-type meter Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator

The TPMS may not function properly if tire type and size are mixed. Make sure to use the same size and type of tire.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 617
The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on with a delay or may not come on at all when:
· You rapidly accelerate, decelerate, or turn the
steering wheel.
· You drive on snowy or slippery roads. · Tire chains are used.

The low tire pressure/TPMS indicator may come on
under the following conditions:
· A compact spare tire is used. · There is a heavier and uneven load on the tires than
the condition at calibration.
· Tire chains are used.

Driving

462

TPMS Calibration
You must start TPMS calibration every time you: · Adjust the pressure in one or more tires. · Rotate the tires. · Replace one or more tires.
Before calibrating the TPMS: · Set the cold tire pressure in all four tires.
2 Checking Tires P. 617
Make sure: · The vehicle is at a complete stop. · The transmission is in (P. · The power mode is in ON.

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

1Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

1TPMS Calibration
TPMS cannot be calibrated if a compact spare tire is installed. The calibration process requires approximately 30 minutes of cumulative driving at speeds between 31-62 mph (50-100 km/h). During this period, if power mode is set to ON and the vehicle is not moved within 45 seconds, you may notice the low tire pressure indicator comes on briefly. This is normal and indicates that the calibration process is not yet complete.

If the tire chains are installed, remove them before calibrating the TPMS.

If the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on even when the properly inflated specified regular tires are installed, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Continued

We recommend that the tires be replaced with the same brand, model, and size as the originals. Ask a dealer for details.

Driving

463

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with color audio system
You can calibrate the system from the settings on the driver information interface. 1. Press the (home) button, to select
Settings, then press the left selector wheel. u Vehicle settings appears on the display. 2. Roll the left selector wheel. u TPMS calibration appears on the
display.
464

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
3. Press the left selector wheel. u The display switches to the customization setup screen, where you can select Cancel or Calibrate.
4. Roll the left selector wheel and select Calibrate, then press the left selector wheel. u Calibration started screen appears, then the display returns to the customization menu screen.
· If the Calibration failed to start message appears, repeat step 4.
· The calibration process finishes automatically.

Driving

Continued

465

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)
Models with Display Audio
You can calibrate the system from the customized feature on the audio/information screen. 1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the button. 3. Select Vehicle Settings. 4. Select TPMS Calibration. 5. Select Calibrate or Cancel. · If the Calibration Failed To Start.
message appears, repeat step 5. · The calibration process finishes
automatically.
466

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
U.S. models
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label.
(If your vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale

Driving

when one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure.
Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle's handling and stopping ability.

Continued

467

uuWhen DrivinguTire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) - Required Federal Explanation
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons, including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly.
Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly.
468

Driving

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*

Blind Spot Information System*
When the system detects vehicles approaching from behind in adjacent lanes, the appropriate indicator comes on, providing assistance when you change lanes.

How the System works

The system activates when your vehicle is moving forward at about 20 mph (32 km/h) or above.

Radar Sensors : underneath the rear bumper corners

: Alert zone 1 : Alert zone 2

Alert zone range A: Approx. 1.6 ~ 10 feet (0.5 ~ 3 meters) from vehicle side. B: Approx. 10 feet (3 meters) from rear bumper. C: Approx. 10 ~ 82 feet (3 ~ 25 meters) behind from rear bumper. (The faster the approaching vehicle, the further away it will be detected.)

1Blind Spot Information System*
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the blind spot information system has limitations. Always look in your mirrors, to either side of your vehicle, and behind you for other vehicles before changing lanes. Overreliance on the blind spot information system may result in a collision.
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer in the following situations:
· The rear bumper or area around the radar sensors
is strongly impacted.
· The indicator does not come on even if a vehicle in
the alert zone should have been detected.
· The rear bumper or any system components need
to be repaired.
If the rear bumper or any system components are repaired, the system will revert to alert zone 1 only until it is able to adapt and expand to alert zone 1 and 2.

The initially set alert zone is alert zone 1. Over time, after the vehicle has been driven on straight roads with traffic and roadside objects, the system will adapt and expand the alert zone (alert zone 1 and 2).

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

469

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*

When the system detects a vehicle

Comes On

Blind spot information system alert indicator: Located on the outside rearview mirror on

both sides.

Blinks

Comes on when: · A vehicle approaches you from behind to
overtake you at a speed difference of no more than about 31 mph (50 km/h). · You pass a vehicle at a speed difference of no more than about 12 mph (20 km/h).

Blinks and a beeper sounds when: You use the turn signal lever to signal a turn in the direction of the detected vehicle while the blind spot information system alert indicator is on.
u The beeper sounds three times.

1Blind Spot Information System*
For proper blind spot information system operation:
· Always keep the rear bumper and area around the
radar sensors clean.
· Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with
labels or stickers of any kind.
The system is for your convenience only. Even if an object is within the alert zone, the following situations may occur:
· The blind spot information system alert indicator
does not come on and the message Blind spot information system not available appears on the driver information interface.
· The blind spot information system alert indicator
may come on even with the message displayed.

Driving

470 * Not available on all models

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*

Blind Spot Information System On and Off

Models with A-type meter
Left Selector Wheel

When you turn the blind spot information system on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch.

Models with A-type meter
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the and push it.

symbol

Safety Support Switch
Models with B-type meter
Right Selector Wheel

Models with B-type meter
2. Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it. u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off.
u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.

1Blind Spot Information System*
You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.
2 Driver Information Interface P. 113 2 Driver Information Interface (Right Side
Area) P. 138
You can change the settings for the blind spot information system.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

The blind spot information system will stay on the previously selected on (checked) or off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.

Safety Support Switch

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

471

uuWhen DrivinguBlind Spot Information System*
Blind Spot Information System Conditions and Limitations
The blind spot information system alert indicator may not come on under the following conditions: · There is a large speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle in the
adjacent lane. · A vehicle is parked in a side lane. · An object not detected by the radar sensors approaches or passes your vehicle. · The vehicle driving in the adjacent lane is a motorcycle or other small vehicle.
The blind spot information system may not operate correctly under the following conditions: · Making a turn at an intersection. · Objects (guard rails, poles, trees, etc.) are detected. · An object that does not reflect radio waves well or a motorcycle, is in the alert
zone. · Driving on a curved road. · A vehicle is moving from a far lane to the adjacent lane. · The system picks up signal interference such as other radar sensors from another
vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby. · The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors is covered by dirt, mud,
snow, ice, etc. · The rear bumper or the area around the radar sensors has been damaged or
deformed. · In bad weather (heavy rain, snow, and fog). · Making a short turn or driving on a bumpy road that slightly tilts the vehicle.
472

Driving

Honda Sensing®
Models without Low Speed Braking Control
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of two distinctly different kinds of sensors: the sonar sensors located in the front and rear bumper and a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Models without Low Speed Braking Control
Honda Sensing® is a driver support system which employs the use of a front wide view camera mounted to the interior side of the windshield, behind the rearview mirror.
Honda Sensing® has following functions.
The functions which do not require switch operations to activate · Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) 2 P. 476 · Low Speed Braking Control* 2 P. 488 · Road Departure Mitigation System 2 P. 537 · Traffic Sign Recognition System 2 P. 545
The functions which require switch operations to activate · Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow 2 P. 494 · Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) 2 P. 516 · Traffic Jam Assist 2 P. 528

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

473

uuHonda Sensing®u

Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/ Traffic Jam Assist

Button

CANCEL Button

Button Press to activate standby mode for ACC with Low Speed Follow. Or press to cancel the system.

Interval Button

LKAS Button

LKAS Button Press to activate standby mode for LKAS and Traffic Jam Assist. Or press to cancel these systems.

RES/+/SET/- Switch

RES/+/SET/- Switch Press the RES/+/SET/- switch up to resume the ACC with Low Speed Follow or increase the vehicle speed. Press the RES/+/SET/- switch down to set the ACC with Low Speed Follow or decrease the vehicle speed.
Interval Button Press to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow following-interval.

CANCEL Button Press to cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Driving

474

Gauge Content
Models with A-type meter
Models with B-type meter
6

You can see the current state of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) and Traffic Jam Assist.
6 a Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to be activated.
· Green: The system is on. · White: The system is standby. · Amber: There is a problem with the system.
b Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist is ready to be activated.
· Green: The system is on. · White: The system is standby. · Amber: There is a problem with the system. c Indicates that LKAS or Traffic Jam Assist is
activated and whether or not traffic lane lines are detected. · Green lines: The system is on. · White lines: Traffic lane lines are detected. · Amber line: Lane departure is detected. d Indicates whether or not a vehicle is detected ahead.
Models with B-type meter
· Control target vehicle: White and outlined in green
· Outside of control target vehicle: Gray e Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow
shows the set vehicle speed. f Indicates that ACC with Low Speed Follow
shows the set vehicle interval.

uuHonda Sensing®u
475

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
The system can assist you when it determines there is a possibility of your vehicle colliding with a vehicle ahead from behind, an oncoming vehicle in front, a pedestrian, or someone riding a bicycle (moving bicycle). The CMBSTM is designed to alert you when the potential for a collision is determined, as well as assist in reducing speed, avoiding collisions, and reducing collision severity.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Important Safety Reminder The CMBSTM is designed to reduce the severity of an unavoidable collision. It does not prevent collisions nor stop the vehicle automatically. It is still your responsibility to operate the brake pedal and steering wheel appropriately according to the driving conditions.

The CMBSTM may not activate or may not detect a vehicle in front of your vehicle under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 481

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551

When the CMBSTM is activated, it will continue to operate even if the accelerator pedal is partially depressed. However, it will be canceled if the accelerator pedal is fully depressed.

Driving

476

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

How the system works
When to use
A front wide view camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

1How the system works
The camera in the CMBSTM is also designed to detect pedestrians. However, this pedestrian detection feature may not activate or may not detect a pedestrian in front of your vehicle under certain conditions. Refer to the ones indicating the pedestrian detection limitations from the list.
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 481

The system starts monitoring the roadway ahead when your vehicle speed is about 3 mph (5 km/h) and will search for a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle in front of you.
The CMBSTM activates when: The speed difference between your vehicle and a vehicle, pedestrian, or moving
bicycle detected in front of you becomes about 3 mph (5 km/h) and over with a chance of a collision. Your vehicle drives at about 18 mph (30 km/h) or less and there is a chance of in frontal collision with a detected oncoming vehicle when you turn left at an intersection. Your vehicle speed is about 62 mph (100 km/h) or less and the system determines there is a chance of a collision with: - An oncoming or stationary vehicle detected in front of you. - A pedestrian or moving bicycle detected in front of you.
The CMBSTM will be canceled when your vehicle stops or the system determines there no longer is the potential for a collision. The CMBSTM may also be canceled when a driver operates the steering wheel and the brake or accelerator pedal to avoid a collision.

Driving

Continued

477

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
When the system activates
The system provides visual and audible alerts of a possible collision, and stops if the collision is avoided. u Take appropriate action to prevent a collision (apply the brakes, change
lanes, etc.) Visual Alerts

Audible Alert

Beep

You can change the distance (Long/Normal/Short) between vehicles at which the system's earliest collision alert will come on through the driver information interface* or audio/information screen* setting options.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Driving

478 * Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Collision Alert Stages
The system has three alert stages for a possible collision. However, depending on circumstances, the CMBSTM may not go through all of the stages before initiating the last stage.

Distance between vehicles

The sensors detect a vehicle

CMBSTM Audible & Visual WARNINGS

Braking

Normal

When in Long, visual and audible

Stage one

Long Short

There is a risk of a collision with the vehicle ahead of you.

alerts come on at a longer distance from a vehicle ahead than in Normal setting, and in Short, at a shorter

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

distance than in Normal.

Stage two
Stage three

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

The risk of a collision has increased, time to respond is reduced.

Your Vehicle

Vehicle Ahead

The CMBSTM determines that a collision is unavoidable.

Visual and audible alerts.

Lightly applied Forcefully applied

Driving

Continued 479

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

CMBSTM On and Off
Models with A-type meter
Left Selector Wheel
Safety Support Switch
Models with B-type meter
Right Selector Wheel
Safety Support Switch

When you turn the CMBSTM on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch.
Models with A-type meter
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the symbol and push it.
Models with B-type meter
2. Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it. u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off. u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.
The CMBSTM is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) You cannot turn the CMBSTM off while driving.
The CMBSTM may automatically shut off, and the safety support indicator (amber) will come and stay on under certain conditions:
2 CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations P. 481
The CMBSTM is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.
You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.
2 Driver Information Interface P. 113 2 Driver Information Interface (Right Side
Area) P. 138
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

480 * Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) will come on under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the CMBSTM functions.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551

1CMBSTM Conditions and Limitations
Have your vehicle checked by a dealer if you find any unusual behavior of the system (e.g., the warning message appears too frequently).

Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto vehicles, pedestrians, moving bicycles, or road
surfaces. · Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead. · Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles may not be illuminated).

Roadway conditions · Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads. · There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface. · Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.). · Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Driving

Continued

481

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Vehicle conditions · The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. · Tire chains are installed. · Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. · There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. · When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The suspension has been modified.
482

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)

Examples of limitations on the correct detection of the camera due to the condition of the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicles, pedestrians, or moving bicycles
· The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle ahead of you is too short.
· The vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle suddenly cuts in front of or jumps out in front of you.
· The bicycle is stopped. · The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways. · When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle
blends in with the background, preventing the system from recognizing them. · When several pedestrians or bicycles are moving ahead of you in a group. · When a pedestrian or moving bicycle crosses the road too quickly. · A pedestrian or moving bicycle approaches from the opposite direction. · The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you or oncoming vehicle are lit on one side
or not lit on either side in a dark place. · When part of a pedestrian (heads, limbs, etc.) is hidden by load. · When a pedestrian is bent over or squatting, when their hands are raised, or they
are running. · When the pedestrian is shorter than about 3.3 feet (1 meter) or taller than about
6.6 feet (2 meters) in height. · When the pedestrian is pushing a stroller or bicycle.

1Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) Make sure that all the tires are of the same specified size, type and brand, and that they are evenly worn. If you use tires of different sizes, types, brands, or degree of wear, the system may not work properly.
Do not modify the suspension. Altering the height of the vehicle may prevent the system from working properly.

Driving

Continued

483

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation · When the vehicle ahead of you is a motorcycle, wheelchair, or other specially-
shaped vehicle. · When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not
carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle. · When the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle
is not in front of the vehicle. · The speed difference between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you,
oncoming vehicle, pedestrian or moving bicycle is significantly large. · When the vehicle or moving bicycle in front of you slows suddenly. · When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel to avoid a collision. · When you approach the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrians or
moving bicycles while accelerating rapidly or operating the steering wheel (except when turning left at an intersection etc.)*1 · When the moving bicycle is a child-sized bicycle, folding bicycle, three-wheeler or other bicycle with small tires, or a long bicycle like a tandem bicycle. · When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you, oncoming vehicle, pedestrian, or moving bicycle. · When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high.

Driving

484

*1 : When there is a possibility of a frontal collision with the oncoming vehicle while turning left, the CMBSTM is activated. However, it may not be activated if you suddenly turn the steering wheel.

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
Automatic shutoff The CMBSTM may automatically shut itself off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on when: · You drive off-road or on a mountain road, or curved and winding road for an
extended period. · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Driving with the parking brake applied. · The camera temperature gets too high. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. · An abnormal tire condition is detected (incorrect tire size, flat tire, etc.). Once the conditions that caused the CMBSTM to shut off improve or are addressed (e.g., cleaning), the system comes back on.

Driving

Continued

485

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
With Little Chance of a Collision
Even if there is little chance of a collision, the CMBSTM may activate under the following conditions: · Your vehicle approaches or passes another vehicle that is making a left or right
turn. · Your vehicle approaches another vehicle ahead of you and you change lanes to
pass. · Your vehicle approaches another vehicle at an intersection, etc.
486

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uCollision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM)
· When passing through a low or narrow gate at a speed well over the speed limit. · When there are traffic signs or structures such as guard rails are beside the road
along a curve.
· When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where the oncoming vehicle is right in front of you.
· When approaching stationary vehicles or walls, such as when parking.
487

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

Low Speed Braking Control*
Using sonar sensors located on the front and rear bumpers, this system detects if there is danger of a potential collision with a wall or other obstacle during normal driving or when the accelerator pedal is depressed with too much force. The system then assists in avoiding collisions and reducing damage from impact through assistive braking and/or assistive driving power suppression.

1Low Speed Braking Control*
3 WARNING
The Low Speed Braking Control System cannot avoid all collisions and may not reduce damage in each situation where the accelerator is mistakenly or aggressively pressed. Overreliance on the system may result in a collision with serious injury or death. Always check your surroundings, your shift position, and your pedal use. Driver remains responsible for safely operating the vehicle.

If the Low Speed Braking Control activates in a situation where you do not want automatic brake application (such as when the vehicle is between two railroad crossing gates), simply press the brake pedal to deactivate the system and then continue to drive as intended.

Driving

488 * Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

How the System Works
Assistive braking Assistive braking provides a visual and audible alert when the vehicle is moving between approximately 1 and 6 mph (2 and 10 km/h) and there is the possibility of a collision with a detected wall or other obstacles, as well as providing assistance with braking.

Audible Alert

Beep

1Low Speed Braking Control*
For directions on the proper handling of the sonar sensors, please refer to the following page.
2 Sonar Sensors* P. 553
The vehicle will release the brake and start moving a few seconds after the system is activated. To keep the vehicle stopped, keep the brake pedal depressed or put the transmission into (P.
In order to prevent the system from activating when not needed, always turn it off during vehicle maintenance, when loading on ships, trucks, and so on, or when using a chassis dynamometer, free rollers for inspection or when washing the car in conveyor type car wash machine.

Driving

The vehicle applies brake

Driver

Stop

depresses

brake pedal

Remove brake after maintaining stationary position

If the only rear sensors are turned off using the parking sensor system, the assistive braking is not working when reversing.
2 Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 568

* Not available on all models

Continued

489

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

Assistive driving power suppression
When the vehicle is stopped or moving at less than 6 mph (10 km/h) and there is an obstacle such as a wall detected near the front of or back of the vehicle, if the accelerator pedal is depressed more than necessary, the system will inform you with a visual and audible alert. At the same time, the system will prevent sudden forward or backwards movement by limiting the output of the engine, then assistive braking will activate nearby the obstacle.

Beep

Audible Alert

Beep

Driving

Accidental depression of the accelerator/Limiting the output of the engine
Assistive driving power suppression will not activate in the following situations. When moving forward: When on a steep slope or the shift position is in (P, (R, or (N. When reversing: When on a steep slope or the shift position is in a position other than (R.
If the only rear sensors are turned off using the parking sensor system, the assistive driving power suppression is not working when reversing.
2 Turning off All Rear Sensors P. 568
490

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

System On and Off
Right Selector Wheel
Safety Support Switch

When you turn the system on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch. 2. Roll the right selector wheel to the
symbol and push it. u A message appears on the driver
information interface when the system turns on or off. u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.

1System On and Off
You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.
2 Driver Information Interface P. 113 2 Driver Information Interface (Right Side
Area) P. 138
The system may temporarily turn off after reconnecting the battery. The system will automatically turn ON after the vehicle has been moving at over 12 mph (20 km/h) for some time. If the system does not turn on, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

The system is turned on every time you start the engine, even if you turned it off the last time you drove the vehicle.

Driving

Continued

491

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*

Conditions for Cancellation
Conditions for assistive driving power suppression. · When the accelerator is no longer depressed. · When the accelerator is depressed for approximately four seconds. · When the brake pedal is depressed. · When the steering wheel is turned and a collision avoided.
Conditions for assistive braking cancellation. · A certain amount of time has passed since activation.

1Conditions for Cancellation
After Low Speed Braking Control has activated once, it will not activate again for the same obstacle. They can be activated again after driving for a certain distance after last activation.
Low Speed Braking Control activates separately when moving forward and reversing. (For example, if it activates when moving forward, it can be activated again immediately if reversing.) However, if assistive braking has been activated, in order to activate assistive driving power suppression again, it is necessary to drive for a certain distance to reset the system.

Low Speed Braking Control System Conditions and Limitations
The system may not operate correctly in the following conditions:
Examples of obstacles the sonar sensor cannot detect · Obstacles that do not reflect sound waves well, such as people, snow, cloth,
sponges, etc. · Thin obstacles such as fences, bicycles, sign posts, etc. · Short or small obstacles. · Obstacles immediately in front of the bumper. · Moving objects or obstacles that suddenly enter the road. · Obstacles that are not perpendicular to the ground.

Driving

492

uuHonda Sensing®uLow Speed Braking Control*
Examples of situations where the sonar sensor cannot detect obstacles · The sonar sensor is dirty (covered by snow, water, mud, etc.). · The vehicle is too hot or cold. · The steering wheel is turned sharply when approaching the obstacle at an angle.
Examples of other cases where the system may not work correctly · The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load or suspension modifications. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · Bad weather conditions such as heavy rain, fog, snow, sandstorms, etc. · The ambient temperature/humidity is too high or low. · When going down a very steep slope. · When close to other vehicles with sonar sensors or other objects that emit
ultrasonic waves.
Situations where the system may activate even without risk of a collision · When passing through short or narrow gates. · When driving on uneven surfaces, grassy areas, or places with steps. · When a sloped pillar or wall is protruding from a high position. · When there are obstacles next to the road. · When driving toward flags, curtains, tree branches, railroad crossing bars, etc. · When driving on flooded roads.
493

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Helps maintain a constant vehicle speed and a set following-interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of yours and, if the detected vehicle comes to a stop, can decelerate and stop your vehicle, without you having to keep your foot on the brake or the accelerator. When ACC with Low Speed Follow slows your vehicle by applying the brakes, your vehicle's brake lights will illuminate.
When to use
A front wide view camera is located behind the rearview mirror.
Vehicle speed for ACC with Low Speed Follow: A vehicle is detected ahead within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at speeds up to 90 mph (145 km/h). No vehicle is detected within ACC with Low Speed Follow range ACC with Low Speed Follow operates at the speed of 25 mph (40 km/h) or above.
Shift position for ACC with Low Speed Follow: In (D or (S *.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
3 WARNING
Improper use of ACC with Low Speed Follow can lead to a crash.
Use ACC with Low Speed Follow only when driving on expressways or freeways and in good road and weather conditions.
3 WARNING
ACC with Low Speed Follow has limited braking capability and may not stop your vehicle in time to avoid a collision with a vehicle that quickly stops in front of you.
Always be prepared to apply the brake pedal if the conditions require.
Important Reminder As with any system, there are limits to ACC with Low Speed Follow. Use the brake pedal whenever necessary, and always keep a safe interval between your vehicle and other vehicles.

Driving

494 * Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

How to activate the system
How to use

(white) is on in the gauge ACC with Low Speed Follow is ready to use.
Press the button on the steering wheel.

1Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 504
When not using ACC with Low Speed Follow: Turn off adaptive cruise by pressing the button.
Do not use ACC with Low Speed Follow under the following conditions:
· Driving in continuous stop and go traffic. · On roads with sharp turns. · On roads with toll collection facilities or other
objects between lanes of traffic, or in parking areas, or facilities with drive through access.
· On roads with bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).
It prevents the system from detecting the distance between your vehicle and vehicle ahead of you properly.
· On roads with slippery or icy surfaces. The wheels
may spin out and your vehicle may lose the control on the condition.
· On roads with steep uphill or steep downhill slopes. · On roads with undulating slopes.

Driving

Continued

495

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Set the Vehicle Speed
(green)
*1
*2

RES/+/SET/- Switch

1To Set the Vehicle Speed
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

On when ACC with Low Speed Follow begins

Up or down

When driving at about 25 mph (40 km/h) or above: Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/- switch up or down when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the switch, the set speed is fixed, and ACC with Low Speed Follow begins. When driving slower than about 25 mph (40 km/h): If the vehicle is moving and the brake pedal is not depressed, pressing the switch fixes the set speed to about 25 mph (40 km/h) regardless of current vehicle speed. If your vehicle is stationary, you can set the vehicle speed even with the brake pedal depressed.

You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 125, 150 2 Customized Features P. 363

Driving

*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter
496 * Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Models with A-type meter Set Vehicle Interval

When ACC with Low Speed Follow starts operating, the vehicle icon, interval bars and set speed appear on the gauge.

(green) Set Vehicle Speed Models with B-type meter Set Vehicle Interval

When you use ACC with Low Speed Follow, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

Driving

(green) Set Vehicle Speed

Continued

497

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

When in Operation
Models with B-type meter
Control target vehicle
Outside of control target vehicle Control target vehicle: White and outlined in green Outside of control target vehicle: Gray

There is a vehicle ahead ACC with Low Speed Follow monitors if a vehicle ahead of you enters the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. If a vehicle is detected doing so, the ACC with Low Speed Follow system maintains or decelerates your vehicle's set speed in order to keep the vehicle's set following-interval from the vehicle ahead.
2 To Set or Change Following-interval
P. 509

1When in Operation
If the vehicle ahead of you slows down abruptly, or if another vehicle cuts in front of you, a beeper sounds, a message appears on the driver information interface.

Depress the brake pedal, and keep an appropriate interval from the vehicle ahead.

Driving

498

ACC with Low Speed Follow Range: 394 ft. (120 m)

Beep

Models with A-type meter

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
When a vehicle whose speed is slower than your set speed is detected in front of you, your vehicle starts to slow down.

Models with B-type meter

Driving

A vehicle icon appears on the gauge.

Continued

499

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

There is no vehicle ahead
Models with A-type meter
A vehicle icon with line contour appears on the gauge. Models with B-type meter

Your vehicle maintains the set speed without having to keep your foot on the brake or accelerator pedal. If there previously was a vehicle detected ahead that kept your vehicle from traveling at the set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow accelerates your vehicle to the set speed, and then maintains it.
On steep downhill during ACC with Low Speed Follow, it brakes to inhibit excessive acceleration for maintaining the set speed. However the vehicle speed may become faster than the set speed.

When you depress the accelerator pedal
You can temporarily increase the vehicle speed. In this case, there is no audible or visual alert even if a vehicle is in the ACC with Low Speed Follow range. ACC with Low Speed Follow stays on unless you cancel it. Once you release the accelerator pedal, the system resumes the set speed. There are times when the vehicle speed will decrease when the accelerator pedal is
lightly applied.

1When in Operation
Even if the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle detected ahead is short, ACC with Low Speed Follow may start accelerating your vehicle under the following circumstances:
· The vehicle ahead of you is going at almost the
same speed as, or faster than, your vehicle.
· A vehicle that cuts in front of you is going faster
than your vehicle, gradually increasing the interval between the vehicles.
You can also set the system to beep when a vehicle in front of you comes in and goes out of the ACC with Low Speed Follow detecting range. A vehicle detect beep on and off can be selected.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
Limitations You may need to use the brake to maintain a safe interval when using ACC with Low Speed Follow. Additionally, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not work properly under certain conditions.
2 ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations P. 504

Driving

500

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
1When in Operation
· ACC with Low Speed Follow may temporarily
control the interval between your vehicle and the vehicle in adjacent lane or surroundings of your vehicle depending on the road conditions (e.g. curves) or vehicle conditions (e.g. operating the steering wheel or the vehicle location in the lane).

Driving

· When the vehicle ahead of you moves away, such
as when entering an interchange or rest area, ACC with Low Speed Follow may continue to maintain the set following-interval for a short time.

Continued

501

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

A vehicle detected ahead is within ACC with Low Speed Follow range and

slows to a stop

Models with A-type meter

Your vehicle also stops, automatically. The

Stopped message appears on the gauge.

When the vehicle ahead of you starts again,

the vehicle icon on the gauge blinks. If you

press the RES/+/SET/- switch up or down, or

depress the accelerator pedal, ACC with Low

Speed Follow operates again within the prior

set speed.

(green)

Models with B-type meter

1When in Operation
3 WARNING
Exiting a vehicle that has been stopped while the ACC with Low Speed Follow system is operating can result in the vehicle moving without operator control.
A vehicle that moves without operator control can cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.
Never exit a vehicle when the vehicle is stopped by ACC with Low Speed Follow.

Driving

(green)
502

Models with A-type meter

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
If no vehicle is ahead of you before you resume driving, depress the accelerator pedal and ACC with Low Speed Follow will operate again within the prior set speed.

(green) Models with B-type meter

Driving

(green)

Continued

503

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
ACC with Low Speed Follow Conditions and Limitations
The system may automatically shut off under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below. Other conditions may reduce some of the ACC with Low Speed Follow functions.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
Environmental conditions · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Strong light is reflected onto vehicles or road surfaces. · Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead. · Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
the whole vehicle may not be illuminated). · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk).
504

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Roadway conditions · Driving on curvy, winding, undulating, or sloping roads.

· Driving on rutted roads (snowy or unpaved roads, etc.). · Puddles or a film of water is on the road surface. · Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Driving

Vehicle conditions · The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. · Tire chains are installed. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film of the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. · There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. · When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The suspension has been modified. · The parking brake is applied.

Continued

505

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Examples of conditions under which the camera may not correctly detect the vehicle ahead of you
· A vehicle suddenly crosses in front of you. · The interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short. · When the vehicle ahead of you blends in with the background, preventing the
system from recognizing it. · The headlights of the vehicle ahead of you are lit on one side or not lit on either
side in a dark place.
506

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
Examples of conditions under which the system may not work properly · A vehicle ahead of you stops and the speed difference between your vehicle and
the vehicle ahead of you is significantly large. · When the vehicle ahead of you slows suddenly. · When a vehicle ahead of you is specially-shaped. · When a vehicle is lower in the rear than the front such as trucks that are not
carrying a load, or a narrow vehicle.
Camera detects upper section of an empty carrier truck.
· When your vehicle or the vehicle ahead of you is driving on the edge of the lane. · When the vehicle ahead of you is a narrow vehicle such as a motorcycle. · When the minimum ground clearance of a vehicle ahead of you is extremely high. · When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the vehicle ahead of you.

Driving

Continued

507

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
Increase or decrease the vehicle speed using the RES/+/SET/- switch on the steering wheel.
To increase speed

1To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
If a vehicle detected ahead is going at a speed slower than your increased set speed, ACC with Low Speed Follow may not accelerate your vehicle. This is to maintain the set interval between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead.

When you depress the accelerator pedal and then
push and release the RES/+/SET/- switch, the
current speed of the vehicle is set.

To decrease speed
· Each time you press the RES/+/SET/- switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
· If you keep the RES/+/SET/- switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

Driving

508

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Set or Change Following-interval
Press the Interval button to change the ACC with Low Speed Follow following-interval. Each time you press the button, the followinginterval (the interval behind a vehicle detected ahead of you) setting cycles through furthest, far, mid, and nearest following-intervals.

Interval Button

Determine the most appropriate followinginterval setting based on your specific driving conditions. Be sure to adhere to any following-interval requirements set by local regulation.

Driving

Continued

509

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

The higher your vehicle's following-speed is, the longer the nearest, mid, far or furthest following-interval becomes. See the following examples for your reference.

Following-interval

When the Set Speed is: 50 mph (80 km/h) 65 mph (104 km/h)

Nearest

87.3 feet

110.6 feet

26.6 meters

33.7 meters

1.2 sec

113.4 feet

147.2 feet

Mid

34.6 meters

44.9 meters

1.6 sec

Driving

144.2 feet

187.3 feet

Far

44.0 meters

57.1 meters

2.0 sec

175.9 feet

229.6 feet

Furthest

53.6 meters

70.0 meters

2.4 sec

When your vehicle stops automatically because a vehicle detected ahead of you has stopped, the interval between the two vehicles will vary based on the ACC with Low Speed Follow interval setting.
*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter
510

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Cancel

Button

CANCEL Button

To cancel ACC with Low Speed Follow, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).
· Press the button. u indicator (green) goes off.
· Depress the brake pedal while the vehicle is moving forward. u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the indicator (white).

1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled ACC with Low Speed Follow, you can activate the ACC with Low Speed Follow with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/- switch up even if the vehicle is stopped. When you turn the ACC with Low Speed Follow off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray. When pressing the RES/+/SET/- switch up, the ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated with displayed speed. If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/- switch, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle's current speed.

Driving

Continued

511

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

Driving

Automatic cancellation
The beeper sounds and a message appears on the driver information interface when ACC with Low Speed Follow is automatically canceled. Any of these conditions may cause the ACC with Low Speed Follow to automatically cancel: · Bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.) · The vehicle ahead of you cannot be detected. · An abnormal tire condition is detected, or the tires are skidding. · Driving on a mountainous road, or driving off road for extended periods. · Abrupt steering wheel movement. · When the ABS, VSA®, CMBSTM or Low Speed Braking Control* is activated. · When the VSA® system indicator comes on. · When the vehicle is stopped on a very steep slope. · When you manually apply the parking brake. · Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · When the detected vehicle within the ACC with Low Speed Follow range is too
close to your vehicle. · When accelerating rapidly. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. · The vehicle is loaded heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. · When passing through a dark place, such as tunnel. · When the parking brake and brake system indicator (amber) comes on. · The vehicle has repeatedly applied the brakes to maintain the set speed (for
example, you are descending a long slope). · When the system doesn't detect any driving actions from the driver for a certain
amount of time while the LKAS is also activated.
The ACC with Low Speed Follow automatic cancellation can be also triggered by the following causes. In these cases, the parking brake will be automatically applied. · The driver's seat belt is unfastened when the vehicle is stationary. · The vehicle stops for more than 10 minutes. · The engine is turned off.
512 * Not available on all models

1To Cancel
Models with A-type meter
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white)
Models with B-type meter
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white) The set speed cannot be set or resumed when ACC with Low Speed Follow has been turned off using the
button. Press the button to activate the system, then set the desired speed.

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control

ACC with Low Speed Follow ON

Interval Button
Cruise Control ON

(white)

Press and hold the Interval button for one second. Cruise mode selected appears on the driver information interface for two seconds, and then the mode switches to Cruise. The indicator comes on. · Green: The system is on. · White: The system is standby. To switch back to ACC with Low Speed Follow, press and hold the Interval button again for one second.

When to use Desired speed in a range above roughly 25 mph (40 km/h).

1To Switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control
Always be aware which mode you are in. When you are driving in Cruise mode, the system will not assist you to maintain a following-interval from a vehicle ahead of you.
You cannot switch ACC with Low Speed Follow to Cruise Control in the following situations:
· When the vehicle speed is set. · When ACC with Low Speed Follow is not activated.
You can switch the displayed set speed measurements on the driver information interface or audio/information screen* between mph and km/h.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 125, 150 2 Customized Features P. 363

Driving

To Set the Vehicle Speed
Take your foot off the pedal and press the RES/+/SET/- switch up or down when you reach the desired speed. The moment you release the RES/+/SET/- switch, the set speed is fixed, and cruise control begins. The color of indicator changes from white to green.
When you use cruise control, Straight Driving Assist (a feature of the Electric Power Steering system) is activated. By enabling the steering system to automatically compensate for natural steering pull, Straight Driving Assist makes it easier for you to keep your vehicle in a straight line.

* Not available on all models

Continued

513

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow

To Adjust the Vehicle Speed
· Each time you press the RES/+/SET/- switch up or down, the vehicle speed is increased or decreased by about 1 mph or 1 km/h accordingly.
· If you keep the RES/+/SET/- switch pressed up or down, the vehicle speed increases or decreases by about 5 mph or 5 km/h accordingly.

To Cancel
To cancel cruise control, do any of the following: · Press the CANCEL button.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the · Press the button.
u The indicator (green) goes off. · Depress the brake pedal.
u The indicator (green) on the gauge changes to the The indicator goes off.

indicator (white). indicator (white).

1To Cancel
Resuming the prior set speed: After you have canceled cruise control, you can activate the cruise control with the prior set speed displayed on the gauge (in gray) by pressing the RES/+/SET/- switch up while driving at a speed of at least 25 mph (40 km/h) or more. When you turn the cruise control off by pressing the CANCEL button or depressing the brake pedal, the prior set speed is displayed on the gauge in gray. When pressing the RES/+/SET/- switch up, the cruise control is activated with displayed speed. If the indicator (white) is displayed and you press the RES/+/SET/- switch, but no prior set speed (in gray) is displayed, the speed will be set to your vehicle's current speed.

Driving

514

uuHonda Sensing®uAdaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow
1To Cancel
Models with A-type meter
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white)
Models with B-type meter
Prior Set Speed (gray)
(white) You cannot set or resume in the following situations:
· When vehicle speed is less than 25 mph (40 km/h) · When cruise control is canceled by pressing the
button. At vehicle speeds of 22 mph (35 km/h) or less, cruise control canceled automatically.
515

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Provides steering input to help keep the vehicle in the middle of a detected lane and provides tactile and visual alerts if the vehicle is detected drifting out of its lane.
Steering input assist The system applies torque to the steering to keep the vehicle between the left and right lane lines. The applied torque becomes stronger as the vehicle gets closer to either of the lane lines.

Front Wide View Camera
Monitors the lane lines

Tactile and visual alerts
Rapid vibrations on the steering wheel and a warning display alert you that the vehicle is drifting out of a detected lane.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) Important Safety Reminders The LKAS is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
The LKAS is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.
Do not place objects on the instrument panel. Objects may reflect on the windshield and prevent correct detection of the traffic lanes.

The LKAS only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The LKAS may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

When you operate the turn signals to change lanes, the system is suspended, and resumes after the signals are off.
If you make a lane change without operating the turn signals, the LKAS alerts activate, and torque is applied to the steering.

The LKAS may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 LKAS Conditions and Limitations P. 524
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551

Driving

516

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Lane Keep Support Function
Provides assistance to keep the vehicle in the center of the lane. When the vehicle nears a white or yellow line, steering force of the electric power steering will become stronger.

1Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) When it fails to detect lanes, the system will temporarily be canceled. When a lane is detected, the system will recover automatically.
The LKAS may not function as designed while driving in frequent stop and go traffic, or on roads with sharp curves.

Driving

Continued

517

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, the LKAS alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration as well as a warning display.
LKAS indicator (green)
*2 *1
Amber line Warning Area
Warning Area

Driving

518

*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

When the System can be Used
The system can be used when the following conditions are met. · The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane. · The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). · You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. · The turn signals are off. · The brake pedal is not depressed.

How to activate the system
LKAS indicator White lines (white)
*2 *1

LKAS indicator

(white)

White lines

1. Press the LKAS button. u LKAS indicator (white) appears on the gauge. The system is standby. u If traffic lane lines are detected, white lines appear on the gauge.

1When the System can be Used
If the vehicle drifts toward either left or right lane line due to the system applying torque, turn off the LKAS and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Be sure to keep the following below to activate the system properly;
· Always keep the windshield around the camera
clean.
· When cleaning the windshield, be careful not to
apply windshield cleanser to the camera lens.
· Do not touch the camera lens. · Do not attach a sticker to the area around the
camera.
If LKAS button is pressed when the system can be used, LKAS is on without standby.

Driving

LKAS Button
*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter

Continued

519

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Models with A-type meter Green lines

2. Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving. u The LKAS indicator changes from white to green, and white lines change to green once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

LKAS indicator (green) Models with B-type meter
LKAS indicator (green)

Driving

Green lines
520

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

To Cancel

Press the LKAS button.
The LKAS is turned off every time you stop the engine, even if you turned it on the last time you drove the vehicle.

LKAS Button

Driving

Continued

521

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Models with A-type meter White lines
LKAS indicator (white) Models with B-type meter
LKAS indicator (white)

The system operation is suspended if you:
· Decrease the vehicle speed to about 40 mph (64 km/h) or less. u Increasing the vehicle speed to about 45 mph (72 km/h) or more resumes the LKAS.
· Depress the brake pedal. u The LKAS resumes and starts detecting the lane lines again once you release the brake pedal.
· Your vehicle is driving to the right or the left of the lane.

1To Cancel
You can change the setting for the LKAS. LKAS suspended beep on and off can be selected.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Driving

White lines When the LKAS is suspended, green lines on the gauge change to white lines or dissapear, and the beeper sounds (if activated).
522

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
The LKAS may be automatically suspended when: · The system fails to detect lane lines. · The steering wheel is turned quickly. · You fail to steer the vehicle. · Driving through a sharp curve. · Driving at a speed in excess of approximately 90 mph (145 km/h). · The brake pedal is depressed. Once these conditions no longer exist, the LKAS automatically resumes.
The LKAS may be automatically canceled when: In the following cases, traffic lane lines may dissapear on the gauge, the beeper may sound, and the LKAS may automatically be canceled: · The camera temperature gets extremely high. · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, gets dirty. · The ABS or VSA® system engages. A beeper sounds if the LKAS is automatically canceled.

Driving

Continued

523

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
LKAS Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following: Environmental conditions · There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines. · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated). · When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to
the vehicle in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection. · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.
524

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)

Roadway conditions · Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. · Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.

Faded lines

Duplicate lines

Tire tracks

· The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.
· The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
Very wide or narrow traffic lane

Driving

· Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. · Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Continued

525

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
· When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow) lines.
· Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. · Driving on roads with double lane lines. · Driving on snowy or slippery roads. · The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road. · There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface. · White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills. · Driving on unpaved or rutted roads. · Passing through an exit or an intersection.
Lane void of lines at exit or intersection
526

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uLane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)
Vehicle conditions · When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. · There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. · The suspension has been modified. · Tire chains are installed.
527

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Traffic Jam Assist
The traffic jam assist system uses a camera mounted to the upper portion of the windshield to detect and monitor left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines. Based on inputs from the camera, the system can apply steering torque to keep your vehicle in the center of the detected lane.
How Traffic Jam Assist works When you are in heavy traffic and LKAS is active, the traffic jam assist system, upon detecting the traffic lane lines, will apply steering torque to help keep your vehicle in the center of the lane.

1Traffic Jam Assist
Important Safety Reminders Traffic Jam Assist is for your convenience only. It is not an autonomous driving system and always requires driver attention and control. The system does not work if you take your hands off the steering wheel or fail to steer the vehicle.
Traffic Jam Assist is convenient when it is used on expressways or freeways.

Front Wide View Camera
Detects left and right white (or yellow) traffic lane lines

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
The Traffic Jam Assist only alerts you when lane drift is detected without a turn signal in use. The Traffic Jam Assist may not detect all lane markings or lane departures; accuracy will vary based on weather, speed, and lane marker condition. It is always your responsibility to safely operate the vehicle and avoid collisions.

Driving

When you use the turn signal to indicate a lane change, Traffic Jam Assist is temporarily deactivated. It is reactivated once the vehicle is traveling in the center of the lane and the system has detected the traffic lane lines.
When the driver takes full control of the steering, the steering assist function is temporarily canceled. The torque applied to the steering may not be noticeable when the driver has full control of the steering, or when the surface of the road is rough or uneven.

Traffic Jam Assist may not work properly under
certain conditions: 2 Traffic Jam Assist: Conditions and Limitations P. 533

528

Lane Departure Warning Function
When the vehicle enters the warning area, Traffic Jam Assist alerts you with slight steering wheel vibration or an audible alert as well as a warning display.
LKAS indicator (green)
*2 *1
Amber line Warning Area
Warning Area

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter

Continued

529

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Traffic Jam Assist Activation
Traffic Jam Assist is activated when all of the following conditions exist: · LKAS is activated. · The lane in which you are driving has detectable lane markers on both sides, and
your vehicle is in the center of the lane. · The vehicle is traveling between about 0 and 45mph (0 and 72km/h). · You are driving on a straight or slightly curved road. · The driver is gripping the steering wheel. · The shift position is in (D.

1Traffic Jam Assist Activation
Refer to the following page for proper handling of the Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS):
2 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) P. 516
Refer to the following page for steering buttons and displays:
2 Operation Switches for the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow/Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS)/Traffic Jam Assist P. 474

Do not use Traffic Jam Assist in any of the following situations: · You are traveling on a road with sharp curves.
u The system may not allow your vehicle to respond in a manner best suited for the road conditions.
· You are entering a toll booth, interchange, service area, or parking area. · You are driving in adverse weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · The surface of the road is slippery; for example, it is icy or covered with snow.
u The tires may slip, causing you to lose control of the vehicle.

Driving

530

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

How Traffic Jam Assist Works

Models with A-type meter Green lines

Keep your vehicle near the center of the lane while driving.
u The LKAS indicator changes from white to green, and white lines change to green once the system starts operating after detecting the left and right lane markings.

LKAS indicator (green) Models with B-type meter
LKAS indicator (green)

1How Traffic Jam Assist Works
If your vehicle veers too far to the right or the left of the white (or yellow) traffic lane lines while Traffic Jam Assist is active, deactivate Traffic Jam Assist and have your vehicle inspected by an authorized Honda dealer.
In some cases the system cannot properly detect the traffic lane lines and, as a result, will not provide steering assistance.
2 Traffic Jam Assist: Conditions and Limitations P. 533
If the driver takes their hands off the steering wheel or does not adequately maintain control of steering, the warning below will appear.

Driving

Green lines

If the driver does not grip the steering wheel after the warning above has repeatedly appeared, a warning buzzer will sound and Traffic Jam Assist will be canceled.

Continued

531

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Canceling Traffic Jam Assist
Press the LKAS button to cancel Traffic Jam Assist.

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when: The system is automatically temporarily canceled under the following circumstances. · The system fails to detect lane lines. · The steering wheel is turned sharply. · You fail to steer the vehicle. · You are driving through a sharp curve. · The brake pedal is depressed. Once these conditions no longer exist, Traffic Jam Assist automatically resumes.

1Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically suspended when:
You are traveling over 45mph (72km/h). uWhen the speed of the vehicle reaches 45mph
(72km/h), Traffic Jam Assist is deactivated and LKAS is activated instead. Once the speed of the vehicle drops to under 42mph (68km/h), Traffic Jam Assist is reactivated.

Traffic Jam Assist may be automatically canceled when: The traffic lane lines will disappear from the screen, the beeper may sound, and Traffic Jam Assist will be canceled under the following circumstances: · The temperature of the camera is too high. · The camera behind the rearview mirror, or the area around the camera, including
the windshield, is dirty.

Driving

532

Traffic Jam Assist: Conditions and Limitations
The system may not detect lane markings and therefore may not keep the vehicle in the middle of the lane under certain conditions, including the following:
Environmental conditions · There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines. · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines or the road surface may not be illuminated). · When the lane lines or road surface are not visible, such as when the distance to
the vehicle in front of you is extremely short or when at an intersection. · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway.

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

Continued

533

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Roadway conditions · Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. · Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings.

Faded lines

Duplicate lines

Tire tracks

· The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or crosswalk.
· The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing.
Very wide or narrow traffic lane

Driving

· When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white (or yellow) lines.
· Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. · Driving on roads with double lane lines. · Driving on snowy or slippery roads. · The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road. · There is a film of water or puddles on the road surface. · White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills. · Driving on unpaved or rutted roads. · Passing through an exit or an intersection.
Lane void of lines at exit or intersection

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist

Driving

Continued

535

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Jam Assist
Vehicle conditions · When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. · There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. · The suspension has been modified. · Tire chains are installed.
536

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Road Departure Mitigation System

Alerts and helps assist you when the system detects a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or a detected oncoming vehicle.

How the System Works
*1
Amber line
*2
*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter

The front camera behind the rearview mirror monitors left and right lane markings in white or yellow, the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or a detected oncoming vehicles. If your vehicle approaches any detected lane markings, the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or a detected oncoming vehicles when the turn signals have not been engaged, the system activates.
u If the system cannot detect lane markings (in white or yellow), no assistance will be provided to avoid approaching oncoming vehicles. In addition to a visual alert, the system assists with steering and alerts you with rapid steering wheel vibrations to help you remain within the detected lane.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
As a visual alert, the Lane departure message appears on the driver information interface.
Continued

1Road Departure Mitigation System
Important Safety Reminder Like all assistance systems, the Road Departure Mitigation system has limitations. Over-reliance on the Road Departure Mitigation system may result in a collision. It is always your responsibility to keep the vehicle within your driving lane.
The Road Departure Mitigation system alerts you when the system detects that you are approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border), an oncoming vehicle, or drifting into another lane without using a turn signal. The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect all lane markings or every instance of lane drift. The Road Departure Mitigation system may not detect that you are approaching the outer edge of the pavement (bordered by grass or gravel) or an oncoming vehicle. The Road Departure Mitigation system may not be able to assist you depending on weather, speed or road conditions.
The Road Departure Mitigation system is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.
You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
The Road Departure Mitigation system may not work properly or may work improperly under the certain conditions:
2 Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations P. 541

Driving

537

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

The system cancels assisting operations when you turn the steering wheel to avoid crossing over detected lane markings or approaching the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle.
If the system operates several times without detecting driver response, the system beeps to alert you.

1Road Departure Mitigation System
There are times when you may not notice the Road Departure Mitigation system functions due to your operation of the vehicle, or road surface conditions.
If LKAS is off and you have selected Narrow from the customized options using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, the message below will appear if the system has determined that there is a possibility of your vehicle crossing over detected lane markings, the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or oncoming vehicle. If you have selected Normal or Wide, however, the message will only appear if the vehicle is about to cross over the outer edge of the pavement or oncoming vehicle.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Driving

538 * Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

How the System Activates
The system activates when all of the following conditions are met: · The vehicle is traveling between about 45 and 90 mph (72 and 145 km/h). · The vehicle is on a straight or slightly curved road. · The turn signals are off. · The system makes a determination that the driver is not actively accelerating,
braking or steering.

1How the System Activates
The Road Departure Mitigation system may automatically shut off and the safety support indicator (amber) comes and stays on.
2 Indicators P. 88
The Road Departure Mitigation system function can be impacted when the vehicle is:
· Driven on the inside edge of a curve, or outside of
a lane.
· Driven in a narrow lane.

Driving

Continued

539

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System

Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off

Models with A-type meter
Left Selector Wheel

When you turn the Road Departure Mitigation system on and off, do the following. 1. Press the safety support switch.
Models with A-type meter
2. Roll the left selector wheel to the symbol and push it.

Safety Support Switch
Models with B-type meter
Right Selector Wheel

Models with B-type meter
2. Roll the right selector wheel to the symbol and push it. u A message appears on the driver information interface when the system turns on or off. u A check mark appears in the box and the color of the symbol changes to green when the system is on. The check mark disappears and the color of the symbol changes to gray when the system is off.
The Road Departure Mitigation system is in the previously selected on (checked) or off (unchecked) setting each time you start the engine.

1Road Departure Mitigation system On and Off
You can also select safety support content from the driver information interface.
2 Driver Information Interface P. 113 2 Driver Information Interface (Right Side
Area) P. 138
When you have selected Warning only*1/Warning Only*2 from the customized options using the driver information interface* or audio/information screen*, the system does not operate the steering wheel.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, low tire pressure/ TPMS* and safety support indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Safety Support Switch

Driving

*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter
540 * Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Road Departure Mitigation system Conditions and Limitations
The system may not properly detect lane markings (in white or yellow), the outer edge of the pavement (into grass or gravel border) or an oncoming vehicle under certain conditions. Some examples of these conditions are listed below.
Environmental conditions · There is little contrast between lane lines and the roadway surface. · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Driving on a snowy or wet roadway. · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Shadows of adjacent objects (trees, buildings, guard rails, vehicles, etc.) are
parallel to white (or yellow) lines. · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving at night or in a dark place such as a tunnel (due to low-light conditions,
lane lines, the road surface, or oncoming vehicles may not be illuminated). · The distance between your vehicle and the vehicle ahead of you is too short, and
lane lines and the road surface are not visible. · The outer edge of the road is bordered by objects, materials, etc. other than grass
or gravel.

Driving

Continued

541

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Roadway conditions · Driving on a road with temporary lane markings. · Faint, multiple, or varied lane markings are visible on the roadway due to road
repairs or old lane markings. · The roadway has merging, split, or crossing lines, such as at an intersection or
crosswalk. · The lane markings are extremely narrow, wide, or changing. · Part of the lane markings are hidden by an object, such as a vehicle. · The road is hilly or the vehicle is approaching the crest of a hill. · Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces. · When objects on the road (curb, guard rail, pylons, etc.) are recognized as white
(or yellow) lines. · Driving on rough or unpaved roads, or over bumpy surfaces. · Driving on roads with double lane lines. · Driving on snowy or slippery roads. · Passing through an exit or an intersection. · The pavement is only partially visible due to snow or puddles on the road. · Driving on unpaved or rutted roads. · White (or yellow) lines are not recognized correctly due to road conditions such as
curves, twists, or hills.
542

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Vehicle conditions · When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. · Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off. · When the driver operates the brake pedal and steering wheel. · There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. · Tire chains are installed. · The suspension has been modified.
Examples of limitations on detection due to the condition of oncoming vehicles
· The oncoming vehicle or vehicle ahead of you is sideways. · The oncoming vehicle jumps out in front of you. · When the oncoming vehicle blends in with the background, preventing the
system from recognizing it. · The headlights of a oncoming vehicle are lit on one side or not lit on either side in
a dark place. · The distance between your vehicle and the oncoming vehicle is too short. · Part of the oncoming vehicle is not visible due to the vehicle ahead of you. · There are multiple oncoming lanes or turning lanes. · The vehicle in the adjacent lane is parked or moving at an extremely slow speed.

Driving

Continued

543

uuHonda Sensing®uRoad Departure Mitigation System
Examples of other limitations on detection or system operation · When the oncoming vehicle is specially-shaped. · When the camera cannot correctly identify the shape of the oncoming vehicle. With Little Chance of a Collision The Road Departure Mitigation system may activate in the below conditions. · When driving through curves, your vehicle comes to a point where an oncoming
vehicle is right in front of you.
544

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Traffic Sign Recognition System
Reminds you of road sign information, such as the current speed limit your vehicle has just passed through, showing it on the gauge.

How the System Works
When the camera located behind the rearview mirror captures traffic signs while driving, the system displays the ones that are recognized as designated for your vehicle. The sign icon will be displayed until the vehicle reaches a predetermined time and distance. If the system does not detect any traffic signs while you are driving, the sign icon will not be displayed.

Models with A-type meter

Models with B-type meter

Speed Limit Sign

1Traffic Sign Recognition System
Not all signs may be displayed, but any signs posted on roadsides should not be ignored. The system does not work on the designated traffic signs of all the countries you travel, nor in all situations. Do not rely too much on the system. Always drive at speeds appropriate for the road conditions.
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield that could obstruct the camera's field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera's field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.

The traffic sign recognition system is not activated for about 15 seconds after the engine starts.

The sign icon also may switch to another one, or disappear when: · The end of speed limit or other designated limit is detected. · You make a turn with a turn signal at an intersection.

Continued

You can read about handling information for the camera equipped with this system.
2 Front Wide View Camera P. 551
You can turn the traffic sign recognition system on and off.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363

Driving

545

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
546

1Traffic Sign Recognition System
To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera's sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.
If your vehicle exceeds the detected speed limit, an icon representing the speed limit sign for the current area will blink in the display.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Customized Features P. 363
The system's ability to accurately notify the driver of the speed limit is dependent on certain conditions such as the units displayed on the traffic sign as well as the speed and direction of travel of the vehicle. In some cases, the system may display false warnings or other inaccurate information.
2 Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations P. 547
The unit for speed limits (mph or km/h) varies from country to country. Just after entering a country whose unit differs to the one of the country from which you came, Traffic Sign Recognition System may not work correctly.
2 Settings P. 126 2 Speed/Distance Units P. 125, 150 2 Customized Features P. 363

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations
The traffic sign recognition system may not be able to recognize a traffic sign in the following cases.
Environmental conditions · Driving into low sunlight (e.g., at dawn or dusk). · Strong light is reflected onto the roadway. · Driving at night, in dark areas such as long tunnels. · Driving in bad weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.). · Sudden changes between light and dark, such as the entrance or exit of a tunnel
or the shadows of trees, buildings, etc. · Water is sprayed by or snow blown from a vehicle ahead.

1Traffic Sign Recognition System Conditions and Limitations When the traffic sign recognition system malfunctions, appears on the gauge. If this message does not disappear, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
Models with A-type meter

Roadway conditions · Your vehicle is strongly shaken on uneven road surfaces.

Models with B-type meter

Driving

Vehicle conditions · When lighting is weak due to dirt covering the headlight lenses, or there is poor
visibility in a dark place due to the headlights being improperly adjusted. · The front of the camera is covered by dirt, fog, rain, mud, wet snow, seals,
accessories, stickers, or film on the windshield. · There is residue on the windshield from the windshield wipers. · An abnormal tire or wheel condition (incorrect sizes, varied sizes or construction,
improperly inflated, compact spare tire, etc.). · The vehicle is tilted due to heavy load in the trunk or rear seats. · The suspension has been modified. · Tire chains are installed. · Driving at night or in a dark place (e.g., a tunnel) with the headlights off.

Continued

547

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
The position or the condition of the traffic sign · The sign is in a place that makes it hard to find. · The sign is located far away from your vehicle. · The sign is located where it is hard for headlight beams to reach. · The sign is on a corner or bend in the road. · The sign is faded or bent. · The sign is rotated or damaged signs. · The sign is covered with mud, snow, or frost. · Part of the sign is hidden by the trees, or is in the shadow of a vehicle or other
object. · Light (such as a streetlight) is reflected on the surface of the sign, or it is hidden
in shadow. · The sign is too bright or too dark (electric signs). · Small signs (auxiliary signs, etc.). Other conditions · When you are driving at a high speed.
548

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System
The traffic sign recognition system may not operate correctly, such as displaying signs that do not adhere to the actual regulations for the roadway or do not exist at all in the following cases.
u A speed limit sign may display at a higher or lower speed than the actual speed limit.
· There is a supplementary sign with further information such as weather, time, vehicle type, school zone, etc.
· Figures on the sign are hard to read (electric signs, numbers on the sign are blurred, etc.).
· The sign is in the vicinity of the lane you are driving in, even though it is not for the lane, such as a speed limit sign situated at an exit or an intersection between the side road and the main road.
· There are things that look similar in color or shape to recognized objects (similar sign, electric sign, signboard, structure, etc.).

Driving

Continued

549

uuHonda Sensing®uTraffic Sign Recognition System

Signs Displayed on the Gauge
The speed limit sign icon is displayed on the screen.

Models with A-type meter
Speed Limit Sign

Models with B-type meter
Speed Limit Sign

Speed Limit Sign

Driving

550

uuHonda Sensing®uFront Wide View Camera

Front Wide View Camera
The camera, used in systems such as Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS), Road Departure Mitigation system, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, Traffic Sign Recognition system, CMBSTM, and Traffic Jam Assist, is designed to detect an object that triggers any of the systems to operate their functions.

Camera Location and Handling Tips

Front Wide View Camera

This camera is located behind the rearview mirror.

To help reduce the likelihood that high interior temperatures will cause the camera's sensing system to shut off, when parking, find a shady area or face the front of the vehicle away from the sun. If you use a reflective sun shade, do not allow it to cover the camera housing. Covering the camera can concentrate heat on it.

1Front Wide View Camera
Never apply a film or attach any objects to the windshield, the hood, or the front grille that could obstruct the camera's field of vision and cause the system to operate abnormally. Scratches, nicks, and other damage to the windshield within the camera's field of vision can cause the system to operate abnormally. If this occurs, we recommend that you replace the windshield with a genuine Honda replacement windshield. Making even minor repairs within the camera's field of vision or installing an aftermarket replacement windshield may also cause the system to operate abnormally. After replacing the windshield, have a dealer recalibrate the camera. Proper calibration of the camera is necessary for the system to operate properly.
Do not place an object on the top of the instrument panel. It may reflect onto the windshield and prevent the system from detecting lane lines properly.

Driving

Continued

551

Driving

uuHonda Sensing®uFront Wide View Camera
552

1Front Wide View Camera
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Camera temperature too high message appears:
· Use the climate control system to cool down the
interior and, if necessary, also use defroster mode with the airflow directed towards the camera.
· Start driving the vehicle to lower the windshield
temperature, which cools down the area around the camera.
If the Some driver assist systems cannot operate: Clean front windshield or poor viewing conditions. message appears:
· Park your vehicle in a safe place, and make sure the
windshield is clean. Clean the windshield if it is dirty. If the message does not disappear after driven for a while, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Sonar Sensors*
Location and range of sensors The sonar sensors are situated in the front and rear bumpers.

Sonar Sensors

Sensor Range
* Not available on all models

uuHonda Sensing®uSonar Sensors*
1Sonar Sensors* For the sonar sensors to work properly, do not:
· Place stickers or other objects on or around the
sensors.
· Hit the area around the sensors. · Attempt to take apart any sensor. · Put any accessories on or around the sensors.
Consult with a dealer if:
· A sensor has been subjected to shock. · Work needs to be done to the area around a
sensor. In the following cases, the sonar sensors may not work properly. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.
· The front or rear bumper has made contact with a
hill, parking block, curb, embankment, etc.
· The vehicle has been involved in frontal or rear
collision.
· The vehicle has been driven through a deep
puddle.
553

Driving

Braking

Brake System

Parking Brake
Use the parking brake to keep the vehicle stationary when parked. When the parking brake is applied, you can manually or automatically release it.
To apply The electric parking brake can be applied any time the vehicle has battery, no matter which position the power mode is in.

Electric Parking Brake Switch
Electric Parking Brake Switch

Pull the electric parking brake switch up gently and securely.
u The indicator in the switch comes on. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) comes on. To release The power mode must be in ON in order to release the electric parking brake. 1. Depress the brake pedal. 2. Press the electric parking brake switch.
u The indicator in the switch goes off. u The parking brake and brake system
indicator (red) goes off.
Manually releasing the parking brake using the switch helps your vehicle start slowly and smoothly when facing downhill on steep hills.

1Parking Brake
You may hear the electric parking brake system motor operating from the rear wheel area when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
The brake pedal may slightly move due to the electric parking brake system operation when you apply or release the parking brake. This is normal.
You cannot apply or release the parking brake if the battery goes dead.
2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 652
If you pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch while driving, the brakes on all four wheels are applied by the VSA® system until the vehicle comes to a stop. The electric parking brake then applies, and the switch should be released.
In the following situations, the parking brake automatically operates.
· When the vehicle stops more than 10 minutes
while Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow is activated.
· When the driver's seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped automatically by ACC with Low Speed Follow.
· When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle
Stop system, while ACC with Low Speed Follow is activated.
· When the vehicle stops with the automatic brake
hold system activated for more than 10 minutes.
· When the driver's seat belt is unfastened while
your vehicle is stopped and brake hold is applied.
· When the engine is turned off, except by Auto Idle
Stop system, while brake hold system is applied.
· When there is a problem with the brake hold
system while brake hold is applied.

Driving

554

uuBrakinguBrake System

Automatic parking brake feature operation If the automatic parking brake feature has been activated: · The parking brake is applied automatically when you set the power mode to
VEHICLE OFF. · To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake
system indicator (red) is on.
2 Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature P. 556
To release automatically Depressing the accelerator pedal releases the parking brake. Use the accelerator pedal to release the parking brake when you are starting the vehicle facing uphill, or in a traffic jam.
Gently depress the accelerator pedal.
When on a hill, it may require more accelerator input to release.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off.

1Parking Brake
If the parking brake cannot be released automatically, release it manually.
When the vehicle is traveling uphill, the accelerator pedal may need to be pressed farther to automatically release the electric parking brake.
The parking brake cannot be released automatically while the following indicators are on:
· Malfunction indicator lamp · Transmission system indicator
The parking brake may not be released automatically while the following indicators are on:
· Parking brake and brake system indicator (red) · VSA® system indicator · ABS indicator · Supplemental restraint system indicator

Accelerator Pedal
You can release the parking brake automatically when: · You are wearing the driver's seat belt. · The engine is running. · The transmission is not in (P or (N.

Driving

Continued

555

uuBrakinguBrake System

Activating and deactivating the automatic parking brake feature With the power mode is in ON, carry out the following steps to either activate or deactivate the automatic parking brake feature. 1. Put the transmission into (P. 2. Without depressing the brake pedal, pull up and release the electric parking brake
switch. u Check that the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) has come on. 3. Pull up and hold the electric parking brake switch. When you hear a beeping sound, release the switch and within 3 seconds pull up and hold the switch again. 4. When you hear a sound indicating that the procedure is completed, release the switch. u Two beeps indicates that the feature has been activated. u One beep indicates that the feature has been deactivated. u When you have completed activating the feature, the parking brake will
remain applied after you turn off the engine. u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and
brake system indicator (red) is on.

1Parking Brake In cold climates, the parking brake may freeze in place if applied.
When parking the vehicle, chock the wheels and make sure the automatic parking brake feature is deactivated.
Also, when putting your vehicle through a conveyortype car wash or when having your vehicle towed, deactivate the automatic parking brake feature and leave the parking brake released.

Driving

If you need to temporarily deactivate the feature while putting your vehicle through a conveyor type car wash, you can follow the procedure explained below. 1. Depress the brake pedal and bring the vehicle to a stop. 2. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and then within 2 seconds push down the
electric parking brake switch. u Activation and deactivation settings for the feature will not be affected. u Before temporarily deactivating the feature, make sure to first turn off both
Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow and the automatic brake hold system. u To confirm that the parking brake is applied, check if the parking brake and brake system indicator (red) is on.
556

uuBrakinguBrake System

Foot Brake
Your vehicle is equipped with disc brakes at all four wheels. A vacuum power assist helps to reduce the effort needed on the brake pedal. The brake assist system increases the stopping force when you depress the brake pedal hard in an emergency situation. The anti-lock brake system (ABS) helps you retain steering control when braking very hard.
2 Brake Assist System P. 561 2 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) P. 560

1Foot Brake
Check the brakes after driving through deep water, or if there is a buildup of road surface water. If necessary, dry the brakes by lightly depressing the pedal several times.
If you hear a continuous metallic friction sound when applying the brakes, this is caused by the brake wear indicator rubbing on the brake rotor and indicates that the brake pads need to be replaced. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer. If you hear only an occasional squeak or squeal when you initially apply the brake pedal, this may be normal and caused by high frequency vibration of the brake pads against the rotating brake disc.

Constantly using the brake pedal while going down a long hill builds up heat, which reduces the brake effectiveness. Apply engine braking by taking your foot off the accelerator pedal and downshifting to a speed position.

Do not rest your foot on the brake pedal while driving, as it will lightly apply the brakes and cause them to lose effectiveness over time and reduce pad life. It will also confuse drivers behind you.

Driving

Continued

557

uuBrakinguBrake System

Automatic Brake Hold
Keeps the brake applied after releasing the brake pedal until the accelerator pedal is pressed. You can use this system while the vehicle is temporarily stopped, like at traffic lights and in heavy traffic.

Turning on the system Activating the system

Canceling the system

Comes On
Automatic Brake Hold Button
Fasten your seat belt properly, then start the engine. Press the automatic brake hold button. The automatic brake
hold system indicator comes on. The system is turned on.

Brake Pedal

Comes On
U.S.
Comes On
Canada

On
Goes Off
Accelerator Pedal

Depress the brake pedal to come to a complete stop. The transmission must not be in (P or (R.
The automatic brake hold indicator comes on. Braking is kept for up to 10 minutes.
Release the brake pedal after the automatic brake hold indicator comes on.

Depress the accelerator pedal while the transmission is in a position other than (P or (N. The system is canceled and the vehicle starts to move.
The automatic brake
hold indicator goes
off. The system
continues to be on.

1Automatic Brake Hold
3 WARNING
Activating the automatic brake hold system on steep hills or slippery roads may still allow the vehicle to move if you remove your foot from the brake pedal.
If a vehicle unexpectedly moves, it may cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.
Never activate the automatic brake hold system or rely on it to keep a vehicle from moving when stopped on a steep hill or slippery roads.
3 WARNING
Using the automatic brake hold system to park the vehicle may result in the vehicle unexpectedly moving.
If a vehicle moves unexpectedly, it may cause a crash, resulting in serious injury or death.
Never leave the vehicle when braking is temporarily kept by automatic brake hold and always park the vehicle by putting the transmission in (P and applying the parking brake.

Driving

558

uuBrakinguBrake System

The system automatically cancels when: · You engage the parking brake. · You depress the brake pedal and put the transmission into (P or (R.

The system automatically cancels and the parking brake is applied when: · Braking is kept for more than 10 minutes. · The driver's seat belt is unfastened. · The engine is turned off. · There is a problem with automatic brake hold system.

Turning off the automatic brake hold system

While the system is on, press the automatic

brake hold button again.

u The automatic brake hold system

Goes

indicator goes off.

Off

Automatic Brake Hold Button

If you want to turn off automatic brake hold while the system is in operation, press the automatic brake hold button with the brake pedal depressed.

1Automatic Brake Hold While the system is activated, you can turn off the engine or park the vehicle through the same procedure as you normally do. 2 When Stopped P. 562
Whether the system is on, or the system is activated, the automatic brake hold turns off once the engine is off.
1Turning on the system Make sure to turn off the automatic brake hold system before using an automated car wash.
You may hear an operating noise if the vehicle moves while the automatic brake hold system is in operation.

Driving

559

uuBrakinguAnti-lock Brake System (ABS)

Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
ABS
Helps prevent the wheels from locking up, and helps you retain steering control by pumping the brakes rapidly, much faster than you can.
The electronic brake distribution (EBD) system, which is part of the ABS, also balances the front-to-rear braking distribution according to vehicle loading.
You should never pump the brake pedal. Let the ABS work for you by always keeping firm, steady pressure on the brake pedal. This is sometimes referred to as "stomp and steer."
ABS operation The brake pedal may pulsate slightly when the ABS is working. Depress the brake pedal and keep holding the pedal firmly down. On dry pavement, you will need to press on the brake pedal very hard before the ABS activates. However, you may feel the ABS activate immediately if you are trying to stop on snow or ice.
ABS may activate when you depress the brake pedal when driving on: · Wet or snow covered roads. · Roads paved with stone. · Roads with uneven surfaces, such as potholes, cracks, manholes, etc.
When the vehicle speed goes under 6 mph (10 km/h), the ABS stops.

1Anti-lock Brake System (ABS)
NOTICE The ABS may not function correctly if you use a tire of the incorrect size or type.
If the ABS indicator comes on while driving, there may be a problem with the system. While normal braking will not be affected, there is a possibility that the ABS will not be operating. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
The ABS is not designed for the purpose of reducing the time or distance it takes for a vehicle to stop: It is designed to limit brake lockup which can lead to skidding and loss of steering control.
In the following cases, your vehicle may need more distance to stop than a vehicle without the ABS:
· You are driving on rough or uneven road surfaces,
such as gravel or snow.
· The tires are equipped with tire chains.
The following may be observed with the ABS system:
· Motor sounds coming from the engine
compartment when the brakes are applied, or when system checks are being performed after the engine has been started and while the vehicle accelerates.
· Brake pedal and/or the vehicle body vibration when
ABS activates. These vibrations and sounds are normal to ABS systems and are no cause for concern.

Driving

560

Brake Assist System
Designed to assist the driver by generating greater braking force when you depress the brake pedal hard during emergency braking.
Brake assist system operation Press the brake pedal firmly for more powerful braking.
When brake assist operates, the pedal may wiggle slightly and an operating noise may be heard. This is normal. Keep holding the brake pedal firmly down.

uuBrakinguBrake Assist System

Driving

561

Parking Your Vehicle

When Stopped
1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. With the brake pedal depressed, pull up the electric parking brake switch slowly,
but fully. 3. Put the transmission into (P. 4. Turn off the engine.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) goes off in about 30 seconds.

1Parking Your Vehicle
3 WARNING
The vehicle can roll away if left unattended without confirming that Park is engaged.
A vehicle that rolls away could cause a crash resulting in serious injury or death.
Always keep your foot on the brake pedal until you have confirmed that (P is shown on the shift position indicator.

1When Stopped
NOTICE The following can damage the transmission:
· Depressing the accelerator and brake pedals
simultaneously.
· Holding the vehicle in place when facing uphill by
depressing the accelerator pedal.
· Putting the transmission into (P before the vehicle
stops completely.
Do not park your vehicle near flammable objects, such as dry grass, oil, or timber. Heat from the exhaust can cause a fire.

Driving

562

Always set the parking brake, in particular if you are parked on an incline.

uuParking Your VehicleuWhen Stopped
1When Stopped In extremely cold temperatures, the parking brake may freeze up if applied. If such temperatures are expected, do not apply the parking brake but, if parking on a slope, either turn the front wheels so they will contact the curb if the vehicle rolls down the slope or block the wheels to keep the vehicle from moving. If you do not take either precaution, the vehicle may roll unexpectedly, leading to a crash.

Driving

563

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Parking Sensor System*
The corner and center sensors monitor obstacles around your vehicle, and the beeper, driver information interface and audio/information screen let you know the approximate distance between your vehicle and the obstacle.

1Parking Sensor System*
Even when the system is on, always confirm if there is no obstacle near your vehicle before parking.

The sensor location and range
Front Corner Sensors Rear Corner Sensors

Front Center Sensors Rear Center Sensors

The system may not work properly when:
· The sensors are covered with snow, ice, mud or
dirt.
· The vehicle is on uneven surface, such as grass,
bumps, or a hill.
· The vehicle has been out in hot or cold weather. · The system is affected by devices that emit
ultrasonic waves.
· Driving in bad weather.

Within about 24 in (60 cm) or less

Front: Within about 39 in (100 cm) or less Rear: Within about 43 in (110 cm) or less

The system may not sense:
· Thin or low objects. · Sonic-absorptive materials, such as snow, cotton,
or sponge.
· Objects directly under the bumper.
Do not put any accessories on or around the sensors.

Driving

564 * Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Parking sensor system on and off With the power mode in ON, press the parking sensor system button to turn on or off the system. The indicator in the button comes on when the system is on.

1Parking Sensor System*
When you set the power mode to ON, the system will be in the previously selected condition.

The front corner, rear corner and rear center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

The front corner and front center sensors start to detect an obstacle when the transmission is in any position other than (P or (R, and the vehicle speed is less than 5 mph (8 km/h).

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

565

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Screen Operation
Split View Off

You can switch between split view off and split view on by touching the split screen tab.

1Screen Operation
The split screen tab disappears, and the split view returns to the last camera view mode under the following conditions:
· If there is a malfunction in the system.

Split Screen Tab
Split View On

Driving

566

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

When the distance between your vehicle and detected obstacles becomes shorter

Interval Distance between the Bumper and Obstacle

between

beeps

Corner Sensors

Center Sensors

Indicator

Driver information interface

Audio/Information Screen

Moderate

Front: About 39-24 in (100-60 cm)
Rear: About 43-24 in (11060 cm)

Comes on*1/ Blinks*2 in Yellow*3

Short Very short

About 24-18 in (60-45 cm)
About 18-14 in (45-35 cm)

Comes on*1/ Blinks*2 in Amber

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.

Driving

Continuous

About 14 in (35 cm) or less

Comes on*1/ Blinks*2 in Red

*1:On the driver information interface *2:On the audio/information screen *3:At this stage, only the center sensors detect obstacles.

Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.
Indicators light up where the sensor detects an obstacle.
Continued 567

uuParking Your VehicleuParking Sensor System*

Turning off All Rear Sensors
1. Make sure that the parking sensor system is not activated. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.
2. Press and hold the parking sensor system button, and set the power mode to ON. 3. Keep pressing the button for 10 seconds. Release the button when the indicator
in the button flashes. u The beeper sounds once. 4. Press the button again. The indicator in the button goes off. u The beeper sounds twice. The rear sensors are now turned off.

1Turning off All Rear Sensors
When you put the transmission into (R, the indicator in the parking sensor system button blinks as a reminder that the rear sensors have been turned off.

To turn the rear sensors on again, follow the above procedure. The beeper sounds three times when the rear sensors come back on.

Driving

568

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

Cross Traffic Monitor*
Monitors the rear corner areas using the radar sensors when reversing, and alerts you if a vehicle approaching from a rear corner is detected.
The system is convenient when you are backing out of a parking space.

1Cross Traffic Monitor*
3 CAUTION
Cross Traffic Monitor cannot detect all approaching vehicles and may not detect an approaching vehicle at all.
Failure to visually confirm that it is safe to back up the vehicle before doing so may result in a collision.
Do not solely rely on the system when reversing; always also use your mirrors, and look behind and to the sides of your vehicle before reversing.

The parking sensor system's alerting buzzer overrides the Cross Traffic Monitor buzzer when the sensors are detecting obstacles at the closest range.

Driving

* Not available on all models

Continued

569

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

How the System Works

The system activates when: · The power mode is in ON. · The Cross Traffic Monitor is turned on.
2 Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off P. 572
· The transmission is in (R. · Your vehicle is moving at 3 mph (5 km/h) or
lower.

Radar sensors: Underneath the rear bumper corners
When a vehicle is detected approaching from a rear corner, Cross Traffic Monitor alerts you with a buzzer and a displayed warning.
The system will not detect a vehicle that approaches from directly behind your vehicle, nor will it provide alerts about a detected vehicle when it moves directly behind your vehicle.
The system does not provide alerts for a vehicle that is moving away from your vehicle, and it may alert for pedestrians, bicycles, or stationary objects.

1Cross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor may not detect or may delay alerting an approaching vehicle, or may alert without an approaching vehicle under the following conditions:
· An obstacle, such as another vehicle and a wall,
near your vehicle's rear bumper, is blocking the radar sensor's scope.
· Your vehicle is moving at the speed of about 3 mph
(5 km/h) or higher.
· A vehicle is approaching at the speed other than
between about 6 mph (10 km/h) and 16 mph (25 km/h).
· The system picks up external interference such as
other radar sensors from another vehicle or strong radio wave transmitted from a facility nearby.
· Either corner of the rear bumper is covered with
snow, ice, mud or dirt.
· When there is bad weather. · Your vehicle is on an incline. · Your vehicle is tilted due to a heavy load in the rear. · Your vehicle is reversing towards a wall, a pole, a
vehicle, and so on.
The rear bumper or the sensors have been improperly repaired or the rear bumper has been deformed. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

For proper operation, always keep the rear bumper corner area clean. Do not cover the rear bumper corner area with labels or stickers of any kind.

Driving

570 * Not available on all models

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*

When the System Detects a Vehicle
Arrow Icon

1When the System Detects a Vehicle
If the on the lower right changes to in amber when the transmission is in (R, mud, snow or ice, etc. may have accumulated in the vicinity of the sensor. The system is temporarily canceled. Check the bumper corners for any obstructions, and thoroughly clean the area if necessary.

Normal View

Wide View

Top Down View

If the comes on when the transmission is in (R, there may be a problem with the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

An arrow icon appears on the side a vehicle is approaching on the audio/information screen.

If the display remains the same with the transmission in (R, there may be a problem with the rear camera system and the Cross Traffic Monitor system. Do not use the system and have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Driving

Continued

571

uuParking Your VehicleuCross Traffic Monitor*
Cross Traffic Monitor On and Off
The system can be turned on and off on the audio/information screen by pressing the Cross Traffic Monitor icon.
Cross Traffic Monitor icon
572

Driving

Multi-View Rear Camera

About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The audio/information screen can display your vehicle's rear view. The display automatically changes to the rear view when the transmission is put into (R .

Multi-View Rear Camera Display Area

Approx. 39 inches (1 m) Approx. 20 inches (50 cm) Camera

Guidelines

Wide View Mode Normal View Mode

1About Your Multi-View Rear Camera
The rear camera view is restricted. You cannot see the corner ends of the bumper or what is underneath the bumper. Its unique lens also makes objects appear closer or farther than they actually are.
Visually confirm that it is safe to drive before backing up. Certain conditions (such as weather, lighting, and high temperatures) may also restrict the rear view. Do not rely on the rearview display which does not give you all information about conditions at the back of your vehicle.
If the camera lens is covered with dirt or moisture, use a soft, moist cloth to keep the lens clean and free of debris.

Driving

Bumper

Top Down View Mode

You can view three different camera modes on the rearview display.
Touch the appropriate icon to switch the mode. : Wide view mode : Normal view mode : Top down view mode

You can change the Fixed Guideline and Dynamic Guideline settings.
2 Customized Features P. 355, 363
Fixed Guideline ON: Guidelines appear when you put the transmission into (R. OFF: Guidelines do not appear. Dynamic Guideline ON: Guidelines move according to the steering wheel direction. OFF: Guidelines do not move.

Continued

573

uuMulti-View Rear CamerauAbout Your Multi-View Rear Camera
· If you were last using Wide view mode or Normal view mode, the same view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R.
· If you were using Top down view mode before you turned off the engine, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you set the power mode to ON and put the transmission into (R.
· If you were using Top down view mode and 10 seconds elapsed after you took the transmission out of (R, Wide view mode will be activated the next time you put the transmission into (R.
· If you were using Top down view mode and put the transmission back into (R within 10 seconds after you took it out of (R, Top down view mode will be activated.
574

Driving

Refueling

Fuel Information
Fuel recommendation
Unleaded gasoline, pump octane number 87 or higher
Use of a lower octane gasoline can cause a persistent, heavy metallic knocking noise that can lead to engine damage.
Top tier detergent gasoline Because the level of detergency and additives in gasoline vary in the market, Honda endorses the use of "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" where available to help maintain the performance and reliability of your vehicle. TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline meets a new gasoline standard jointly established by leading automotive manufacturers to meet the needs of today's advanced engines.
Qualifying gasoline retailers will, in most cases, identify their gasoline as having met "TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline" standards at the retail location. This fuel is guaranteed to contain the proper level of detergent additives and be free of metallic additives. The proper level of detergent additives, and absence of harmful metallic additives in gasoline, help avoid buildup of deposits in your engine and emission control system.
For further important fuel-related information for your vehicle, or on information on gasoline that does not contain MMT, visit www.hondacars.com. In Canada, visit www.honda.ca for additional information on gasoline. For more information on top tier gasoline, visit www.toptiergas.com.

1Fuel Information
NOTICE We recommend quality gasoline containing detergent additives that help prevent fuel system and engine deposits. In addition, in order to maintain good performance, fuel economy, and emissions control, we strongly recommend the use of gasoline that does NOT contain harmful manganese-based fuel additives such as MMT, if such gasoline is available.
Use of gasoline with these additives may adversely affect performance, and cause the malfunction indicator lamp on your instrument panel to come on. If this happens, contact a dealer for service. Some gasoline today is blended with oxygenates such as ethanol. Your vehicle is designed to operate on oxygenated gasoline containing up to 15% ethanol by volume. Do not use gasoline containing methanol. If you notice any undesirable operating symptoms, try another service station or switch to another brand of gasoline.

Fuel tank capacity: 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Driving

575

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

How to Refuel

Your fuel tank is not equipped with a fuel filler cap. You can insert the filler nozzle

directly into the filler neck. The tank seals itself again when you pull out the filler

nozzle.

1. Stop your vehicle with the service station

pump on the left side of the vehicle in the

rear.

2. Turn off the engine.

3. Unlock the driver's door.

u The fuel fill door on the outer side of the

Press

Fuel Fill Door

vehicle will unlock.
2 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside P. 166

4. Press and release the area indicated by the

arrow to release the fuel fill door. You will

hear a click and the lid will open slightly.

5. Manually pull the fuel fill door to a fully

open position.

1How to Refuel
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
· Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
· Handle fuel only outdoors. · Wipe up spills immediately.
The fuel filler opening is designed to accept only service station filler nozzles for refueling. Use of smaller diameter tubes (e.g., those used to siphon fuel for other uses) or other non-service station devices can damage the area in and around the filler opening.

Driving

576

uuRefuelinguHow to Refuel

6. Place the end of the filler nozzle on the lower part of filler opening, then insert it slowly and fully. u Make sure that the end of the filler nozzle goes down along with the filler pipe. u Keep the filler nozzle level. u When the tank is full, the filler nozzle will click off automatically. u If you do not fill up the tank to full, always add a minimum of 1.3 US gal (5 L) of fuel. u After filling, wait about five seconds before removing the filler nozzle.
7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1How to Refuel
Use the lock tab or the master door lock switch to unlock the fuel fill door. The vehicle doors and fuel fill door automatically relock if the remote unlock function is used. This can be deactivated by briefly opening then closing the driver's door.
If the filler nozzle keeps turning off when the tank is not full, there may be a problem with the pump's fuel vapor recovery system. Try filling at another pump. If this does not fix the problem, consult a dealer.
The filler nozzle automatically stops to leave space in the fuel tank so that fuel does not overflow as a result of changes in air temperature.
Do not continue to add fuel after the filler nozzle has automatically stopped. Additional fuel can exceed the full tank capacity.

If you repeatedly fill the tank with less than the specified minimum amount of fuel, the malfunction indicator lamp may come on. If this happens, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

If you have to refuel your vehicle from a portable container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.
2 Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container P. 673

Driving

577

Fuel Economy and CO2 Emissions
Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Achieving fuel economy and reducing CO2 emissions is dependent on several factors, including driving conditions, load weight, idling time, driving habits, and vehicle condition. Depending on these and other factors, you may not achieve the rated fuel economy of this vehicle.
Maintenance and Fuel Economy
You can optimize your fuel economy with proper maintenance of your vehicle. Always maintain your vehicle in accordance with the messages displayed on the driver information interface. · Use engine oil with the viscosity recommended.
2 Recommended Engine Oil P. 598
· Maintain the specified tire pressure. · Do not load the vehicle with excess cargo. · Keep your vehicle clean. A buildup of snow or mud on your vehicle's underside
adds weight and increases wind resistance.

1Improving Fuel Economy and Reducing CO2 Emissions
Direct calculation is the recommended method to determine actual fuel consumed while driving.

Miles driven 100

Gallons of fuel
Liters of fuel

Miles per Gallon
Kilometers driven

L per 100 km

In Canada, posted fuel economy numbers are established following a simulated test. For more information on how this test is performed, please visit https://www.nrcan.gc.ca and search for "fuel consumption testing" in the search field at the top of the page.

Driving

578

Turbo Engine Vehicle*

Handling Precautions
The turbocharger is a high-precision device to obtain greater horsepower by delivering a large volume of compressed air into the engine using a turbine driven by the engine's exhaust gas pressure.
· When the engine is cold just after starting, avoid revving the engine or sudden acceleration.
· Always replace the engine oil and engine oil filter according to the Maintenance MinderTM. The turbine rotates at very high speeds over 100,000 rpm and its temperature reaches over 1,292°F (700°C). It is lubricated and cooled by engine oil. If you fail to replace the engine oil and filter at the scheduled distance or interval, deteriorated engine oil may cause failure such as sticking and abnormal noise of the turbine bearing.

1Turbo Engine Vehicle*
The scheduled maintenance intervals for replacing the filter is indicated on the driver information interface. Follow the information on replacement timing.
2 Maintenance MinderTM P. 585
The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. or Engine temperature near limit. Avoid heavy acceleration and high speed. message may appear on the driver information interface when you restart the engine after driving under high load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly terrain. This is normal. The message goes off after you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

Models with B-type meter
The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark when you restart the engine after driving under high load conditions such as at high speed or in hilly terrain. This is normal. The gauge goes down after you idle or drive the vehicle for about one minute.

Driving

* Not available on all models

579

580

Maintenance
This chapter discusses basic maintenance.

Before Performing Maintenance Inspection and Maintenance ............ 582 Safety When Performing Maintenance .... 583 Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service ........................................... 584
Maintenance MinderTM ..................... 585 Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood .... 595 Opening the Hood ........................... 597 Recommended Engine Oil ................ 598 Oil Check ......................................... 599 Adding Engine Oil ............................ 601 Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter..... 602

Engine Coolant ................................ 605 Transmission Fluid............................ 607 Brake Fluid....................................... 608 Refilling Window Washer Fluid......... 609 Replacing Light Bulbs ....................... 610 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades.... 615 Checking and Maintaining Tires Checking Tires ................................. 617 Tire and Loading Information Label ... 618 Tire Labeling .................................... 618 DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)....620 Wear Indicators................................ 622 Tire Service Life ................................ 622

Tire and Wheel Replacement ........... 623 Tire Rotation.................................... 624 Winter Tires ..................................... 625 Battery............................................... 627 Remote Transmitter Care Replacing the Remote Battery .......... 629
Climate Control System Maintenance ....630 Cleaning
Interior Care .................................... 631 Exterior Care.................................... 633 Accessories and Modifications Accessories ...................................... 636 Modifications................................... 637

581

Before Performing Maintenance

Inspection and Maintenance

For your safety, perform all listed inspections and maintenance to keep your vehicle in good condition. If you become aware of any abnormality (noise, smell, insufficient brake fluid, oil residue on the ground, etc.), have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. (Note, however, that service at a dealer is not mandatory to keep your warranties in effect.)
Types of Inspection and Maintenance
Routine inspections Perform inspections before long distance trips, when washing the vehicle, or when refueling.
2 Maintenance P. 31
Periodic inspections · Check the brake fluid level monthly.
2 Brake Fluid P. 608
· Check the tire pressure monthly. Examine the tread for wear and foreign objects.
2 Checking and Maintaining Tires P. 617
· Check the operation of the exterior lights monthly.
2 Replacing Light Bulbs P. 610
· Check the condition of the wiper blades at least every six months.
2 Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades P. 615

1Inspection and Maintenance
U.S. models
Maintenance, replacement, or repair of emissions control devices and systems may be done by any automotive repair establishment or individuals using parts that are "certified" to EPA standards.
According to state and federal regulations, failure to perform maintenance on the maintenance main items marked with # will not void your emissions warranties. However, all maintenance services should be performed in accordance with the intervals indicated by the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 590
If you want to perform complex maintenance tasks that require more skills and tools, you can purchase a subscription to the Service Express website at www.techinfo.honda.com.
2 Authorized Manuals P. 688
If you want to perform maintenance yourself, make sure that you have the necessary tools and skills first. After performing maintenance, update the records in the separate maintenance booklet.

Maintenance

582

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuSafety When Performing Maintenance

Safety When Performing Maintenance
Some of the most important safety precautions are given here. However, we cannot warn you of every conceivable hazard that can arise in performing maintenance. Only you can decide whether you should perform a given task.
Maintenance Safety
· To reduce the possibility of fire or explosion, keep cigarettes, sparks, and flames away from the battery and all fuel related parts.
· Never leave rags, towels, or other flammable objects under the hood. u Heat from the engine and exhaust can ignite them, causing a fire.
· To clean parts, use a commercially available degreaser or parts cleaner, not gasoline.
· Wear eye protection and protective clothing when working with the battery or compressed air.
· Engine exhaust contains carbon monoxide, which is poisonous and can kill you. u Only operate the engine if there is sufficient ventilation.
Vehicle Safety
· The vehicle must be in a stationary condition. u Make sure your vehicle is parked on level ground, the parking brake is set, and the engine is off.
· Be aware that hot parts can burn you. u Make sure to let the engine and exhaust system cool thoroughly before touching vehicle parts.
· Be aware that moving parts can injure you. u Do not start the engine unless instructed, and keep your hands and limbs away from moving parts. u Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

1Safety When Performing Maintenance
3 WARNING
Improperly maintaining this vehicle or failing to correct a problem before driving can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the inspection and maintenance recommendations according to the schedules in this owner's manual.
3 WARNING
Failure to properly follow maintenance instructions and precautions can cause you to be seriously hurt or killed.
Always follow the procedures and precautions in this owner's manual.

Maintenance

583

uuBefore Performing MaintenanceuParts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service

Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
The use of Honda genuine parts and fluids is recommended when maintaining and servicing your vehicle. Honda genuine parts are manufactured according to the same high quality standards used in Honda vehicles.

1Parts and Fluids Used in Maintenance Service
2.0 L engine models NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.

Maintenance

584

Maintenance MinderTM
If the engine oil life is less than 15%, you will see the Maintenance Minder messages appear on the driver information interface every time you set the power mode to ON. The messages notify you when to change the engine oil, or when to bring your vehicle to a dealer for indicated maintenance services.
585

Maintenance

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

To Use Maintenance MinderTM
Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information
Maintenance items, which should be serviced at the same time that you replace the engine oil, appear on the driver information interface. You can view them on the engine oil life screen at any time.
Models with A-type meter
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. The engine
oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.
Engine Oil Life

1Displaying the Maintenance Minder Information

Based on the engine operating conditions, the remaining engine oil life is calculated and displayed as a percentage.

Displayed Engine Oil Life (%) 100 90 80 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0

Calculated Engine Oil Life (%) 100 to 91 90 to 81 80 to 71 70 to 61 60 to 51 50 to 41 40 to 31 30 to 21 20 to 16 15 to 11 10 to 6 5 to 1 0

There is a list of maintenance main and sub items you can view on the driver information interface.
2 Maintenance Service Items P. 590

Left Selector Wheel (home) Button

Main Item

Sub Item

Maintenance

586

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Models with B-type meter
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed.
The engine oil life appears on the driver information interface along with maintenance items due soon.
Engine Oil Life

Sub Item Main Item

Right Selector Wheel

Maintenance

Continued

587

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Minder Messages on the Driver Information Interface

Maintenance Message -
Maintenance Due Soon
*1:Models with A-type meter *2:Models with B-type meter

Oil Life Display
*1
15 %
*1

Explanation

Information

*2 When you select the Maintenance Minder screen,

it displays codes for

maintenance items due at

the next engine oil change,

along with the percentage of

engine oil life remaining.

The remaining engine oil life The engine oil is approaching

*2 is 15 to 6 percent.

the end of its service life, and

Models with A-type meter

the maintenance items should

Press the (home) button be inspected and serviced to switch to another display. soon.

Models with B-type meter
Roll the right selector wheel to switch to another display.

Maintenance

588

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Message Maintenance Due Now
Maintenance Past Due
*1:Models with A-type meter *2:Models with B-type meter

Oil Life Display 5 %
*1
Negative Distance
*1

Explanation

Information

The remaining engine oil life The engine oil has almost

*2 is 5 to 1 percent.

reached the end of its service

Models with A-type meter

life, and the maintenance items

Press the (home) button should be inspected and to switch to another display. serviced as soon as possible.

Models with B-type meter
Roll the right selector wheel to switch to another display.

The engine oil life has passed The engine oil life has passed. its service life, and a negative The maintenance items must distance appears after driving be inspected and serviced over 10 miles (U.S. models) or immediately. *2 10 km (Canadian models). The negative distance on the display blinks.
Models with A-type meter
Press the (home) button to switch to another display.
Models with B-type meter
Roll the right selector wheel to switch to another display.

Maintenance

The system message indicator ( ) comes on along with the Maintenance Minder message.

Continued 589

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Maintenance Service Items

System Message Indicator

Maintenance Minder Message

Main Item

Sub Items

Maintenance

590

*1 : Models with A-type meter *2 : Models with B-type meter

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

U.S. models

1Maintenance Service Items
· Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 if
they are noisy.

CODE A B

Maintenance Main Items
Replace engine oil*1
Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter
Inspect front and rear brakes
Inspect these items:
· Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots · Suspension components · Driveshaft boots · Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®) · All fluid levels and condition of fluids · Exhaust system# · Fuel lines and connections#

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
# : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 685.

CODE 1 2
3 4
5 7

*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 15,000 miles (24,000 km). *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 25,000 miles (40,000 km). *5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years.

Maintenance

Continued

591

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM Canadian models

1Maintenance Service Items
· Adjust the valves during services A, 0, 9, 1, 2, or 3
if they are noisy.

CODE

Maintenance Main Items

A Replace engine oil*1

0 Replace engine oil*1 and oil filter

*1: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 12 months after the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.
*2: If you drive in dusty conditions, replace the air cleaner element every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *3: If you drive primarily in urban areas that have high concentrations of soot in the air from industry and
from diesel-powered vehicles, replace the dust and pollen filter every 24,000 km (15,000 miles). *4: Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehicle speeds results in higher transmission temperatures.
This requires transmission fluid changes more frequently than recommended by the Maintenance Minder. If you regularly drive your vehicle under these conditions, have the transmission fluid changed every 40,000 km (25,000 miles). *5: If a Maintenance Minder message does not appear more than 36 months after the display for item 7 is reset, change the brake fluid every 3 years. # : See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first column on page 687.

CODE 1 2
3 4
5 7 9

Maintenance Sub Items Rotate tires
Replace air cleaner element*2 Replace dust and pollen filter*3 Inspect drive belt
Replace transmission fluid*4
Replace spark plugs Inspect valve clearance
Replace engine coolant
Replace brake fluid*5
Service front and rear brakes Inspect these items:
· Tie rod ends, steering gearbox, and boots · Suspension components · Driveshaft boots · Brake hoses and lines (including ABS/VSA®) · All fluid levels and condition of fluids · Exhaust system# · Fuel lines and connections#

Maintenance

592

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM

Resetting the Display
Reset the maintenance minder information display if you have performed the maintenance service.
Models with A-type meter
Left Selector Wheel (home) Button

1Resetting the Display
NOTICE Failure to reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after a maintenance service results in the system showing incorrect maintenance intervals, which can lead to serious mechanical problems.
The dealer will reset the Maintenance MinderTM display after completing the required maintenance service. If someone other than a dealer performs maintenance service, reset the Maintenance MinderTM display yourself.
Models with Display Audio
You can also reset the Maintenance MinderTM display using the audio/information screen.
2 Customized Features P. 363

Maintenance

1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Press the (home) button. 3. Roll the left selector wheel until is displayed. 4. Press the left selector wheel to go to the Maintenance Minder screen. 5. Press and hold the left selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset
mode. 6. Roll the left selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All
due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process). 7. Press the left selector wheel to reset the selected item. 8. Repeat from step 5 for other items you wish to reset.

Continued

593

uuMaintenance MinderTMuTo Use Maintenance MinderTM
Models with B-type meter
Right Selector Wheel
1. Set the power mode to ON. 2. Roll the right selector wheel until the Maintenance Minder screen is displayed. 3. Press and hold the right selector wheel for about 10 seconds to enter the reset
mode. 4. Roll the right selector wheel to select a maintenance item to reset, or to select All
due items (You can also select Cancel to end the process). 5. Press the right selector wheel to reset the selected item. 6. Repeat from step 3 for other items you wish to reset.
594

Maintenance

Maintenance Under the Hood
Maintenance Items Under the Hood
1.5 L engine models
Engine Oil Fill Cap Washer Fluid (Blue Cap) Engine Coolant Reserve Tank
Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange) Radiator Cap

Brake Fluid (Black Cap) Battery
Continued 595

Maintenance

uuMaintenance Under the HooduMaintenance Items Under the Hood 2.0 L engine models
Engine Oil Dipstick (Orange) Engine Oil Fill Cap
Washer Fluid (Blue Cap)
Engine Coolant Reserve Tank Radiator Cap
596

Brake Fluid (Black Cap)
Battery

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOpening the Hood

Opening the Hood
Hood Release Handle
Pull

Lever

Support Rod

Grip

Clamp

1. Park the vehicle on a level surface, and set the parking brake.
2. Pull the hood release handle under the driver's side lower corner of the dashboard. u The hood will pop up slightly.

1Opening the Hood
3 WARNING
The hood support rod can become very hot due to heat from the engine.

3. Push the hood latch lever (located under the front edge of the hood to the center) to the side and raise the hood. Once you have raised the hood slightly, you can release the lever.

To ensure against possible burns, do not handle the metal section of the rod: Use the foam grip instead.
NOTICE Do not open the hood when the wiper arms are raised. The hood will strike the wipers, resulting in possible damage to the hood and/or the wipers.

4. Remove the support rod from the clamp using the grip. Mount the support rod in the hood.
When closing, remove the support rod, and stow it in the clamp, then gently lower the hood. Remove your hand at a height of approximately 12 inches (30 cm) and let the hood close.

2.0 L engine models NOTICE
Do not press the engine cover forcibly. This may damage the engine cover and component parts.
When closing the hood, check that the hood is securely latched.
If the hood latch lever moves stiffly, or if you can open the hood without lifting the lever, the latch mechanism should be cleaned and lubricated.
Do not open the hood while the Auto Idle Stop function is activated.

Maintenance

597

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRecommended Engine Oil

Recommended Engine Oil

Use a genuine engine oil or another commercial engine oil of suitable type and viscosity (for the ambient temperature) as shown in the image that follows.
Oil is a major contributor to your engine's performance and longevity. If you drive the vehicle with insufficient or deteriorated oil, the engine may fail or be damaged.

1Recommended Engine Oil
Engine Oil Additives Your vehicle does not require oil additives. In fact, they may adversely affect the engine performance and durability.

Genuine Engine Oil Honda Genuine Motor Oil

Commercial Engine Oil
Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil with an API Certification Seal on the container.

The following seal indicates the oil is energy conserving and that it meets the American Petroleum Institute's latest requirements.

Maintenance

Ambient Temperature

*1:Formulated to improve fuel economy.
Synthetic oil You may also use synthetic motor oil if it is labeled with the API Certification Seal and is the specified viscosity grade.

598

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

Oil Check

We recommend that you check the engine oil level every time you refuel.

Park the vehicle on level ground.

Wait approximately three minutes after turning the engine off before you check the

oil.

1.5 L engine models

1. Remove the dipstick (orange). 2. Wipe the dipstick with a clean cloth or

paper towel.

3. Insert the dipstick back all the way into its

hole.

1Oil Check
If the oil level is near or below the lower mark, slowly add oil, being careful not to overfill.

2.0 L engine models

Maintenance

Continued

599

uuMaintenance Under the HooduOil Check

1.5 L engine models
Upper Mark Lower Mark

4. Remove the dipstick again, and check the level. It should be between the upper and lower marks. Add oil if necessary.

1Oil Check
NOTICE Under certain driving conditions, it is normal for the engine oil level to rise above the upper mark. If you have a concern, consult a dealer for details.

2.0 L engine models

Upper Mark Lower Mark

Maintenance

600

uuMaintenance Under the HooduAdding Engine Oil

Adding Engine Oil
1.5 L engine models

2.0 L engine models

Engine Oil Fill Cap

1. Unscrew and remove the engine oil fill cap. 2. Add oil slowly. 3. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap, and tighten
it securely. 4. Wait for three minutes and recheck the
engine oil dipstick.

1Adding Engine Oil
NOTICE Do not fill the engine oil above the upper mark. Overfilling the engine oil may result in leaks and engine damage.
If any oil spills, wipe it away immediately. Spilled oil may damage the engine compartment components.

Engine Oil Fill Cap

Maintenance

601

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

You must change the engine oil and oil filter regularly in order to maintain the engine's lubrication. The engine may be damaged if they are not changed regularly.

Change the oil and filter in accordance with the maintenance message on the driver

information interface.

1. Run the engine until it reaches normal

operating temperature, and then turn the

engine off.

2. Open the hood and remove the engine oil

fill cap.

3. Remove the Phillips-head screws and

slotted head screws by turning 90°

counter-clockwise on the undercarriage

Screw

Under Cover

and remove the under cover.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
NOTICE You may damage the environment if you do not dispose of the oil in a suitable way. If you are changing the oil by yourself, appropriately dispose of the used oil. Put the oil in a sealed container and take it to a recycling center. Do not throw the oil away into a garbage can or onto the ground.

Maintenance

602

1.5 L engine models
Drain Bolt

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter
4. Remove the drain bolt and washer from the bottom of the engine, and drain the oil into a suitable container.

Washer
2.0 L engine models
Drain Bolt
Washer

Maintenance

Continued

603

uuMaintenance Under the HooduChanging the Engine Oil and Oil Filter

Maintenance

1.5 L engine models
Oil Filter
2.0 L engine models
Oil Filter
604

5. Remove the oil filter and dispose of the remaining oil.
6. Check that the filter gasket is not stuck to the engine contact surface. u If it is stuck, you must detach it.
7. Wipe away dirt and dust adhering to the contact surface of the engine block, and install a new oil filter. u Apply a light coat of new engine oil to the filter gasket.
8. Put a new washer on the drain bolt, then reinstall the drain bolt. u Tightening torque: 30 lbfft (40 Nm, 4.0 kgfm)
9. Pour the recommended engine oil into the engine. u Engine oil change capacity (including filter):
1.5 L engine models
3.7 US qt (3.5 L)
2.0 L engine models
4.4 US qt (4.2 L) 10. Reinstall the engine oil fill cap securely and
start the engine. 11. Run the engine for a few minutes, and
then check that there is no leak from the drain bolt or oil filter. 12. Stop the engine, wait for three minutes, and then check the oil level on the dipstick. u If necessary, add more engine oil.

1Changing the Engine Oil and Oil Filter You will need a special wrench to replace the oil filter. You can buy this wrench from a dealer.
When installing the new oil filter, follow the instructions supplied with the oil filter.
Reinstall the engine oil fill cap. Start the engine. If the low oil pressure warning appears, turn off the engine, and check your work.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Engine Coolant
Specified coolant: Honda Long Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type 2
This coolant is premixed with 50% antifreeze and 50% water. Do not add any straight antifreeze or water.

We recommend you check the engine coolant level every time you refuel. Check the reserve tank first. If it is completely empty, also check the coolant level in the radiator. Add the engine coolant accordingly.

Reserve Tank
Reserve Tank

MAX MIN

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Check the amount of coolant in the reserve tank. u If the coolant level is below the MIN mark, add the specified coolant until it reaches the MAX mark.
3. Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

1Engine Coolant
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
NOTICE Genuine Honda engine coolant is a 50/50 mixture of antifreeze and water that can withstand freezing at temperatures as low as about -31°F (-35°C). If your vehicle is consistently subjected to temperatures below this, the concentration of antifreeze in the coolant should be increased. Consult a dealer for details.
If Honda antifreeze/coolant is not available, you may use another major brand of non-silicate coolant as a temporary replacement. Check that it is a high quality coolant recommended for aluminum engines. Continued use of any non-Honda coolant can result in corrosion, causing the cooling system to malfunction or fail. Have the cooling system flushed and refilled with Honda antifreeze/coolant as soon as possible.

Maintenance

Continued

605

uuMaintenance Under the HooduEngine Coolant

Radiator
Radiator Cap

1. Make sure the engine and radiator are cool.
2. Turn the radiator cap 1/8 turn counterclockwise and relieve any pressure in the cooling system.
3. Push down and turn the radiator cap counter-clockwise to remove it.
4. The coolant level should be up to the base of the filler neck. Add coolant if it is low.
5. Put the radiator cap back on, and tighten it fully.

1Engine Coolant Do not add rust inhibitors or other additives to your vehicle's cooling system. They may not be compatible with the coolant or with the engine components.
1Radiator
NOTICE Pour the fluid slowly and carefully so you do not spill any. Clean up any spills immediately; they can damage components in the engine compartment.

Maintenance

606

Transmission Fluid
Specified fluid: Honda HCF-2 Have a dealer check the fluid level and replace if necessary. Do not attempt to check or change the transmission fluid yourself.

uuMaintenance Under the HooduTransmission Fluid
1Transmission Fluid NOTICE Do not mix Honda HCF-2 with other transmission fluids. Using a transmission fluid other than Honda HCF-2 may adversely affect the operation and durability of your vehicle's transmission, and damage the transmission. Any damage caused by using a transmission fluid that is not equivalent to Honda HCF-2 is not covered by Honda's new vehicle limited warranty.

Maintenance

607

uuMaintenance Under the HooduBrake Fluid

Brake Fluid

Specified fluid: Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Checking the Brake Fluid

MAX

The fluid level should be between the MIN and MAX marks on the side of the reserve tank.

MIN

Reserve Tank

1Brake Fluid
NOTICE Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is not compatible with your vehicle's braking system and can cause extensive damage.
If the specified brake fluid is not available, you should use only DOT 3 or DOT 4 fluid from a sealed container as a temporary replacement.
Using any non-Honda brake fluid can cause corrosion and decrease the longevity of the system. Have the brake system flushed and refilled with Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3 as soon as possible.
If the brake fluid level is at or below the MIN mark, have a dealer inspect the vehicle for leaks or worn brake pads as soon as possible.

Maintenance

608

uuMaintenance Under the HooduRefilling Window Washer Fluid

Refilling Window Washer Fluid
Check the amount of window washer fluid. If the level is low, fill the washer reservoir.
Canadian models
If the washer fluid is low, a message appears on the driver information interface.
Pour the washer fluid carefully. Do not overflow the reservoir.

1Refilling Window Washer Fluid
NOTICE Do not use engine antifreeze or a vinegar/water solution in the windshield washer reservoir. Antifreeze can damage your vehicle's paint. A vinegar/water solution can damage the windshield washer pump. Use only commercially available windshield washer fluid. Avoid prolonged use of hard water to prevent lime scale build up.

Maintenance

609

Replacing Light Bulbs

Headlights
Headlights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
Fog Lights*
Fog lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

1Headlights
The headlight aim is set by the factory, and does not need to be adjusted. However, if you regularly carry heavy items in the trunk, have the aiming readjusted at a dealer or by a qualified technician.

Front Turn Signal Lights
Front turn signal lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Front Side Marker Lights
Front side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Parking/Daytime Running Lights
Parking/daytime running lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator Lights*
Door mirror side turn lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Maintenance

610 * Not available on all models

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs.
Brake Light: LED Taillight: LED Rear Side Marker Light: LED Rear Turn Signal Light: 21 W (Amber)
1. Pry on the edge of the cover using a flat-tip screwdriver to remove the cover. u Wrap the flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratches.

1Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs
Brake lights, taillights, and rear side marker lights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Cover

2. Remove the bolts. 3. Pull the light assembly out of the rear pillar.

Maintenance

Bolt

Continued

611

uuReplacing Light BulbsuBrake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light, and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs

Bulb Socket

4. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and remove it.
5. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb. 6. Align the pins with the body grommets,
then push in until they fully seat.

Maintenance

612

uuReplacing Light BulbsuTaillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs

Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs
When replacing, use the following bulbs. Taillight: LED Back-Up Light: 16 W
1. Remove the holding clip using a flat-tip screwdriver, then pull the lining back.

1Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs Taillights are LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.
When removing the clip, insert a flat-tip screwdriver, then lift and remove the clip.
Clip

Maintenance

Holding Clip

2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and

Bulb

remove it.

3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb. Insert the clip with the pin raised, and push until it is flat.

Socket
Rear License Plate Light
Rear license plate light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Push until the pin is flat.

613

uuReplacing Light BulbsuHigh-Mount Brake Light Bulb

High-Mount Brake Light Bulb

Models without LED high-mount brake light
When replacing, use the following bulb.
High-Mount Brake Light: 21 W
1. Open the trunk. 2. Turn the socket counter-clockwise and
remove it. 3. Remove the old bulb and insert a new bulb.
Bulb

1High-Mount Brake Light Bulb
Models with LED high-mount brake light
High-mount brake light is LED type. Have an authorized Honda dealer inspect and replace the light assembly.

Socket

Maintenance

614

Checking and Maintaining Wiper Blades
Checking Wiper Blades
If the wiper blade rubber has deteriorated, it will leave streaks, become noisy, and the hard surfaces of the blade may scratch the window glass.

Changing the Wiper Blade
1. Set the power mode to ON, then to VEHICLE OFF.
2. Within 10 seconds of setting the power mode to VEHICLE OFF, hold the wiper switch in the MIST position for more than two seconds. u Both wiper arms are set to the maintenance position as shown in the image.
3. Lift both wiper arms.

1Changing the Wiper Blade
NOTICE Avoid dropping the wiper arm onto the windshield, it may damage the wiper arm and/or the windshield.

Maintenance

Continued

615

uuChecking and Maintaining Wiper BladesuChanging the Wiper Blade

4. Depress the lock tab, then slide the wiper

blade off the wiper arm.

5. Slide the new wiper blade onto the wiper

arm until it clicks into place.

6. Lower both wiper arms.

7. Set the power mode to ON, then set the

wiper switch to the MIST position once.

Tab

u The wiper arms return to the standard position.

Maintenance

616

Checking and Maintaining Tires

Checking Tires
To safely operate your vehicle, your tires must be of the proper type and size, in good condition with adequate tread, and properly inflated.
Inflation guidelines Properly inflated tires provide the best combination of handling, tread life, and comfort. Refer to the driver's doorjamb label or specifications page for the specified pressure.
Underinflated tires wear unevenly, adversely affect handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from overheating.

1Checking Tires
3 WARNING
Using tires that are excessively worn or improperly inflated can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding tire inflation and maintenance.

Maintenance

Overinflated tires make your vehicle ride harshly, are more prone to road hazards, and wear unevenly.
Every day before you drive, look at each of the tires. If one looks lower than the others, check the pressure with a tire gauge.
At least once a month or before long trips, use a gauge to measure the pressure in all tires, including the spare. Even tires in good condition can lose 1-2 psi (10-20 kPa, 0.1-0.2 kgf/cm2) per month.
Inspection guidelines Every time you check inflation, also examine the tires and valve stems. Look for: · Bumps or bulges on the side or in the tread. Replace the tire if you find any cuts,
splits, or cracks in the side of the tire. Replace it if you see fabric or cord. · Remove any foreign objects and inspect for air leaks. · Uneven tread wear. Have a dealer check the wheel alignment. · Excessive tread wear.
2 Wear Indicators P. 622
· Cracks or other damage around valve stem.

Measure the air pressure when tires are cold. This means the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). If necessary, add or release air until the specified pressure is reached.
If checked when hot, tire pressure can be as much as 46 psi (3040 kPa, 0.30.4 kgf/cm2) higher than if checked when cold.
U.S. models
Whenever tire pressure is adjusted, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 463
Have a dealer check the tires if you feel a consistent vibration while driving. New tires and any that have been removed and reinstalled should be properly balanced.
Check the spare tire pressure once a month or before long trips.

617

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Loading Information Label
Tire and Loading Information Label
The label attached to the driver's doorjamb provides necessary tire and loading information.
Label Example

1Tire and Loading Information Label
The tire and loading information label attached to the driver's doorjamb contains: a The number of people your vehicle can carry. b The total weight your vehicle can carry. Do not
exceed this weight. c The original tire sizes for front, rear, and spare. d The proper cold tire pressure for front, rear, and
spare.

Maintenance

Tire Labeling

Example

Tire Size Tire Identification Number (TIN)
Maximum Tire Load
Maximum Tire Pressure Tire Size

The tires that came on your vehicle have a number of markings. Those you should be aware of are described as shown.

Tire Sizes
Whenever tires are replaced, they should be replaced with tires of the same size.

1Tire Sizes
Following is an example of tire size with an explanation of what each component means. P205/55 R16 89H P: Vehicle type (P indicates passenger vehicle). 205: Tire width in millimeters. 55: Aspect ratio (the tire's section height as a percentage of its width). R: Tire construction code (R indicates radial). 16: Rim diameter in inches. 89: Load index (a numerical code associated with the maximum load the tire can carry). H: Speed symbol (an alphabetical code indicating the maximum speed rating).

618

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Labeling

Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The tire identification number (TIN) is a group of numbers and letters that look like the example in the side column. TIN is located on the sidewall of the tire.
Glossary of Tire Terminology
Cold Tire Pressure The tire air pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least three hours or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km). Load Rating Means the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure. Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum tire air pressure that the tire can hold. Maximum Load Rating Means the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that tire. Recommended Inflation Pressure The cold tire inflation pressure recommended by the manufacturer. Treadwear Indicators (TWI) Means the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication of the degrees of wear of the tread.

1Tire Identification Number (TIN)
DOT B97R FW6X 2209 DOT: This indicates that the tire meets all requirements of the U.S. Department of Transportation. B97R: Manufacturer's identification mark. FW6X: Tire type code. 22 09: Date of manufacture.
Year Week

Maintenance

619

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)
The tires on your vehicle meet all U.S. Federal Safety Requirements. All tires are also graded for treadwear, traction, and temperature performance according to Department of Transportation (DOT) standards. The following explains these gradings.

Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course. For example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits, service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate.

1Uniform Tire Quality Grading
For example: Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal Safety Requirements in addition to these grades.

Maintenance

620

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuDOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Traction
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
Temperature
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C, representing the tire's resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law.

1Traction
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.
1Temperature
Warning: The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure.

Maintenance

621

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWear Indicators

Wear Indicators
Example of a Wear Indicator mark

The groove where the wear indicator is located is about 1/16 inch (about 1.6 mm) shallower than elsewhere on the tire. If the tread has worn so that the indicator is exposed, replace the tire. Worn out tires have poor traction on wet roads.

Tire Service Life
The life of your tires is dependent on many factors, including driving habits, road conditions, vehicle loading, inflation pressure, maintenance history, speed, and environmental conditions (even when the tires are not in use).
In addition to regular inspections and inflation pressure maintenance, it is recommended that you have annual inspections performed once the tires reach five years old. All tires, including the spare, should be removed from service after 10 years from the date of manufacture, regardless of their condition or state of wear.

Maintenance

622

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire and Wheel Replacement

Tire and Wheel Replacement
Replace your tires with radials of the same size, load range, speed rating, and maximum cold tire pressure rating (as shown on the tire's sidewall). Using tires of a different size or construction can cause certain vehicle systems such as the ABS and Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system to work incorrectly.
It is best to replace all four tires at the same time. If that isn't possible, replace the front or rear tires in pairs.

1Tire and Wheel Replacement
3 WARNING
Installing improper tires on your vehicle can affect handling and stability. This can cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.

Make sure that the wheel's specifications match those of the original wheels.

Always use the size and type of tires recommended in this owner's manual.

Maintenance

623

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuTire Rotation
Tire Rotation
Rotating tires according to the maintenance messages on the driver information interface helps to distribute wear more evenly and increase tire life.
Tires without rotation marks Rotate the tires as shown here.

1Tire Rotation
Tires with directional tread patterns should only be rotated front to back (not from one side to the other). Directional tires should be mounted with the rotation indication mark facing forward, as shown below.

Front

Direction Mark

Tires with rotation marks

Rotate the tires as shown here.

Front

U.S. models
Whenever tires are rotated, you must calibrate the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 463

Maintenance

624

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

Winter Tires
If driving on snowy or frozen roads, mount all season marked M+S tires, snow tires, or tire chains; reduce speed; and maintain sufficient distance between vehicles when driving.
Be particularly careful when operating the steering wheel or brakes to prevent skidding.
Use tire chains, snow tires, or all season tires when necessary or according to the law.
When mounting, refer to the following points.

1Winter Tires
3 WARNING
Using the wrong chains, or not properly installing chains, can damage the brake lines and cause a crash in which you can be seriously injured or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding the selection and use of tire chains.

For winter tires: · Select the size and load ranges that are the same as the original tires. · Mount the tires to all four wheels.

NOTICE Traction devices that are the wrong size or improperly installed can damage your vehicle's brake lines, suspension, body, and wheels. Stop driving if they are hitting any part of the vehicle.

Maintenance

Continued

625

uuChecking and Maintaining TiresuWinter Tires

For tire chains: · Install them on the front tires only. · Because your vehicle has limited tire clearance, we strongly recommend using the
chains listed below:
Models with 215/55R16 tires
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
Models with 215/50R17 tires
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1032
Models with 235/40R18 tires
Cable-type: SCC Radial Chain SC1034
· Follow the chain manufacturer's instruction when installing. Mount them as tightly as you can.
· Check that the chains do not touch the brake lines or suspension. · Drive slowly.

1Winter Tires When tire chains are mounted, follow the chain manufacturer's instructions regarding vehicle operational limits.
If your vehicle is equipped with summer tires, be aware that these tires are not designed for winter driving conditions. For more information, contact a dealer.

Your vehicle's tires are not suitable for mounting any traction device.

Maintenance

626

Battery

Checking the Battery

The condition of the battery is monitored by a sensor located on the negative terminal of the battery. If there is a problem with this sensor, the driver information interface will display a warning message. If this happens, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

Check the battery terminals for corrosion monthly.

If your vehicle's battery is disconnected or goes dead: · The audio system is disabled.
2 Reactivating the audio system P. 233
Canadian models only
· The immobilizer system needs to be reset.
2 Immobilizer System Indicator P. 101

1Battery
3 WARNING
The battery gives off explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
A spark or flame can cause the battery to explode with enough force to kill or seriously hurt you.
When conducting any battery maintenance, wear protective clothing and a face shield, or have a skilled technician do it.
WARNING: Battery post, terminals, and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your hands after handling.

Maintenance

627

uuBatteryuCharging the Battery

Charging the Battery
Disconnect both battery cables to prevent damaging your vehicle's electrical system. Always disconnect the negative () cable first, and reconnect it last.

1Battery
When you find corrosion, clean the battery terminals by applying a baking powder and water solution. Clean the terminals with a damp towel. Cloth/towel dry the battery. Coat the terminals with grease to help prevent future corrosion.

When replacing the battery, the replacement must be of the same specifications. Consult a dealer for more information.

The battery installed in this vehicle is specifically designed for a model with Auto Idle Stop. Using a battery other than this specified type may shorten the battery life, and prevent Auto Idle Stop from activating. If you need to replace the battery, make sure to select the specified type and size. Ask a dealer for more details.

The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/ TPMS* indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Maintenance

628 * Not available on all models

Remote Transmitter Care

Replacing the Remote Battery
If the indicator does not come on when the button is pressed, replace the battery. Battery type: CR2032 1. Remove the built-in key.
2. Remove the upper half of the cover by carefully prying on the slot with key grip. u Wrap a key grip with a cloth to prevent scratching the remote key. u Remove carefully to avoid losing the buttons.

1Replacing the Remote Battery
3 WARNING
CHEMICAL BURN HAZARD The battery that powers the remote transmitter can cause severe internal burns and can even lead to death if swallowed. Keep new and used batteries away from children. If you suspect that a child has swallowed the battery, seek medical attention immediately.
NOTICE An improperly disposed of battery can damage the environment. Always confirm local regulations for battery disposal.

Battery

3. Remove the battery by prying on the edge with flat-tip screwdriver. Make sure to replace the battery with the correct polarity. u Wrap a flat-tip screwdriver with a cloth to prevent scratching the remote key.

Replacement batteries are commercially available or at a dealer.

Maintenance

629

Climate Control System Maintenance

Air Conditioning
To ensure proper and safe operation, the Society of Automotive Engineers (SAE J2845) recommends that the refrigerant system only be serviced by trained and certified technicians.
Never repair or replace the air conditioning evaporator (cooling coil) with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
New replacement mobile air conditioning evaporators must be certified (and labeled) as meeting SAE Standard J2842.

1Air Conditioning
NOTICE Vented refrigerant is harmful to the environment. To avoid refrigerant from venting, never replace the evaporator with one removed from a used or salvaged vehicle.
Refrigerant in your vehicle's air conditioning system is flammable and can be ignited during servicing if proper procedures are not followed.

The air conditioner label is found under the hood: 2 Safety Labels P. 85 2 Specifications P. 676, 678

Canadian models

: Caution : Flammable Refrigerant

Maintenance

Dust and Pollen Filter

: Requires Registered Technician to Service
: Air Conditioning System

The climate control system is equipped with a dust and pollen filter that collects pollen, dust, and other debris in the air. The Maintenance MinderTM messages will let you know when to replace the filter.
We recommend that you replace the dust and pollen filter sooner when using your vehicle in areas with high concentrations of dust.
630

1Dust and Pollen Filter
If the airflow from the climate control system deteriorates noticeably, and the windows fog up easily, the filter may need to be replaced. Please contact a dealer for replacement.

Cleaning

Interior Care

Use a damp cloth with a mixture of mild detergent and warm water to remove dirt. Use a clean cloth to remove detergent residue.
Cleaning Seat Belts
Use a soft brush with a mixture of mild soap and warm water to clean the seat belts. Let the belts air dry. Wipe the openings of the seat belt anchors using a clean cloth.
Opening

1Interior Care
Do not spill liquids inside the vehicle. Electrical devices and systems may malfunction if liquids are splashed on them.
Do not use silicone based sprays on electrical devices such as audio devices and switches. Doing so may cause the items to malfunction or cause a fire inside the vehicle. If a silicone based spray is inadvertently used on electrical devices, consult a dealer.

Depending on their composition, chemicals and liquid aromatics may cause discoloration, wrinkles, and cracking to resin-based parts and textiles. Do not use alkali solvents or organic solvents such as benzene or gasoline.

After using chemicals, make sure to gently wipe them away using a dry cloth. Do not place used cloths on top of resin based parts or textiles for long periods of time without washing.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

1Cleaning the Window
Wires are mounted to the inside of the rear window. Wipe along the same direction as the wires with a soft cloth so as not to damage them.
Be careful not to spill fluids, such as water or glass cleaner, on or around the cover of both the front wide view camera and the rainfall/light sensor*.

Maintenance

* Not available on all models

Continued

631

uuCleaninguInterior Care

Floor Mats

Unlock Lock

The driver's floor mat hooks over floor anchors, which keep the mat from sliding forward. To remove a mat for cleaning, turn the anchor knobs to the unlock position. When reinstalling the mat after cleaning, turn the knobs to the lock position.

1Floor Mats
If you use any floor mats that were not originally provided with your vehicle, make sure they are designed for your specific vehicle, fit correctly, and are securely anchored by the floor anchors. Position the rear seat floor mats properly. If not properly positioned, the floor mats can interfere with the front seat functions.

Do not put additional floor mats on top of the anchored mat.

Maintaining Genuine Leather
To properly clean leather: 1. Use a vacuum or soft dry cloth first to remove any dirt or dust. 2. Clean the leather with a soft cloth dampened with a solution comprised of 90%
water and 10% neutral soap. 3. Wipe away any soap residue with a clean damp cloth. 4. Wipe away residual water and allow leather to air dry in the shade.

1Maintaining Genuine Leather
It is important to clean or wipe away dirt or dust as soon as possible. Spills can soak into leather resulting in stains. Dirt or dust can cause abrasions in the leather. In addition, please note that some dark colored clothing can rub onto the leather seats resulting in discoloration or stains.

Maintenance

632

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Exterior Care
Dust off the vehicle body after you drive. Regularly inspect your vehicle for scratches on painted surfaces. A scratch on a painted surface can result in body rust. If you find a scratch, promptly repair it.

1Washing the Vehicle
Do not spray water into the air intake vents. It can cause a malfunction.

Washing the Vehicle
Wash the vehicle regularly. Wash more frequently when driving in the following conditions: · If driving on roads with road salt. · If driving in coastal areas. · If tar, soot, bird droppings, insects, or tree sap are stuck to painted surfaces.
Using an Automated Car Wash
· Make sure to follow the instructions indicated on the automated car wash. · Fold in the door mirrors. · For models equipped with automatic intermittent wipers, turn the wipers off.
Using High Pressure Cleaners
· Keep sufficient distance between the cleaning nozzle and the vehicle body. · Take particular care around the windows. Standing too close may cause water to
enter the vehicle interior. · Do not spray high pressure water directly into the engine compartment. Instead,
use low pressure water and a mild detergent.

Air Intake Vents
Do not spray water onto the fuel fill door directly. A high-pressure spray may cause it to open.
Do not spray water onto the capless unit when the fuel fill door is open. It can cause damage to the fuel system or engine.
If you need to lift the wiper arms away from the windshield, first set the wiper arms to the maintenance position.
2 Changing the Wiper Blade P. 615

Maintenance

Continued

633

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Applying Wax
A good coat of automotive body wax helps protect your vehicle's paint from the elements. Wax will wear off over time and expose your vehicle's paint to the elements, so reapply as necessary.

1Applying Wax
NOTICE Chemical solvents and strong cleaners can damage the paint, metal, and plastic on your vehicle. Wipe away spills immediately.

Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
If you get gasoline, oil, engine coolant, or battery fluid on resin coated parts, they may be stained or the coating may peel. Promptly wipe it away using a soft cloth and clean water.

1Maintaining the Bumpers and Other Resin Coated Parts
Ask a dealer about the correct coating material when you want to repair the painted surface of the parts made of resin.

Cleaning the Window
Wipe using a glass cleaner.

Maintaining Aluminum Wheels*
Aluminum is susceptible to deterioration caused by salt and other road contaminants. When necessary, as early as possible use a sponge and mild detergent to wipe away these contaminants. Do not use a stiff brush or harsh chemicals (including some commercial wheel cleaners). These can damage the protective finish on aluminum alloy wheels, resulting in corrosion. Depending on the type of finish, the wheels also may lose their luster or appear burnished. To avoid water stains, wipe the wheels dry with a cloth while they are still wet.

Maintenance

634 * Not available on all models

Fogged Exterior Light Lenses
The inside lenses of exterior lights (headlights, brake lights, etc.) may fog temporarily if you have driven in the rain, or after the vehicle has been run through a car wash. Dew condensation also may build up inside the lenses when there is a significant enough difference between the ambient and inside lens temperatures (similar to vehicle windows fogging up in rainy conditions). These conditions are natural processes, not structural design problems in the exterior lights. Lens design characteristics may result in moisture developing on the light lens frame surfaces. This also is not a malfunction. However, if you see large amounts of water accumulation, or large water drops building up inside the lenses, have your vehicle inspected by a dealer.

uuCleaninguExterior Care

Maintenance

635

Accessories and Modifications

Accessories
When installing accessories, check the following: · Do not install accessories on the windshield. They can obstruct your view and
delay your reaction to driving conditions. · Do not install any accessories over areas marked SRS AIRBAG, on the sides or
backs of the front seats, on the sides of the rear seats, on front or side pillars, or near the side windows. Accessories installed in these areas may interfere with proper operation of the vehicle's airbags or may be propelled into you or another occupant if the airbags deploy. · Be sure electronic accessories do not overload electrical circuits or interfere with proper operation of your vehicle.
2 Fuses P. 664
· Before installing any electronic accessory, have the installer contact a dealer for assistance. If possible, have a dealer inspect the final installation.

1Accessories and Modifications
3 WARNING
Improper accessories or modifications can affect your vehicle's handling, stability, and performance, and cause a crash in which you can be seriously hurt or killed.
Follow all instructions in this owner's manual regarding accessories and modifications.
Honda Genuine accessories are recommended to ensure proper operation on your vehicle.

Maintenance

636

Modifications
Do not modify your vehicle in a manner that may affect its handling, stability, or reliability, or install non-genuine Honda parts or accessories that may have a similar effect.
Even minor modifications to vehicle systems can affect overall vehicle performance. Always make sure all equipment is properly installed and maintained, and do not make any modification to your vehicle or its systems that might cause your vehicle to no longer meet federal, state, province, territory, and local regulations.
The on-board diagnostic port (OBD-II/SAE J1962 connector) installed on this vehicle is intended to be used with automobile system diagnostic devices or with other devices that Honda has approved. Use of any other type of device may adversely affect the vehicle's electronic systems or allow them to be compromised, possibly resulting in a system malfunction, drained battery, or other unexpected problems.
Do not modify or attempt to repair any of the electrical components.

uuAccessories and ModificationsuModifications

Maintenance

637

638

Handling the Unexpected
This chapter explains how to handle unexpected troubles.

Tools Types of Tools .................................. 640
If a Tire Goes Flat Changing a Flat Tire ......................... 641
Engine Does Not Start Checking the Engine ........................ 648 If the Remote Key Battery is Weak.... 649 Emergency Engine Start ................... 650 Emergency Engine Stop ................... 651
If the Battery Is Dead Jump Starting Procedure .................. 652
Shift Lever Does Not Move .............. 655

Overheating How to Handle Overheating............. 656
Indicator, Coming On/Blinking
If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears ...658 If the Charging System Indicator Comes
On ............................................. 659 If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks ................................... 659 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks ................................... 660 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On .....661

If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On ....................... 662
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks ....................... 663
Fuses Fuse Locations ................................. 664 Inspecting and Changing Fuses........ 668
Emergency Towing........................... 670 If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door .... 671 If You Cannot Open the Trunk ............672 Refueling........................................... 673

639

Tools
Types of Tools

Wheel Nut Wrench/ Jack Handle

Tool Case

Jack Handle Bar

Jack Funnel

1Types of Tools The tools are stored in the trunk.

Handling the Unexpected

640

If a Tire Goes Flat

Changing a Flat Tire

If a tire goes flat while driving, grasp the steering wheel firmly, and brake gradually to reduce speed. Then, stop in a safe place. Replace the flat tire with a compact spare tire. Go to a dealer as soon as possible to have the full-size tire repaired or replaced.
1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level, non-slippery surface and apply the parking brake. 2. Put the transmission into (P. 3. Turn on the hazard warning lights and set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF.

1Changing a Flat Tire Follow compact spare precautions: Periodically check the tire pressure of the compact spare. It should be set to the specified pressure. Specified Pressure: 60 psi (420 kPa, 4.2 kgf/cm2)
When driving with the compact spare tire, keep the vehicle speed under 50 mph (80 km/h). Replace with a full-size tire as soon as possible.

The compact spare tire and wheel in your vehicle are specifically for this model. Do not use them with another vehicle. Do not use another type of compact spare tire or wheel with your vehicle.

Do not mount tire chains on a compact spare tire. If a chain-mounted front tire goes flat, remove one of the full-size rear tires and replace it with the compact spare tire. Remove the flat front tire and replace it with the full-size tire that was removed from the rear. Mount the tire chains on the front tire.

NOTICE Do not use the jack if it doesn't work properly. Call your dealer or a professional towing service.

Handling the Unexpected

Continued

641

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire
Getting Ready to Replace the Flat Tire
1. Pull the strap on the floor lid and open the lid.

Handling the Unexpected

Spare Tire

Strap

Tool Case

2. Take the tool case out of the trunk. 3. Take the jack, wheel nut wrench, and jack
handle bar out of the tool case. 4. Unscrew the wing bolt, and remove the
spacer cone. Then, remove the spare tire.

5. Place a wheel block or rock in front and rear of the wheel diagonal to the flat tire.

Wheel Blocks The tire to be replaced.
642

6. Place the compact spare tire (wheel side up) under the vehicle body, near the tire that needs to be replaced.

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Jack Handle Bar Wheel Nut

Wheel Cover

Models with wheel cover
7. Put the flat tip of the jack handle bar into the edge of the wheel cover. Carefully pry the edge and remove the cover. u Wrap a cloth around the flat tip of the jack handle bar to prevent scratches on the cover.
All models
8. Loosen each wheel nut about one turn using the wheel nut wrench.

Handling the Unexpected

Continued

643

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

How to Set Up the Jack

1. Place the jack under the jacking point closest to the tire to be changed.

1How to Set Up the Jack
3 WARNING
The vehicle can easily roll off the jack, seriously injuring anyone underneath.
Follow the directions for changing a tire exactly, and never get under the vehicle when it is supported only by the jack.

Jacking Points Jacking Point

2. Turn the end bracket clockwise as shown in the image until the top of the jack contacts the jacking point. u Make sure that the jacking point tab is resting in the jack notch.
3. Raise the vehicle, using the jack handle bar and the jack handle, until the tire is off the ground.

Do not use the jack with people or luggage in the vehicle.
Use the jack provided in your vehicle. Other jacks may not support the weight ("load") or may not fit the jacking point.
The following instructions must be followed to use the jack safely:
· Do not use while the engine is running. · Use only where the ground is firm and level. · Use only at the jacking points. · Do not get in the vehicle while using the jack. · Do not put anything on top of or underneath the
jack.

Jack Handle Bar

Wheel Nut Wrench as Jack Handle

644

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Replacing the Flat Tire
1. Remove the wheel nuts and flat tire.

1Replacing the Flat Tire Do not over tighten the wheel nuts by applying extra torque using your foot or a pipe.
Models with wheel cover
Make sure the wire support ring is hooked into the clips around the edge of the wheel cover.

Handling the Unexpected

2. Wipe the mounting surfaces of the wheel with a clean cloth.
3. Mount the compact spare tire. 4. Screw the wheel nuts until they touch the
lips around the mounting holes, then stop rotating.
5. Lower the vehicle and remove the jack. Tighten the wheel nuts in the order indicated in the image. Go around, tightening the nuts, two to three times in this order. Wheel nut torque: 80 lbfft (108 Nm, 11 kgfm)

Clips

Align the valve mark on the wheel cover to the tire valve on the wheel, then install the wheel cover.

Valve Mark

Continued

645

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Storing the Flat Tire
Models with aluminum wheels

Models with aluminum wheels
1. Remove the center cap.

Center Cap

1Replacing the Flat Tire
Models with wheel cover
Make sure the wire support ring is on the outer side of the tire valve as shown.
Tire Valve

All models
Spacer Cone Wing Bolt

For

For full-

compact size tire

spare tire

All models
2. Place the flat tire face down in the spare tire well.
3. Remove the spacer cone from the wing bolt, flip it over, and insert it back on the bolt. Secure the flat tire with the wing bolt.
4. Securely store the jack, wheel nut wrench, and jack handle bar back in the tool case. Store the case in the trunk.

Wire Support Ring
1Storing the Flat Tire
3 WARNING
Loose items can fly around the interior in a crash and can seriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and tools securely before driving.

Handling the Unexpected

646

U.S. models
TPMS and the Compact Spare Tire
If you replace a flat tire with the spare tire, the low tire pressure/TPMS indicator comes on while you are driving. After driving for a few miles (kilometers), Tire pressure monitor system problem. Check tire pressure. See your dealer. will appear on the driver information interface and the indicator will start blinking for a short time and then stay on; however, this is normal and is no cause for concern.
Calibrate the TPMS when you replace the tire with a specified regular tire.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 463

uuIf a Tire Goes FlatuChanging a Flat Tire

Handling the Unexpected

647

Engine Does Not Start
Checking the Engine
If the engine does not start, check the starter.

1Checking the Engine
If you must start the vehicle immediately, use an assisting vehicle or booster battery to jump start it.
2 If the Battery Is Dead P. 652

Handling the Unexpected

Starter condition Starter doesn't turn or turns over slowly. The battery may be dead. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.
The starter turns over normally but the engine doesn't start. There may be a problem with a fuse. Check each of the items on the right and respond accordingly.

Checklist
Check for a message on the driver information interface. If the To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears
2 If the Remote Key Battery is Weak P. 649
uMake sure the remote key is in its operating range.
2 ENGINE START/STOP Button Operating Range P. 180
Check the brightness of the interior lights. Turn on the interior lights and check the brightness. If the interior lights are dim or do not come on at all
2 Battery P. 627
If the interior lights come on normally
2 Fuses P. 664 2 Emergency Engine Start P. 650
Review the engine start procedure. Follow its instructions, and try to start the engine again.
2 Starting the Engine P. 436
Check the immobilizer system indicator. When the immobilizer system indicator is blinking, the engine cannot be started.
2 Immobilizer System P. 173
Check the fuel level. There should be enough fuel in the tank.
2 Fuel Gauge P. 110
Check the fuses. Check all fuses, or have the vehicle checked by a dealer.
2 Inspecting and Changing Fuses P. 668
If the problem continues:
2 Emergency Towing P. 670

648

Handling the Unexpected

uuEngine Does Not StartuIf the Remote Key Battery is Weak
If the Remote Key Battery is Weak
If the beeper sounds, the To start, touch start button with emblem side of remote message appears on the driver information interface, and the ENGINE START/STOP button flashes, and the engine won't start, start the engine as follows:
1. Touch the center of the ENGINE START/ STOP button with the H logo on the remote key while the ENGINE START/ STOP button is flashing. The buttons on the remote key should be facing you. u The ENGINE START/STOP button flashes for about 30 seconds.
2. Depress the brake pedal and press the ENGINE START/STOP button within 10 seconds after the beeper sounds and the ENGINE START/STOP button changes from flashing to on. u If you don't depress the pedal, the mode will change to ACCESSORY.
649

Handling the Unexpected

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Start
Emergency Engine Start
If the engine does not start using the normal engine starting procedure, you may be able to start it using the emergency start procedure below. Do not use this procedure if it is not an emergency. 1. Make sure the parking brake is applied.
u The parking brake and brake system indicator (red) comes on for 30 seconds when you pull up the electric parking brake switch.
2. Check that the transmission is in (P, then set the power mode to ACCESSORY. 3. Firmly depress the brake pedal, then press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP
button for at least 15 seconds. This should be considered a system malfunction even if you are able to start the engine using the above procedure. Have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
650

uuEngine Does Not StartuEmergency Engine Stop

Emergency Engine Stop
The ENGINE START/STOP button may be used to stop the engine due to an emergency situation even while driving. If you must stop the engine, do either of the following operations: · Press and hold the ENGINE START/STOP button for about two seconds. · Firmly press the ENGINE START/STOP button three times.
The steering wheel will not lock. However, because turning off the engine disables the power assist the engine provides to the steering and braking systems, it will require significantly more physical effort and time to steer and slow the vehicle. Use both feet on the brake pedal to slow down the vehicle and stop immediately in a safe place.

1Emergency Engine Stop
Do not press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving unless it is absolutely necessary for the engine to be turned off. If you press the ENGINE START/STOP button while driving, the beeper sounds.

The power mode is in ACCESSORY when the engine is stopped. To change the mode to VEHICLE OFF, put the transmission into (P after the vehicle comes to a complete stop.

Handling the Unexpected

651

If the Battery Is Dead

Jump Starting Procedure

Turn off the power to electric devices, such as audio and lights. Turn off the engine,

then open the hood.

1.5 L engine models

1. Open the cover on the positive + terminal. 2. Connect the first jumper cable to your

vehicle's battery + terminal.

3. Connect the other end of the first jumper

cable to the booster battery + terminal.

u Use a 12-volt booster battery only.

u When using an automotive battery

charger to boost your 12-volt battery,

Booster Battery
2.0 L engine models

select a lower charging voltage than 15volt. Check the charger manual for the proper setting.

4. Connect the second jumper cable to the

booster battery - terminal.

1If the Battery Is Dead
3 WARNING
A battery can explode if you do not follow the correct procedure, seriously injuring anyone nearby.
Keep all sparks, open flames, and smoking materials away from the battery.
Securely attach the jumper cables clips so that they do not come off when the engine vibrates. Be careful not to tangle the jumper cables or allow the cable ends to touch each other while attaching or detaching the jumper cables.

Booster Battery

Handling the Unexpected

652

1.5 L engine models 2.0 L engine models

uuIf the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

5. Connect the other end of the second jumper cable to the stud bolt as shown. Do not connect this jumper cable to any other part.
6. If your vehicle is connected to another vehicle, start the assisting vehicle's engine and increase its rpm slightly.
7. Attempt to start your vehicle's engine. If it turns over slowly, check that the jumper cables have good metal-to-metal contact.

1If the Battery Is Dead
Battery performance degrades in cold conditions and may prevent the engine from starting.

Handling the Unexpected

Continued

653

uuIf the Battery Is DeaduJump Starting Procedure

What to Do After the Engine Starts
Once your vehicle's engine has started, remove the jumper cables in the following order.
1. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's ground. 2. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery -
terminal. 3. Disconnect the jumper cable from your vehicle's battery + terminal. 4. Disconnect the other end of the jumper cable from the booster battery +
terminal.

1What to Do After the Engine Starts
The Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) system, Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow, safety support and low tire pressure/ TPMS* indicators may come on in amber along with a message in the gauge when you set the power mode to ON after reconnecting the battery. Drive a short distance at more than 12 mph (20 km/h). Each indicator should go off. If any do not, have your vehicle checked by a dealer.

Have your vehicle inspected by a nearby service station or a dealer.

Handling the Unexpected

654 * Not available on all models

Shift Lever Does Not Move

Follow the procedure below if you cannot move the shift lever out of the (P position.

Releasing the Lock
Cover
Slot

1. Set the parking brake. 2. Remove the built-in key from the remote
key. 3. Wrap a cloth around the tip of the built-in
key. Put it into the shift lock release slot as shown in the image, and remove the cover.

Release Button

4. Insert the key into the shift lock release slot. 5. While pushing the key in, press the shift
lever release button, and place the shift lever into (N. u The lock is now released. Have the shift
lever checked by a dealer as soon as possible.

Shift Lock Release Slot

Handling the Unexpected

655

Overheating
How to Handle Overheating
Overheating symptoms are as follows:
Models with B-type meter
· The temperature gauge pointer is at the H mark or the engine suddenly loses power.
All models
· The Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message appears on the driver information interface.
· Steam or spray comes out of the engine compartment.
First thing to do 1. Immediately park the vehicle in a safe place. 2. Turn off all accessories and turn on the hazard warning lights.
u No steam or spray present: Keep the engine running and open the hood. u Steam or spray is present: Turn off the engine and wait until it subsides.
Then, open the hood.

1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Steam and spray from an overheated engine can seriously scald you.
Do not open the hood if steam is coming out.
NOTICE Models with B-type meter Continuing to drive with the temperature gauge pointer at the H mark may damage the engine.
All models
Continuing to drive with the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message on the driver information interface may damage the engine.

Handling the Unexpected

656

uuOverheatinguHow to Handle Overheating

Handling the Unexpected

Next thing to do
Reserve Tank

MAX MIN

1. Check that the cooling fan is operating and stop the engine once the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message on the driver information interface disappears. u If the cooling fan is not operating, immediately stop the engine.
2. Once the engine has cooled down, inspect the coolant level and check the cooling system components for leaks. u If the coolant level in the reserve tank is low, add coolant until it reaches the MAX mark. u If there is no coolant in the reserve tank, check that the radiator is cool. Cover the radiator cap with a heavy cloth and open the cap. If necessary, add coolant up to the base of the filler neck, and put the cap back on.

1How to Handle Overheating
3 WARNING
Removing the radiator cap while the engine is hot can cause the coolant to spray out, seriously scalding you.
Always let the engine and radiator cool down before removing the radiator cap.
If the coolant is leaking, contact a dealer for repairs.
Use water as an emergency/temporary measure only. Have a dealer flush the system with proper antifreeze as soon as possible.

Last thing to do Once the engine has cooled sufficiently, restart it and check the driver information interface. If the Engine temperature too hot. Do not drive. Allow engine to cool. message does not appear, resume driving. If it appears again, contact a dealer for repairs.

657

Indicator, Coming On/Blinking

If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
Reasons for the warning to appear Appears when the engine oil pressure is low. What to do as soon as the warning
appears 1. Immediately park the vehicle on level
ground in a safe place. 2. If necessary, turn the hazard warning lights
on. What to do after parking the vehicle 1. Stop the engine and let it sit for
approximately three minutes. 2. Open the hood and check the oil level.
u Add oil as necessary.
2 Oil Check P. 599
3. Start the engine and check the low oil pressure warning. u The warning disappears: Start driving again. u The warning does not disappear within 10 seconds: Immediately stop the engine and contact a dealer for repairs.

1If the Low Oil Pressure Warning Appears
NOTICE Running the engine with low oil pressure can cause serious mechanical damage almost immediately.

Handling the Unexpected

658

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Charging System Indicator Comes On

If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the charging system. What to do when the indicator comes on Stop in a safe place and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1If the Charging System Indicator Comes On
If you need to stop temporarily, do not turn off the engine. Restarting the engine may rapidly discharge the battery.

If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator lamp to come on or blink · Comes on when there is a problem with the engine emissions control
system. · Blinks when engine misfiring is detected. What to do when the indicator lamp comes on Avoid high speeds and immediately get your vehicle inspected at a dealer. What to do when the indicator lamp blinks Park the vehicle in a safe place with no flammable items and wait at least 10 minutes or more with the engine stopped until it cools.

1If the Malfunction Indicator Lamp Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE If you drive with the malfunction indicator lamp on, the emissions control system and the engine could be damaged.
If the malfunction indicator lamp blinks again when restarting the engine, drive to the nearest dealer at 31 mph (50 km/h) or less. Have your vehicle inspected.

Handling the Unexpected

659

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks

U.S. Canada
(Red)

Reasons for the indicator to come on · The brake fluid is low. · There is a malfunction in the brake system. What to do when the indicator comes on while driving Depress the brake pedal lightly to check pedal pressure. · If normal, check the brake fluid level the next time you stop. · If abnormal, take immediate action. If necessary, downshift the
transmission to slow the vehicle using engine braking. Reasons for the indicator to blink There is a problem with the electric parking brake system. What to do when the indicator blinks Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

1If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks
Have your vehicle repaired immediately. It is dangerous to drive with low brake fluid. If there is no resistance from the brake pedal, stop immediately in a safe place. If necessary downshift the gears.
If the brake system indicator (red) and ABS indicator come on simultaneously, the electronic brake distribution system is not working. This can result in vehicle instability under sudden braking. Have your vehicle inspected by a dealer immediately.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work. Avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.
2 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On P. 661

Handling the Unexpected

660

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On

U.S. Canada

If the brake system indicator (red) comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, release the parking brake manually or automatically.
2 Parking Brake P. 554

(Red) U.S.

·If the brake system indicator (red) continuously comes on or blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, stop the vehicle in a safe place and have it inspected by a dealer immediately. u Preventing the vehicle from moving, put the transmission into (P.

Canada

·If only the brake system indicator (red) is turned off, avoid using the parking brake and have your vehicle checked by a dealer immediately.

(Amber)

1 If the Brake System Indicator (Red) Comes On or Blinks at the Same Time When the Brake System Indicator (Amber) Comes On If you apply the parking brake, you may not be able to release it.
If the brake system indicator (red) and the brake system indicator (amber) come on at the same time, the parking brake is working.
If the brake system indicator (red) blinks at the same time when the brake system indicator (amber) comes on, the parking brake may not work because it is checking the system.
If you repeatedly operate the electric parking brake in a short period of time, the brake stops operating to prevent heating of the system and the indicator blinks. It returns to its original state in approximately 1 minute.

Handling the Unexpected

661

Handling the Unexpected

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
If the Electric Power Steering (EPS) System Indicator Comes On
Reasons for the indicator to come on Comes on when there is a problem with the EPS system. What to do when the indicator comes on · Stop the vehicle in a safe place and restart the engine.
If the indicator comes on and stays on, immediately have your vehicle inspected by a dealer. · If Do not drive displays on the driver information interface, immediately stop in a safe place and contact a dealer.
662

uuIndicator, Coming On/BlinkinguIf the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks

U.S. models
If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
Reasons for the indicator to come on or blink A tire pressure is significantly low, or the TPMS has not been calibrated. If there is a problem with the TPMS, the indicator blinks for about one minute, and then stays on. If the compact spare tire is installed, the indicator will either come on or it will first blink for about one minute, then stay on. What to do when the indicator comes on Drive carefully and avoid abrupt cornering and hard braking. Stop your vehicle in a safe place. Check the tire pressure and adjust the pressure to the specified level. The specified tire pressure is on a label on the driver side doorjamb.
u Calibrate the TPMS after the tire pressure is adjusted.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 463
If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to come on, change the tire to a full-size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS. What to do when the indicator blinks, then remains on Have the tire inspected by a dealer as soon as possible. If the compact spare tire causes the indicator to first blink, and then stay on, change the tire to a full- size tire. The indicator goes off after calibrating the TPMS.
2 TPMS Calibration P. 463

1If the Low Tire Pressure/TPMS Indicator Comes On or Blinks
NOTICE Driving on an extremely underinflated tire can cause it to overheat. An overheated tire can fail. Always inflate your tires to the prescribed level.

Handling the Unexpected

663

Handling the Unexpected

Fuses
Fuse Locations
If any electrical devices are not working, set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF and check to see if any applicable fuse is blown.
Engine Compartment Fuse Box
Located near the battery. Push the tabs to open the box. Fuse locations are shown on the fuse box cover. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and box cover number.
Tab Fuse Box
664

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

Amps

ST MAGNETIC SW

BATTERY

125 A

WIPER

40 A

EPS

40 A

R/M1

F/BOX OPTION

60 A

ABS/VSA FSR

40 A

MAIN FAN

F/BOX OPTION2

40 A

F/BOX MAIN2

DC/DC2

(30 A)

SUB FAN

F/BOX MAIN

60 A

IG MAIN2

40 A

EVP*

40 A

AUDIO SUB*

RR DEFROSTER

40 A

HTR MTR

40 A

H/STRG*

40 A

30 A

FR FOG*

ABS/VSA MTR

40 A

MG CLUTCH

DC/DC

(30 A)

WASHER

30 A

HORN

IG MAIN

30 A

BACK UP

30 A

AUDIO*

R/M2

30 A

DBW

EOP*

BACKUP FI-ECU

IGP

* Not available on all models

Amps

30 A

70 A

30 A

40 A

30 A

40 A

30 A

(30 A) 36

(7.5 A) 37

(10 A) 40

(10 A) 42

10 A

15 A

10 A

15 A

(15 A)

15 A

(20 A)

10 A

15 A

Circuit Protected TCU LCM L INJ* STOP LCM R
IG COIL -
HAZARD AUDIO SUB VST*
AUDIO VST MAIN
BACKUP2 -
VBACT* IGPS [LAF] IG1 MON2

Amps (15 A) (15 A) (15 A) 10 A (15 A) 15 A
15 A (7.5 A)
(30 A) (30 A)
(10 A) 10 A 7.5 A
Continued 665

Handling the Unexpected

uuFusesuFuse Locations
Interior Fuse Box
Located under the dashboard. Fuse locations are shown on the label under the steering column. Locate the fuse in question by the fuse number and label number.
Fuse Box Sub Fuse Box
Fuse Label
666

uuFusesuFuse Locations

Circuit protected and fuse rating

Circuit Protected

P/W DR

P/W AS

P/W RR R

P/W RR L

OPTION

SRS

7 T/G MTR / TRUNK ACT

FR ACC SOCKET

DOOR LOCK

METER

OPTION3 (ST CUT)

OPTION2 (RR WIP)*

OPTION6 (VB SOL)

15 DR DOOR UNLOCK

SUNROOF*

SBW1*

RR FOG*

21 CARGO ACC SOCKET*

SMART

DR DOOR LOCK

SBW2*

IMG

Amps 20 A 20 A 20 A 20 A 10 A 10 A 10 A
20 A 20 A 10 A 10 A (10 A) 10 A (10 A) (20 A) (10 A)
(10 A) (20 A) 10 A (10 A) (7.5 A) 10 A

* Not available on all models

Circuit Protected

SRS

27 ACG / D/V / ST CUT RLY

OPTION5

FUEL PUMP

30 L SIDE DOOR UNLOCK

31 R SIDE DOOR UNLOCK

36 OPTION3 (SUNSHADE)*

IGA2*

39 R SIDE DOOR LOCK

40 P/SEAT REC / RR HI*

41 P/SEAT SLIDE / FR HI*

A/C

DRL

ACC

ACC KEY LOCK

47 L SIDE DOOR LOCK

H/SEAT

AS P/SEAT REC*

P/LUMBER DR*

P/LUMBER AS*

RR H/SEAT*

Amps 10 A 20 A 10 A 15 A 10 A 10 A
(20 A) (15 A) 10 A (20 A) (20 A) 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 10 A 20 A (20 A) (10 A) (10 A) (20 A)

Circuit Protected

AS P/SEAT SLI*

54 OPTION1 / FUEL LID

AUDIO AMP*

ADS*

Sub Fuse Box

Circuit Protected

BACKUP2 MAIN

AUDIO SUB VST*

ACC VST

VST 1

AUDIO VST

EOP*

VST 2

Amps (20 A) 10 A (30 A) (30 A)
Amps (10 A) (7.5 A) (10 A) (10 A) (15 A) (20 A)
(10 A)
667

Handling the Unexpected

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

Inspecting and Changing Fuses

1. Set the power mode to VEHICLE OFF. Turn

headlights and all accessories off.

Hole

2. Remove the fuse box cover.

3. Check the main fuse in the engine

compartment fuse box.

u Look the fuse through the hole.

u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a

dealer.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
NOTICE Replacing a fuse with one that has a higher rating greatly increases the chances of damaging the electrical system.
Use the charts to locate the fuse in question and confirm the specified amperage on the fuse label.
2 Fuse Locations P. 664

Replace fuse with a spare fuse of the same specified amperage.

Main Fuse

Handling the Unexpected

668

uuFusesuInspecting and Changing Fuses

4. Check the combined fuses in the engine compartment fuse box. u Look into the space between the fuses. u If the fuse is blown, have it replaced by a dealer.

1Inspecting and Changing Fuses
There is a fuse puller on the back of the engine compartment fuse box cover.

Blown Fuse

Combined Fuse Fuse Puller

5. Inspect the small fuses in the engine compartment and the vehicle interior. u If there is a blown fuse, remove it with the fuse puller and replace it with a new one.

Handling the Unexpected

669

Emergency Towing

Call a professional towing service if you need to tow your vehicle.
Flat bed equipment The operator loads your vehicle on the back of a truck. This is the best way to transport your vehicle.

1Emergency Towing
NOTICE Trying to lift or tow your vehicle by the bumpers will cause serious damage. The bumpers are not designed to support the vehicle's weight.

Wheel lift equipment The tow truck uses two pivoting arms that go under the front tires and lift them off the ground. The rear tires remain on the ground. This is an acceptable way to tow your vehicle.

Make sure the parking brake is released. If you cannot release the parking brake, your vehicle must be transported by the flat bed equipment.
2 Parking Brake P. 554
NOTICE Improper towing such as towing behind a motorhome or other motor vehicle can damage the transmission.

Never tow your vehicle with just a rope or chain. It is very dangerous since ropes or chains may shift from side to side or break.

Handling the Unexpected

670

If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door

What to Do if Unable to Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
If you cannot unlock the fuel fill door, use the following procedure. 1. Open the trunk. 2. Pull the release cord toward you. u The release cord unlocks the fuel fill door when it is pulled. 3. Open the fuel fill door.
2 How to Refuel P. 576

1If You Cannot Unlock the Fuel Fill Door
After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

Release Cord

Handling the Unexpected

671

If You Cannot Open the Trunk

What to Do if Unable to Open the Trunk

If you cannot open the trunk, use the following procedure.

Cover

1. Remove the cover with a key. u Wrap a key with a cloth to prevent

scratching the cover.

1If You Cannot Open the Trunk
Following up: After taking these steps, contact a dealer to have the vehicle checked.

Release Cord

2. Pull the release cord. 3. Replace the cover.

Handling the Unexpected

672

Refueling

Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container

If you have run out of fuel and need to refuel your vehicle from a portable fuel

container, use the funnel provided with your vehicle.

1. Turn off the engine.

2. Press on the edge of the fuel fill door until

you hear a click when the driver's door is

unlocked. u The fuel fill door opens.

3. Take the funnel out of the tool case in the

Funnel

trunk.
2 Types of Tools P. 640
4. Place the end of the funnel on the lower

part of filler opening, then insert it slowly

and fully. u Make sure that the end of the funnel

goes down along with the filler pipe.

5. Fill the tank with fuel from the portable fuel

container. u Pour fuel carefully so you do not spill any.

6. Remove the funnel from the filler neck. u Wipe up any fuel from the funnel before

storing it.

7. Shut the fuel fill door by hand.

1Refueling From a Portable Fuel Container
3 WARNING
Gasoline is highly flammable and explosive. You can be burned or seriously injured when handling fuel.
· Stop the engine, and keep heat, sparks, and flame away.
· Handle fuel only outdoors. · Wipe up spills immediately.
NOTICE Do not insert the nozzle of a portable fuel container or any funnel other than the one provided with your vehicle. Doing so can damage the fuel system. Do not try to pry open or push open the sealed fuel tank with foreign objects. This can damage the fuel system and its seal.
Make sure the fuel in the portable fuel container is gasoline before you refuel.

Handling the Unexpected

673

674

Information
This chapter includes your vehicle's specifications, locations of identification numbers, and other information required by regulation.

Specifications .................................... 676 Identification Numbers
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number ......................................... 680
Devices that Emit Radio Waves ....... 681 Reporting Safety Defects ................. 682

Emissions Testing Testing of Readiness Codes.............. 683
Warranty Coverages ........................ 685 Authorized Manuals......................... 688 Customer Service Information......... 689

675

Specifications

1.5 L engine models

Vehicle Specifications

Model

Civic

No. of Passengers:

Front

Rear

Total

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Engine Specifications

Displacement

91.38 cu-in (1,498 cm3)

Spark Plugs

NGK

DILKAR8P8SY

Fuel
Type Fuel Tank Capacity

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L) Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

Air Conditioning

Refrigerant Type

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity

15.3 17.1 oz (435 485 g)

Lubricant Type

RL85HM (POE)

Quantity

6.7 7.5 cu-in (110 123 cm3)

Light Bulbs

Headlights (Low Beam)

LED

Headlights (High Beam)

LED

Fog Lights*

LED

Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED

Front Side Marker Lights

LED

Front Turn Signal Lights

LED

Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)*

LED

Brake Lights

LED

Rear Turn Signal Lights

21 W (Amber)

Rear Side Marker Lights

LED

Back-Up Lights

16 W

Taillights

LED

High-Mount Brake Light

21 W*1 LED*2

Rear License Plate Light

LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights

LED

Ceiling Light

LED

Front Ambient Lights LED

Vanity Mirror Lights 2.3 W

Center Console Light LED

Glove Box Light

LED

Trunk Light

5 W

*1: Models without fog lights *2: Models with fog lights

Information

676 * Not available on all models

uu Specifications u

Brake Fluid

Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

Specified

Honda HCF-2

Capacity

Change

3.9 US qt (3.7 L)

Engine Oil
Recommended
Capacity

·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 3.4 US qt (3.2 L) Change including 3.7 US qt (3.5 L) filter

Engine Coolant

Specified

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio

50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.51 US gal (5.72 L) (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.65 L) in the reserve tank)

Tire
Size

Regular

Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Compact Spare

Size
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Wheel Size Regular Compact Spare
*1: Models with 17 inch wheel *2: Models with 18 inch wheel

215/50R17 91H*1 235/40R18 91W*2 Front 33 (230 [2.3])*1 33 (225 [2.25])*2 Rear 33 (230 [2.3])*1 32 (220 [2.2])*2 T125/80D16 97M*1 T125/85D16 99M*2
60 (420 [4.2])
17 x 7J*1 18 x 8J*2 16 x 4T

Information

Continued 677

uu Specifications u

2.0 L engine models

Vehicle Specifications

Model

Civic

No. of Passengers:

Front

Rear

Total

Weights:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Front)

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Gross Axle Weight Rating (Rear)

See the certification label on the driver's doorjamb

Air Conditioning

Refrigerant Type

HFO-1234yf (R-1234yf)

Charge Quantity

15.3 17.1 oz (435 485 g)

Lubricant Type

ND-OIL 14 (POE)

Quantity

6.4 7.3 cu-in (105 120 cm3)

Engine Specifications

Displacement

121.76 cu-in (1,996 cm3)

Spark Plugs

NGK DENSO

DILKAR7H11GS DILKAR7G11GS DXE22HQR-D11S

Fuel
Type Fuel Tank Capacity

Unleaded gasoline, Pump octane number of 87 or higher 12.39 US gal (46.9 L)

Washer Fluid
Tank Capacity

U.S.: 1.6 US qt (1.5 L) Canada: 4.8 US qt (4.5 L)

Light Bulbs

Headlights (Low Beam)

LED

Headlights (High Beam)

LED

Parking/Daytime Running Lights LED

Front Side Marker Lights

LED

Front Turn Signal Lights

LED

Side Turn Signal Lights (on Door Mirrors)*

LED

Brake Lights

LED

Rear Turn Signal Lights

21 W (Amber)

Rear Side Marker Lights

LED

Back-Up Lights

16 W

Taillights

LED

High-Mount Brake Light

21 W

Rear License Plate Light

LED

Interior Lights

Map Lights

LED

Ceiling Light

LED

Front Ambient Lights LED

Vanity Mirror Lights* 2.3 W

Center Console Light* LED

Glove Box Light

LED

Trunk Light

5 W

Information

678 * Not available on all models

uu Specifications u

Brake Fluid

Specified

Honda Heavy Duty Brake Fluid DOT 3

Continuously Variable Transmission Fluid

Specified

Honda HCF-2

Capacity

Change

2.9 US qt (2.7 L)

Engine Oil
Recommended
Capacity

·Honda Genuine Motor Oil 0W-20 ·API Premium-grade 0W-20 detergent oil Change 4.2 US qt (4.0 L) Change including 4.4 US qt (4.2 L) filter

Engine Coolant

Specified

Honda Long-Life Antifreeze/Coolant Type2

Ratio

50/50 with distilled water

Capacity

1.56 US gal (5.90 L) (change including the remaining 0.17 US gal (0.65 L) in the reserve tank)

Tire
Regular

Size
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Compact Spare

Size
Pressure psi (kPa [kgf/cm2])

Wheel Size Regular Compact Spare
*1: Models with 16 inch wheel *2: Models with 18 inch wheel

215/55R16 93H*1

235/40R18 91W*2

Front

32 (220 [2.2])*1 33 (225 [2.25])*2

Rear 32 (220 [2.2])*1, *2

T125/80D16 97M*1

T125/85D16 99M*2

60 (420 [4.2])

16 x 7J*1 18 x 8J*2 16 x 4T

Information

679

Identification Numbers

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number
Your vehicle has a 17-digit vehicle identification number (VIN) used to register your vehicle for warranty purposes, and for licensing and insuring your vehicle. The locations of your vehicle's VIN, engine number, and transmission number are shown as follows.

1Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number
The interior vehicle identification number (VIN) is located under the cover.

1.5 L engine models

Vehicle Identification Number

Engine Number

Continuously Variable Transmission Number

2.0 L engine models
Engine Number
Continuously Variable Transmission Number

Certification Label/ Vehicle Identification Number

Information

680

Devices that Emit Radio Waves
Each radio frequency device installed in the vehicle conforms to the requirements and standards of the regulation listed below:
As required by the FCC: This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference, including interference that may cause undesired operation of the device.
681

Information

Reporting Safety Defects
In the U.S. If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or American Honda Motor Co., Inc.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-4249153); go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http:// www.safercar.gov.
In Canada If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death, you should immediately inform Honda Canada Inc. and you may also inform Transport Canada.
If Transport Canada receives similar complaints, it may open an investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may lead to a recall and remedy campaign. However, Transport Canada cannot become involved in individual problems between you, your dealer, or Honda Canada Inc.
To contact Transport Canada's Defect Investigations and Recalls Division, you may call 1-800-333-0510. For more information on reporting safety defects or about motor vehicle safety, go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/ roadsafety.
682

Information

Emissions Testing

Testing of Readiness Codes
Your vehicle has readiness code as part of the onboard self diagnostic system. Some states use these codes for testing to verify whether your vehicle's emissions components are working properly. The codes may not be read properly if testing is performed just after the battery has gone dead or been disconnected.
To check if they are set, set the power mode to ON, without starting the engine. The malfunction indicator lamp will come on for several seconds. If it then goes off, the readiness codes are set. If it blinks five times, the readiness codes are not set.
If you are required to have your vehicle tested before the readiness codes are ready, prepare the vehicle for retesting by doing the following:

1Testing of Readiness Codes The readiness codes are erased when the battery is disconnected, and set again only after several days of driving under a variety of conditions.
If a testing facility determines that the readiness codes are not set, you may be requested to return at a later date to complete the test.
If the testing facility determines the readiness codes are still not set, see a dealer.

1. Fill the gas tank to approximately 3/4 full. 2. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 6 hours or more. 3. Make sure the ambient temperature is between 40°F and 95°F (4°C and 35°C). 4. Start the engine without touching the accelerator pedal, and let it idle for 20
seconds. 5. Keep the vehicle in (P. Increase the engine speed to 2,000 rpm, and hold it there
for about 3 minutes. 6. Let the engine idle with your foot off the accelerator for 20 seconds. 7. Select a nearby, lightly traveled major highway where you can maintain a speed
of 50 to 60 mph (80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20 minutes. Drive on the highway in (D. Do not use cruise control. When traffic allows, drive for 90 seconds without moving the accelerator pedal. (Vehicle speed may vary slightly; this is okay.) If you cannot do this for a continuous 90 seconds because of traffic conditions, drive for at least 30 seconds, then repeat it two more times (for a total of 90 seconds).

Information

Continued

683

uuEmissions TestinguTesting of Readiness Codes
8. Drive in city or suburban traffic for at least 10 minutes. When traffic conditions allow, let the vehicle coast for several seconds without using the accelerator pedal or the brake pedal.
9. Park the vehicle and leave the engine off for 30 minutes.
684

Information

Warranty Coverages
U.S. Owners Your new vehicle is covered by these warranties:
New Vehicle Limited Warranty covers your new vehicle, except for the emissions control systems and accessories, against defects in materials and workmanship.
Emissions Control Systems Defects Warranty and Emissions Performance Warranty these two warranties cover your vehicle's emissions control systems. Time, mileage, and coverage are conditional. Please read your warranty booklet for exact information.
Seat Belt Limited Warranty a seat belt that fails to function properly is covered by a limited warranty. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Rust Perforation Limited Warranty all exterior body panels are covered against rusting from the inside out for the specified time period, regardless of mileage.
Accessory Limited Warranty Honda accessories are covered under this warranty. Time and mileage limits depend on the type of accessory and other factors. Please read your warranty booklet for details.
Replacement Parts Limited Warranty covers all Honda replacement parts against defects in materials and workmanship.

Information

Continued

685

uuWarranty Coveragesu
Replacement Battery Limited Warranty provides prorated coverage for a replacement battery purchased from your dealer.
Replacement Muffler Lifetime Limited Warranty provides coverage for as long as the purchaser of the muffler owns the vehicle.
Restrictions and exclusions apply to all these warranties. Please read the Honda warranty information booklet that came with your vehicle for precise information on warranty coverages. Your vehicle's original tires are covered by their manufacturer. Tire warranty information is in a separate booklet.
Statement on Warranty Coverage for Aftermarket and Recycled Parts The Magnuson-Moss Warranty Act, 15 U.S.C. s.2301 et seq., makes it illegal for motor vehicle manufacturers to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage solely because an aftermarket or recycled part has been used to repair the vehicle or someone other than the authorized service provider performed service on the vehicle. This provision does not apply to a new motor vehicle purchased solely for commercial or industrial use.
Under federal law, a manufacturer may deny warranty coverage and charge for repairs to a vehicle if it is discovered that an aftermarket or recycled part installed on the vehicle is defective or was installed incorrectly and caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty. The Federal Trade Commission requires that a manufacturer demonstrate that an aftermarket or recycled part or service performed by a person other than an authorized service provider caused damage to another part of the vehicle otherwise covered under warranty before denying warranty coverage. Additionally, federal law allows a manufacturer to void a motor vehicle warranty or deny warranty coverage if the manufacturer provides the article or service to consumers free of charge under the warranty or the manufacturer has secured a waiver from the Federal Trade Commission.
686

Information

Canadian Owners Please refer to the warranty manual that came with your vehicle.
EPA Contact Information An owner may obtain further information concerning emission warranties or report violations of the terms of the emission warranties by contacting:
Director, Light-Duty Vehicle Center, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency, Attention: Warranty Claim 2000 Traverwood Drive, Ann Arbor, MI 48105; complianceinfo@epa.gov

uuWarranty Coveragesu

Information

687

Authorized Manuals
Service Express For electronic copies of service publications, you can purchase a subscription to Service Express. Visit www.techinfo.honda.com for pricing and options. For U.S. Owners Manuals can be purchased from Helm Incorporated. You can order a manual by phone at 1 (800) 782-4356 (credit card orders only), or online at www.helminc.com. For Canadian Owners Please contact a dealer to order any manuals that you may require.
688

Information

Customer Service Information

Honda dealership personnel are trained professionals who should be able to deal with any problems you may encounter with your vehicle. If, however, you are faced with a problem that they cannot resolve to your satisfaction, contact Honda Customer Services.

U.S. Owners American Honda Motor Co., Inc. Honda Automobile Customer Service Mail Stop CHI-5 1919 Torrance Blvd. Torrance, CA 90501-2746 Tel: 1 (800) 999-1009

Canadian Owners Honda Canada Inc. Customer Relations 180 Honda Boulevard Markham, ON L6C 0H9 Tel: 1-888-9-HONDA-9 Fax: 1-877-939-0909 E-mail: Honda_cr@ch.honda.com

1Customer Service Information
When you call or write, please give us the following information:
· Vehicle Identification Number
2 Vehicle Identification Number (VIN), Engine Number, and Transmission Number P. 680
· Date of purchase · Odometer reading of your vehicle · Your name, address, and telephone number · A detailed description of the problem · Name of the dealer who sold the vehicle to you

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. Virgin Islands Bella International P.O. Box 190816 San Juan, PR 00919-0816 Tel: 1 (787) 620-7546

Information

689

Index
Index
Numbers
7-Speed Manual Shift Mode .................... 447 Operation ................................................ 448
A
ABS (Anti-lock Brake System)................... 560 Accessories and Modifications ................. 636 Accessory Power Socket ........................... 214 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low
Speed Follow........................................... 494 Adding the Coolant.................................. 605 Additives
Coolant ................................................... 605 Engine Oil................................................ 598 Washer.................................................... 609 Additives, Engine Oil ................................ 598 Adjusting Armrest ................................................... 206 Clock....................................................... 154 Front Head Restraints............................... 204 Front Seats .............................................. 198 Mirrors .................................................... 196 Rear Seats................................................ 201 Sound.............................................. 238, 280 Steering Wheel ........................................ 195 Agile Handling Assist................................ 461

Air Conditioning System (Climate Control System) ....................... 222 Changing the Mode ........................ 222, 223 Defrosting the Windshield and Windows............................................... 224 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 630 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 223 Sensor..................................................... 227 Synchronization Mode............................. 226 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 222
Air Pressure............................... 618, 677, 679 Airbags........................................................ 51
Advanced Airbags ..................................... 57 After a Collision ........................................ 54 Airbag Care............................................... 70 Driver's Knee Airbag.................................. 59 Event Data Recorder.................................... 0 Front Airbags (SRS).................................... 54 Indicator.............................................. 67, 95 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator .................. 68 Sensors ..................................................... 51 Side Airbags .............................................. 62 Side Curtain Airbags.................................. 65 AM/FM Radio.................................... 240, 286 Android Auto ................................... 258, 326 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 560 Indicator.................................................... 95 Apple CarPlay ................................... 254, 319 Armrest ..................................................... 206 Audio Remote Controls ........................... 234

Audio System ........................... 230, 237, 262 Adjusting the Sound ....................... 238, 280 Android Auto.................................. 258, 326 Audio/Information Screen ....................... 264 Display Setup .................................. 239, 281 Error Messages ....................................... 332 General Information................................ 334 Home Screen .......................................... 269 How to Update ....................................... 275 How to Update Wirelessly ....................... 278 How to Update with a USB Device .......... 279 iPod ................................................ 242, 301 Limitations for Manual Operation ............................. 282, 391, 411 MP3/WMA/AAC ............................. 245, 304 Reactivating ............................................ 233 Recommended Devices ........................... 335 Remote Controls..................................... 234 Security Code ......................................... 233 Selecting an Audio Source ...................... 282 Start Up .................................................. 263 Status Area ............................................. 274 System Updates ...................................... 275 System Updates Settings ......................... 276 Theft Protection ...................................... 233 USB Flash Drives...................................... 335 USB Port(s).............................................. 231 Wallpaper Setup ..................................... 267
Audio/Information Screen ....................... 264 Authorized Manuals ................................ 688 Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................ 169

Index

690

Auto High-Beam ...................................... 187 Indicator ................................................... 98
Auto Idle Stop .......................................... 453 OFF Button ............................................. 454
Automatic Brake Hold ............................. 558 Indicator ........................................... 92, 558
Automatic Brake Hold System Indicator ........................................... 92, 558
Automatic Lighting.................................. 184 Average Fuel Economy .................... 116, 141 Average Speed ................................. 118, 143
B
Battery ...................................................... 627 Charging System Indicator ................ 93, 659 If the Battery Is Dead............................... 652 Maintenance (Checking the Battery) ....... 627 Maintenance (Replacing)......................... 629
Belts (Seat).................................................. 42 Beverage Holders..................................... 211 Blind Spot Information System ............... 469 Bluetooth® Audio............................. 248, 307 Bluetooth® HandsFreeLink® ........... 389, 409 Booster Seats (For Children)...................... 83 Brake System ............................................ 554
Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 560 Automatic Brake Hold............................. 558 Brake Assist System................................. 561 Fluid ....................................................... 608 Foot Brake .............................................. 557

Indicator (Amber) .............................. 92, 661 Indicator (Red) ..................... 90, 91, 660, 661 Parking Brake .......................................... 554 Brightness Control (Instrument Panel) .......................... 193, 194 Built-in Key ............................................... 157 Bulb Replacement .................................... 610 Brake Light, Taillight, Rear Side Marker Light,
and Rear Turn Signal Light Bulbs ............ 611 Fog Lights................................................ 610 Front Side Marker Lights .......................... 610 Front Turn Signal Lights ........................... 610 Headlights ............................................... 610 High-Mount Brake Light .......................... 614 Parking/Daytime Running Lights .............. 610 Rear License Plate Light ........................... 613 Side Turn Signal/Emergency Indicator
Lights .................................................... 610 Taillight and Back-Up Light Bulbs ............. 613 Bulb Specifications ........................... 676, 678
C
Carbon Monoxide Gas................................ 84 Carrying Cargo.................................. 431, 433 Certification Label .................................... 680 Changing Bulbs......................................... 610 Charging System Indicator ................. 93, 659 Child Safety ................................................. 71
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 168 Emergency Trunk Opener ........................ 172

Child Seat.................................................... 71 Booster Seats ............................................ 83 Child Seat for Infants................................. 73 Child Seat for Small Children..................... 74 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 78 Larger Children ......................................... 82 Rear-facing Child Seat ............................... 73 Selecting a Child Seat................................ 75 Using a Tether........................................... 80
Childproof Door Locks ............................. 168 Cleaning the Exterior ............................... 633 Cleaning the Interior................................ 631 Climate Control System............................ 222
Changing the Mode ........................ 222, 223 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows............................................... 224 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 630 Recirculation/Fresh Air Mode ................... 223 Sensors ................................................... 227 Synchronization Mode............................. 226 Using Automatic Climate Control ............ 222 CMBSTM (Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM)................................................. 476 Coat Hooks ............................................... 213 Collision Mitigation Braking SystemTM (CMBSTM) ................................................. 476 Compact Spare Tire .................. 641, 677, 679 Console Compartment ............................. 210

Index

691

Index

Continuously Variable Transmission Creeping ................................................. 442 Fluid ........................................................ 607 Kickdown ................................................ 442 Operating the Shift Lever ........... 26, 444, 446 Shift Lever Does Not Move....................... 655 Shifting............................................ 443, 445
Controls ..................................................... 153 Coolant (Engine)....................................... 605
Adding the Coolant ................................. 605 Overheating............................................. 656 Creeping (Continuously Variable Transmission)........................................... 442 Cross Traffic Monitor................................ 569 Cup Holders............................................... 211 Customer Service Information ................. 689 Customize Display..................... 124, 136, 151 Customized Features ................ 126, 355, 363
D
Daytime Running Lights........................... 186 Dead Battery ............................................. 652 Defaulting All the Settings .............. 362, 385 Defrosting the Windshield and
Windows.................................................. 224 Devices that Emit Radio Waves................ 681 Dimming
Headlights ............................................... 183 Rearview Mirror ....................................... 196 Dipstick (Engine Oil) ................................. 599
692

Directional Signals (Turn Signal) ............. 182 Display Setup .................................... 239, 281 Door Mirrors ............................................. 197 Doors......................................................... 156
Auto Door Locking .................................. 169 Auto Door Unlocking .............................. 169 Door Open Message.................................. 41 Keys ........................................................ 156 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Inside ...................................... 166 Locking/Unlocking the Doors from the Outside ................................... 159 DOT Tire Quality Grading ........................ 620 Drive Mode Switch ................................... 450 Driver Attention Monitor ................ 119, 144 Driver Information Interface ... 113, 135, 138 Switching the Display ...................... 113, 139 Driver's Knee Airbag .................................. 59 Driving ...................................................... 429 Braking ................................................... 554 Continuously Variable Transmission......... 442 Shifting Position .............................. 443, 445 Starting the Engine.................................. 436 Dust and Pollen Filter............................... 630

E
Eco Assist® System ...................................... 14 ECON Button ............................................ 449 Elapsed Time .................................... 118, 143 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System
Indicator ........................................... 96, 662 Electronic Stability Control (ESC) ............ 459 Emergency................................................ 670 Emergency Engine Stop........................... 651 Emergency Trunk Opener ............... 172, 672 Emissions Testing (Readiness Codes) ...... 683 Engine
Coolant .................................................. 605 If the Battery Is Dead............................... 652 Oil .......................................................... 598 Starting................................................... 436 Engine Coolant ........................................ 605 Adding the Coolant ................................ 605 Overheating............................................ 656 Temperature Gauge ................................ 110 Engine Oil................................................. 598 Adding ................................................... 601 Checking ................................................ 599 Displaying Oil Life ................................... 586 Low Oil Pressure Indicator ....................... 658 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 598 ENGINE START/STOP Button.................... 180 Exhaust Gas Hazard (Carbon Monoxide) .................................. 84 Exterior Care (Cleaning) .......................... 633 Exterior Mirrors........................................ 197

F
Features .................................................... 229 Filters
Dust and Pollen....................................... 630 Oil .......................................................... 602 Flat Tire..................................................... 641 Floor Mats ................................................ 632 Fluids Brake ...................................................... 608 Continuously Variable Transmission ........ 607 Engine Coolant ....................................... 605 Windshield Washer ................................. 609 FM/AM Radio ................................... 240, 286 Fog Light Indicator .................................... 98 Folding Down the Rear Seats.................. 201 Foot Brake ................................................ 557 Front Airbags (SRS) .................................... 54 Front Head Restraints .............................. 204 Front Seat Heaters ................................... 220 Front Seats Adjusting ................................................ 198 Front Wide View Camera ........................ 551 Fuel ..................................................... 28, 575 Average Fuel Economy.................... 116, 141 Economy................................................. 578 Gauge .................................................... 110 Instant Fuel Economy ...................... 116, 141 Low Fuel Indicator..................................... 95 Range ............................................. 116, 141 Recommendation.................................... 575 Refueling ........................................ 575, 673

Fuel Economy............................................ 578 Fuel Fill Door....................................... 28, 576 Fuses .......................................................... 664
Inspecting and Changing ......................... 668 Locations ......................................... 664, 666
G
Gasoline (Fuel) Average Fuel Economy .................... 116, 141 Economy ................................................. 578 Gauge ..................................................... 110 Information ............................................. 575 Instant Fuel Economy....................... 116, 141 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 95 Refueling ......................................... 575, 673
Gauges ...................................................... 109 Glass (care) ........................................ 631, 634 Glove Box .................................................. 209
H
Handling the Unexpected ........................ 639 HandsFreeLink® (HFL) ....................... 389, 409
Automatic Import of Cellular Phonebook and Call History .................................... 401, 419
Automatic Transferring .................... 399, 418 Favorite Contacts............................. 402, 420 HFL Buttons ..................................... 389, 409 HFL Menus ...................................... 392, 412 HFL Status Display ........................... 391, 411

In Case of Emergency.............................. 426 Limitations for Manual Operation .... 391, 411 Making a Call.................................. 404, 422 Options During a Call ...................... 408, 425 Phone Setup.................................... 394, 414 Receiving a Call ............................... 407, 424 Ring Tone........................................ 399, 418 Hazard Warning Button .............................. 8 HD RadioTM ............................................... 287 Headlights................................................. 183 Aiming .................................................... 610 Auto High-Beam ..................................... 187 Automatic Operation............................... 184 Dimming ................................................. 183 Operating................................................ 183 Heated Steering Wheel............................ 219 Heaters (Front Seat) ................................. 220 Heaters (Rear Seat)................................... 221 HFL (HandsFreeLink®)....................... 389, 409 High Beam Indicator .................................. 98 Hill Start Assist System ............................. 440 HomeLink® Universal Transceiver............ 386 Honda App License Agreement .............. 336 Honda Sensing® ................................ 29, 473 HondaLink® ............................................. 310

Index

693

Index

694

I
Identification Numbers Vehicle Identification ............................... 680
Illumination Control Dial.................................................. 193, 194
Immobilizer System .................................. 173 Indicator .................................................. 101
Indicators..................................................... 88 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow............................................ 104, 494 Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) with Low Speed Follow Interval ....................................... 105 Anti-lock Brake System (ABS) ..................... 95 Auto High-Beam........................................ 98 Auto Idle Stop (Green) ............................. 102 Auto Idle Stop OFF................................... 102 Auto Idle Stop Suspend ........................... 103 Auto Idle Stop System (Amber) ................ 102 Automatic Brake Hold........................ 92, 558 Automatic Brake Hold System............ 92, 558 Charging System ............................... 93, 659 Cruise Mode............................................ 105 ECON Mode ............................ 100, 449, 450 Electric Power Steering (EPS) System............................................. 96, 662 Fog Light ................................................... 98 High Beam................................................. 98 Immobilizer System.................................. 101 Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) .......... 105 Lights On................................................... 98 Low Fuel.................................................... 95

Low Temperature .................................... 100 Low Tire Pressure/TPMS..... 97, 462, 467, 663 M (7-speed manual shift mode) Indicator/ Shift ........................................................ 93 Malfunction Indicator Lamp............... 93, 659 NORMAL Mode............................... 100, 450 Parking Brake and Brake System (Amber)........................................... 92, 661 Parking Brake and Brake System (Red) ................................. 90, 91, 660, 661 Safety Support ................................ 106, 108 Seat Belt Reminder .............................. 44, 94 Security System Alarm ............................. 101 Shift Position ............................................. 93 SPORT Mode ................................... 100, 450 Supplemental Restraint System............ 67, 95 System Message........................................ 99 Transmission System.................................. 94 Turn Signal and Hazard Warning ............... 98 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) OFF ................................................. 96, 460 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®) System ............................................ 96, 459 Information .............................................. 675 Instant Fuel Economy....................... 116, 141 Instrument Panel ........................................ 87 Brightness Control........................... 193, 194 Interior Lights ........................................... 207 Interior Rearview Mirror.......................... 196 iPod ................................................... 242, 301

J
Jack (Wheel Nut Wrench) ........................ 644 Jump Starting........................................... 652
K
Key Number Tag ...................................... 157 Keyless Access System .............................. 159 Keys........................................................... 156
Number Tag............................................ 157 Rear Door Won't Open ........................... 168 Remote Transmitter ................................ 163 Types and Functions................................ 156 Kickdown (Continuously Variable Transmission).......................................... 442
L
Lane Keeping Assist System (LKAS) ........ 516 LATCH (Child Seats) ................................... 76 Lights ................................................ 183, 610
Auto High-Beam ..................................... 187 Automatic............................................... 184 Bulb Replacement ................................... 610 Daytime Running Lights .......................... 186 Fog Lights ............................................... 186 High Beam Indicator ................................. 98 Interior.................................................... 207 Light Switches......................................... 183 Lights On Indicator.................................... 98 Turn Signals ............................................ 182

Load Limits ............................................... 433 Locking/Unlocking ................................... 156
Auto Door Locking/Unlocking ................. 169 Childproof Door Locks ............................ 168 From Inside ............................................. 166 From Outside .......................................... 159 Keys........................................................ 156 Using a Key............................................. 164 Low Battery Charge ................................. 659 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 95 Low Oil Pressure Warning ....................... 658 Low Remote Key Signal Strength ........... 158 Low Speed Braking Control .................... 488 Lower Anchors ........................................... 76 Lubricant Specifications Chart ........ 676, 678 Luggage (Maximum Load Limit)............. 433
M
Maintenance ............................................ 581 Adding the Coolant ................................ 605 Battery.................................................... 627 Brake Fluid.............................................. 608 Cleaning ......................................... 631, 633 Climate Control System .......................... 630 Coolant .................................................. 605 Maintenance MinderTM............................ 585 Oil .......................................................... 599 Precautions ............................................. 582 Remote Transmitter ................................ 629 Replacing Light Bulbs .............................. 610

Safety ...................................................... 583 Service Items ........................................... 590 Tires ........................................................ 617 Transmission Fluid ................................... 607 Under the Hood ...................................... 595 Malfunction Indicator Lamp .............. 93, 659 Map Lights ................................................ 208 Maximum Load Limit ............................... 433 Meters, Gauges ......................................... 109 Mirrors....................................................... 196 Adjusting................................................. 196 Door........................................................ 197 Exterior.................................................... 197 Interior Rearview ..................................... 196 Modifications (and Accessories) .............. 636 Moonroof.................................................. 179 MP3 ................................................... 245, 304 Multi-Information Display Switching the Display ...................... 113, 139 Multi-View Rear Camera .......................... 573
N
Navigation ................................................ 143 Numbers (Identification) .......................... 680

O
Odometer ................................................. 110 Oil (Engine)............................................... 598
Adding.................................................... 601 Checking................................................. 599 Displaying Oil Life.................................... 586 Low Oil Pressure Warning........................ 658 Recommended Engine Oil ....................... 598 Viscosity .................................................. 598 Open Source Licenses............................... 350 Opening Hood....................................................... 597 Trunk ...................................................... 672 Opening/Closing Moonroof ............................................... 179 Power Windows ...................................... 176 Trunk ...................................................... 170 Outside Temperature Display.................. 111 Overheating.............................................. 656
P
Paddle Shifters (7-Speed Manual Shift Mode)................ 447 Panic Mode ............................................... 175 Parking...................................................... 562 Parking Brake ........................................... 554 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Amber) ............................................. 92, 661 Parking Brake and Brake System Indicator (Red) .................................... 90, 91, 660, 661

Index

695

Parking Sensor System.............................. 564 Passenger Airbag Off Indicator ................. 68 Passing Indicators ..................................... 183 Playing Bluetooth® Audio ................ 248, 307 Power Windows........................................ 176 Precautions While Driving
Rain......................................................... 441 Pregnant Women ....................................... 49 Puncture (Tire) .......................................... 641
R
Radio (FM/AM).................................. 240, 286 Radio (SiriusXM®)...................................... 290 Radio Data System (RDS).................. 241, 288 Range ................................................ 116, 141 RDS (Radio Data System).................. 241, 288 Readiness Codes (Emissions Testing) ....... 683 Rear Defogger/Heated Door Mirror
Button...................................................... 192 Rear Seat Heaters ..................................... 221 Rear Seats (Folding Down)....................... 201 Rearview Mirror........................................ 196 Refueling........................................... 428, 575
Fuel Gauge .............................................. 110 Gasoline .......................... 575, 673, 676, 678 Low Fuel Indicator ..................................... 95 Regulations ............................... 467, 620, 681 Remote Transmitter.................................. 163

Replacement Battery .................................................... 629 Bulbs....................................................... 610 Fuses............................................... 664, 666 Tires ................................................ 623, 641 Wiper Blade Rubber ................................ 615
Reporting Safety Defects ......................... 682 Resetting a Trip Meter ..................... 116, 140 Road Departure Mitigation ..................... 537
On and Off.............................................. 540
S
Safe Driving ................................................ 37 Safety Check ............................................... 41 Safety Labels............................................... 85 Safety Message............................................. 4 Safety Support.................................. 122, 148 Seat Belts .................................................... 42
Adjusting the Shoulder Anchor.................. 48 Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners ................. 46 Checking................................................... 50 Fastening .................................................. 47 Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Seat Belt ......................................................... 78 Pregnant Women ...................................... 49 Reminder .................................................. 44 Warning Indicator ............................... 44, 94 Seat Heaters...................................... 220, 221

Seats.......................................................... 198 Adjusting ................................................ 198 Front Seat Heaters .................................. 220 Front Seats.............................................. 198 Rear Seat Heaters.................................... 221 Rear Seats............................................... 201
Security System ........................................ 173 Security System Alarm Indicator .............. 101
Selecting a Child Seat ................................ 75 Selector Knob (Audio) ............................. 237 Setting the Clock...................................... 154 Settings ..................................................... 126 Shift Lever .................................. 26, 443, 445
Releasing ................................................ 655 Won't Move ........................................... 655 Shift Position Indicator .............. 93, 444, 446 Shifting (Transmission) .................... 443, 445 Shoulder Anchor ........................................ 48 Side Airbags ............................................... 62 Side Curtain Airbags .................................. 65 Siri Eyes Free............................................. 252 SiriusXM® Radio ....................................... 290 Smart Shortcuts........................................ 314 Snow Tires ................................................ 625 Spare Tire ................................. 641, 677, 679 Spark Plugs ....................................... 676, 678 Specifications ........................................... 676 Specified Fuel ........................... 575, 676, 678 Speed/Distance Units ....................... 125, 150 Speedometer............................................ 109 SRS Airbags (Airbags) ................................ 54

Index

696

Starting Assist Brake Function ................ 458 Starting the Engine.................................. 436
Does Not Start ........................................ 648 If the Battery Is Dead............................... 652 Steering Wheel Adjusting ................................................ 195 Stopping ................................................... 562 Summer Tires............................................ 626 Sunglasses Holder .................................... 213 Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....... 54 Switches (Around the Steering Wheel)........ 8, 9, 180 System Message Indicator ......................... 99 System Updates........................................ 275
T
Tachometer .............................................. 109 Temperature
Gauge .................................................... 110 Outside Temperature Display .................. 111 Temperature Sensor ........................ 111, 227 Time (Setting)........................................... 154 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)..................................................... 462 Indicator ........................................... 97, 663

Tires ........................................................... 617 Air Pressure ............................. 618, 677, 679 Checking and Maintaining....................... 617 Inspection................................................ 617 Labeling .................................................. 618 Puncture (Flat Tire)................................... 641 Regulations ............................................. 620 Rotation .................................................. 624 Spare Tire ................................ 641, 677, 679 Summer .................................................. 626 Tire Chains .............................................. 625 Wear Indicators ....................................... 622 Winter ..................................................... 625
Tools .......................................................... 640 Towing Your Vehicle ................................ 435
Emergency .............................................. 670 TPMS
(Tire Pressure Monitoring System)......... 462 Indicator ............................................ 97, 663 Traffic Jam Assist ...................................... 528 Traffic Sign Recognition System .............. 545 Transmission ..................................... 443, 445 Fluid ........................................................ 607 Shift Position Indicator ............... 93, 444, 446 Trip Computer .......................................... 266 Trip Meter ......................................... 116, 140 Troubleshooting ....................................... 639 Blown Fuse ...................................... 664, 666 Brake Pedal Vibrates .................................. 33 Buzzer Sounds When Opening Door .......... 34

Emergency Towing.................................. 670 Engine Won't Start.................................. 648 Noise When Braking.................................. 35 Overheating ............................................ 656 Puncture/Flat Tire .................................... 641 Rear Door Won't Open...................... 33, 168 Shift Lever Won't Move........................... 655 Warning Indicators .................................... 88 Trunk......................................................... 170 Lid........................................................... 170 Light Bulb........................................ 676, 678 Release Cord ........................................... 672 Unable to Open....................................... 672 Turbo Engine Vehicle............................... 579 Turn Signals .............................................. 182 Indicators (Instrument Panel) ..................... 98
U
Unlocking the Doors ................................ 159 Unlocking the Front Doors from the Inside ....................................... 166 USB Flash Drives ............... 230, 245, 304, 335 USB Port(s) ................................................ 231 Using the Keyless Access System ............. 159

Index

697

V
Vanity Mirrors ............................................. 11 Vehicle Identification Number................. 680 Vehicle Stability AssistTM (VSA®)............... 459
Off Button ............................................... 460 Off Indicator .............................................. 96 System Indicator ........................................ 96 Viscosity (Oil)............................. 598, 677, 679 Voice Control Operation .......................... 283 Audio Commands.................................... 284 General Commands................................. 284 List Commands........................................ 285 Navigation Commands ............................ 285 Phone Commands ................................... 284 Standard Commands ............................... 285 Voice Portal Screen .................................. 284 Voice Recognition.................................... 283 VSA® (Vehicle Stability AssistTM)............... 459

Window Washers ..................................... 190 Adding/Refilling Fluid .............................. 609 Switch..................................................... 190
Windows (Opening and Closing) ............ 176 Windshield................................................ 190
Cleaning ......................................... 631, 634 Defrosting/Defogging.............................. 224 Washer Fluid ........................................... 609 Wiper Blades ........................................... 615 Wipers and Washers................................ 190 Winter Tires Snow Tires .............................................. 625 Tire Chains .............................................. 625 Wipers and Washers................................. 190 Checking and Replacing Wiper Blades ..... 615 Wireless Charger ...................................... 215 WMA ................................................. 245, 304 Worn Tires ................................................ 617

Index

W
Wallpaper.................................................. 267 Warning Indicator On/Blinking................ 658 Warning Labels ........................................... 85 Warnings ........................................... 125, 150 Warranties (Warranty Manual provided
separately)............................................... 685 Watts ................................................. 676, 678 Wear Indicators (Tire)............................... 622 Wheel Nut Wrench (Jack Handle)............ 644 Wi-Fi Connection ...................................... 317
698

31T20600 OM -14 6 4 6 00X31-T20-6000

Printed in U.S.A.